Home

BL20 – User manual Multiprotocol-gateway for ETHERNET

1. Byte Bit7 Bit 6 Bit 5 Bit 4 Bit 3 Bit 2 Bit 1 Bit 0 n 1 Data from modules to the left n SWIRE Slave 2 SWIRE Slave 1 SO2 SO1 n4 SWIRE Slave 4 SWIRE Slave 3 S04 SO3 n 2 SWIRE Slave 6 SWIRE Slave 5 SO6 SO5 n 3 SWIRE Slave 8 SWIRE Slave 7 SO8 SO7 n 4 SWIRE Slave 10 SWIRE Slave 9 SO10 SO9 n 5 SWIRE Slave 12 SWIRE Slave 11 SO12 SO11 n 6 SWIRE Slave 14 SWIRE Slave 13 S014 S013 n 7 SWIRE Slave 16 SWIRE Slave 15 S016 S015 n 8 ff Data from modules to the right 13 14 D301173 0713 BL20 Ethernet multiprotocol gateway Data image of the technology modules Industri A Table 13 6 Design Status Comment Data bits SOx relay x SOx is transferred as the switch status of the contactor coil from the SWIRE bus master to the appropriate SWIRE bus slave 0 off Off Contactor not switched on 1 on On Contactor switched on 13 1 4 Encoder PWM moduleBL20 E 2CNT 2PWM Detailed information about the process image of the module can be found in separate manual D301224 BL20 l O MODULES BL20 E 2CNT 2PWM chapter 2 13 1 5 RFID moule BL20 2RFID S A BL20 2RFID S and BL20 2RFID A see RFID documentation under www turck de D301173 0713 BL20 Ethernet multiprotocol gateway 13 15 Appendix 13 2 Changing the IP address of a PC network interface card 13 2 1 Changing the IP address in Windows The IP address
2. Figure 7 30 gt Login oject Build Onine Debug Tools Window Help amp Bm X 1A 55 1E 5 3 Li 1 OR 3 ez Slo a y c 1 a B Startpage J Device anes PLC PRG d GVL J Modbus TCP Master x it ModbusTCPSlave Configuration ModbusTCPSlave 1 O Mapping Status n gt PLCLogic i Access Type WRITE Offset Default Value Length Comment e 3 Wetemutipl 625000 c5 4 1 panmetes i Library Manager PLC PRG PRG S Task Configuration MainTask B Ethernet Ethernet Li Modbus TCP Master BL20 E GW EN M 4 n POUs S amp amp Devices Current user nobody 4 Start the program Figure 7 31 Starting the Project Buld Onine Debug Tools Window Help program A 2 c Ba X dA Ss Lo LE CT Si Jo S RR IE B StertPage J Device 5j _E AW FN C PRG dj GVL fj Modbus TCP Master WRITE Offset Default Value Length Comment Write Multiple Registers Function Code 16 16 B040 45120 4 1 parameters i il Library Manager 8 PLC_PRG PRG G Task Configuration MainTask S og Ethernet Ethernet fj Modbus TCP Mast fj BL20 E cw El Move up Move down 0 warning s 4 message s Description Project Object Position zd Size of generated code 64709 bytes BL20 E MP Size of global data 14685 bytes BL20 E MP Total allocated memory sizefor code an BL20_
3. BL20 2AIH I Table 3 18 Byte Bit Parameter name Value Module param eters A default 0 0 Channel 0 activate A setting channel 1 1 deactivate 1 short circuit diagnostics 0 block 1 release A 2 open circuit diagnostics 0 block 1 release A 3 4 Operation mode 0 0 20 mA polling of HART status not possible 124 20 mA polling of HART status not possible 224 20 mA HART active A Cyclic polling of HART status activated 5 6 reserved 7 HART diagnostics 0 release A 1 block 1 0 1 value representation 0 Integer 15 bit sign A channel 1 1 NE 43 2 Extended Range 2 3 similar to byte 0 1 channel 2 4 HART Variable A Defines the channel of which the HART variable is read 0 channel mapping 0 2 channel 1 1 2 channel 2 647 variable mapping Defines which HART variable of the connected sensor is mapped into the module s process data 0 PV primary variable 1 SV 2nd variable 2 TV 3rd variable 3 QV 4th variable D301173 0713 BL20 Ethernet multiprotocol gateway 3 39 Properties gateway and I O modules Table 3 18 Byte Bit Parameter name Module param eters Value 5 HART Variable B Defines the channel of which the HART variable is read 0 channel mapping 0 channel 1 1 2 channel 2 647 variable mapping Defines which HART variable of the connected sensor is mapped into
4. Table 6 3 Address hex Access A Description Modbus regis ters of the module Aro readonly 0x0000 to 0x01FF ro packed process data of inputs rw read write process data length of the modules see Table 6 5 Data width of the I O modules 0x0800 to OxO9FF rw packed process data of outputs process data length of the modules see Table 6 5 Data width of the I O modules 0x1000 to 0x1006 ro gateway identifier 0x100C ro Gateway status see Table 6 6 Register 100Ch Gateway status 0x1010 ro process image length in bit for the intelligent output modules 0x1011 ro process image length in bit for the intelligent input modules 0x1012 ro process image length in bit for the intelligent output modules 0x1013 ro process image length in bit for the intelligent input modules 0x1017 ro Register mapping revision always 1 if not mapping is incompatible with this description 0x1018 to 0x101A ro group diagnostics of I O modules 0 to 32 1 bit per I O module 0x1020 ro watchdog actual time ms 0x1120 rw watchdog predefined time ms default 0 see also Error behavior of outputs watchdog page 6 23 0x1121 rw Watchdog reset register 0x1130 rw Modbus connection mode register page 6 17 0x1131 rw Modbus connection timeout in sec Def 0 never page 6 17 0x113C to 0x113D rw Modbus parameter restore page 6 17 reset of parameters to default values D301173 0713 BL20 Ethernet
5. Figure 7 14 BL20 E MP project CoDeSy J fi Setting the File Edit View Project Build Online Debug Tools Window Help Modbus chan cu B amp dh 5 OF nels exam ples Devices 4 X StartPage J Device jj BL20 E GW EN Bl PLC PRG GV f Modbus TCP Master X S E BL20 EMP J Device CoDeSys Control WinV3 ModbusTCP Slave Modbus Slave Init ModbusTCPSlave Configuration ModbusrcPSl gt E PLCLogic Name Access Type Trigger READ Offset Length Error Handling WRITE Offset Len Application Channel Name Access Type Read Holding Registers Function Trigger Cydic v Cycle TiNe ms Comment READ Register Offset 0x0000 Length 1 WRITE Register Offset 0x0000 Length 1 D l Delete Edit 0 Pous Se pq Current user nobody The Modbus communication channels are defined by E Access Type Modbus function code which defines the access method bit or word wise read or write READ Register or WRITE Register Offset Specification of the start address for the Modbus Slave s register that has to be read or written These specifications have to be taken from the slave s Modbus documentation D301173 0713 BL20 Ethernet multiprotocol gateway 7 15 Application example BL20 E GW EN for Modbus TCP CoDeSys Win V3 Modbus data mapping The mapping for the input and output data of a BL20 Modbus station depends on it s config
6. 3 1 Functionof the gateway orei isoine 3 3 1 1 Versin OVEN VIOW NE aE E E NIN E ETTEI INSESTO ENESE ESS 3 3 2 ELIT M 4 3 3 DIPL rLme 6 3 3 1 Top view BL20 E GW EN lt VN 03 00 sssssssssssssscsnsccssscessscesssccssccsseccssecsuseessscesssccsssecesscesssecsnccuscessseesascessscesuseesaneessneceaseesneesees 6 3 3 2 Top view BL20 E GW EN 2 VN 03 00 cssssssccssscsssscssscccsscccnscessscessscesssessueessusessnseesuscessecessecssscessuscensecenscessseessseceasecsusessnsessnseesees 7 3 3 3 Bloc so F To 17 n Mr ES 8 3 3 4 General technical data of a station csssssssssecsssecsseecsnsecssscessscesseccsseccssccessecssscecsscessuccesuesuecessecesssecssscesseccssceesneecsnecesncessnecesseeess Approvals and tests RR 3 3 5 Technical data for the push in tension clamp terminals 3 3 6 EEDdisplayss AE E E E O duree uuu dd em tp ROC DUDEN 3 4 Connection options at the gateway sssscecsecssscsscssesscssccsscssccsscssessecssccsscssecsessscssesssccsecssessessesseers 14 3 4 1 secet EE aaiae 3 4 2 Field bus connection via Ethernet switch 3 4 3 Service IMEC aC Osee enero nat aer E Ea RE a a ES EEN A 3 5 Address assignment A 15 BP ERE ET E E SEAT ETEA 3
7. 8 5 3 Parameter module parameterization sescsssscssssccsseccssecsssecsssecsssccssscesscesscesssccssscesseccssccesseessuscessecesscecsueecsuceesnseesseeeseceeses 8 6 Description of user data for acyclic services 1 eese eee eee eene esee entente etse natns tns stats stone tos sn sano 8 14 8 6 1 Description of the acyclic gateway user data eerte eeent teen tenente nni tte notte notti notti nin ttt notte 8 14 8 6 2 Description of the acyclic module user data D301173 0713 BL20 Ethernet multiprotocol gateway 8 1 Implementation of PROFINET 8 1 Address assignment Note i In PROFINET the connected device is not identified by it s IP address but recognized and addressed by it s device name The selection of a device name for a special IO device can thus be compared to the setting of the PROFIBUS address for a DP slave The device name can be freely chosen Note It is not necessary to address the station s internal module bus 8 2 D301173 0713 BL20 Ethernet multiprotocol gateway GSDML file 8 2 GSDML file You can download the actual GSDML file for the gateway BL20 E GW PN GSDML Vxx Turck BL20 xxx xml from our Homepage www turck com 8 3 Default values Default values IP address 192 168 1 254 subnet mask 255 255 255 0 Name Note E When storing the device name orthe IP address or when resetting the gateway to the default values the
8. Ctrl D Ctrl I DFINETJO System 100 Bixi Suchen NENNEN aj ail Profile lam a turckbia Standard X B Additional Field Devices amp vo 8 3 TURCK E EC BL20 ep BL20E Gw EN gj analog input analog output digital input EC digital output BL20 16DO 24VDC 0 54 P l BL20 200 120 230vaC 0 54 F f BL20 2DO 24VDC 0 5A N 9 8L20 200 24VDC 0 54 P Edit Ethernet Node J BL20 2D0 24VDC 24 P Verify Device Name reesei ERE Device Name lj BL20 2DO R ND J BL20 32D0 24VDC 0 54 P lj BL20 4D0 24VDC 0 54 P RON MEAE AP r Ethemet node MAC address Nodes accessible online r Set IP configuration Use IP parameters Start Stop V Fast search 0 0 0 0 Elash MAC address EXER 109 192 168 1 3 192 168 1 5 192 168 1 6 00 0 8C DE AE 00 07 46 80 00 01 00 0E 8C B2 AC A3 00 07 46 FF AB FF SCALANCE 57 300 TURCK scalance x202 2p pr o turck fgen 30 TURCK turck fgen 107 Cancel Help 2 Browse the network for active network nodes identified by means of their MAC address by using the button Browse in the field Ethernet node All PROFINET nodes found in the network answer the command sending their MAC address and their device name D30
9. 10 6 Power SUPPLY to the gat WAY W 10 6 Module bus refreshing BL20 BR 24VDC D ssssssssscsssscssssessccssscessseccuccssccesscecsuecessecessecssseccnscessseesuseesusecesceesseessueesnseesees 10 6 Creating potential groups rsss EARR Rs 10 7 C rail cross connection EET T A a AA 10 7 Direct wiring of relay modules uu essssssscssssecsssssccssssccssssecesssecesstecesssseesssscssssscessssessssssesssssecssssesesuussssssseeesunssessesessssneeessesees 10 9 Protecting the service interface on the gateway ecce cresce esser eese eene e seen senos ene sees ens senos sno 10 10 Plugging and pulling electronics modules eere e eere eee esee eene n etna en enata essen sena sene 10 10 Extending an existing station eere eese eene estne enne en etas en asta sn setas s seas tas enses sss s sess esses sea soa sene 10 10 BHL UEICIDOULIDET P 10 11 D301173 0713 BL20 Ethernet multiprotocol gateway 10 1 Guidelines for station planning 10 1 Module arrangement 10 1 1 Random module arrangement The arrangement of the I O modules within a BL20 station can basically be chosen at will Nevertheless it can be useful with some applications to group certain modules together Note i A mixed usage of gateways of the BL20 ECO and the BL20 standard product line and I O modules of both product lines base modules with tension cl
10. sx Suchen nt i Profil Standard m ASE PROFIBUS DP ME PROFIBUS PA a ojx xi gt 58 PROFINET I0 1 Gateway ma 3 turck foe HMI gi H E 1 0 ERE HD 3 Network Components SCALANCE w 700 SCALANCE x 200 SCALANCE x 300 SCALANCE x 400 4 tc DDI amp e amp amp Schaltgerate Sensors P 3 Weitere FELDGERATE r o gg TURCK cg BL20 EAdrsse A D gg BL2UE GW EN furck ble FOR 1 Analog Ausgang devo 1 1 Analog Eingang d ww 0 H Digital Ausgang d wc Digital Eingang guum mmm H Leerplatz jm H Technologie mm C Versorgung SS 5g BL20 GW PN ij t x FGEN SSS SIMATIC 300 INE BH SIMATIC 400 ce 6827323 zd N TURCK z Modulares Feldbus IO System in IP20 El GSDML V2 25 TURCK BL20 E Gw EN Dr cken Sie F1 um Hilfe zu erhalten And PA 2 Adouble click on the gateway symbol opens the dialog Properties TURCK D301173 0713 BL20 Ethernet multiprotocol gateway 9 9 Application example BL20 E GW EN with PROFINET S7 3 Enterthe gateway s device name in this dialog Figure 9 11 Dialog Properties TURCK 9 10 Pr
11. USER MANUAL MULTIPROTOCOL GATEWAY FOR ETHERNET BL20 E GW EN Sense it Connect it Bus it Solve it All brand and product names are trademarks or registered trade marks of the owner concerned Edition 07 2013 Hans Turck GmbH Muelheim an der Ruhr All rights reserved including those of the translation No part of this manual may be reproduced in any form printed photocopy microfilm or any other process or processed duplicated or distributed by means of electronic systems without written permission of Hans Turck GmbH amp Co KG Muelheim an der Ruhr Subject to alterations without notice Industr A Table of Contents 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 2 1 3 1 3 1 1 3 2 1 4 2 1 2 1 1 2 1 2 2 1 3 2 2 2 2 1 222 2 2 3 224 22 5 2 2 6 2 2 7 2 2 8 2 2 9 2 2 10 3 1 3 1 1 3 2 3 3 3 3 1 3 3 2 3 3 3 3 3 4 3 3 5 3 3 6 3 4 3 4 1 3 4 2 3 4 3 3 5 3 5 1 3 5 2 About this manual p atlutintubEpenelogque 1 2 Additional oTal VIO a C o 1 2 Description of symbols used cere eerte eene e eene eene tenens eene tros en assets esset a sette esse ea ene esse ena senes etas 1 3 General Prescribed use Notes concerning planning installation of this product teen nnt ntt nnn ttts ntn ttt notte nnns 1 4 E EAEI A DTI DITS LIED 1 5 BL20 philosophy The b sic CONCEP
12. 3 7 6 Station Diagnostics Diagnostic messages of the device are displayed on the Station Diagnostics page 3 7 7 Ethernet Statistics The page Ethernet Statistics shows information like the port status telegram and error counters etc The page can above all be useful for analyzing network problems 3 7 8 Links This page contains for example a link to the product page on the TURCK homepage D301173 0713 BL20 Ethernet multiprotocol gateway 3 31 Properties gateway and l O modules 3 7 9 Change Admin Password Please define an individual password for administrator rights Default password password Note A reset of the device to the default settings using the switch position F Reset also causes areset of the password to password Figure 3 23 n Change Admin Go f http 192 168 1112 ct O BOX F Change Admin Password m 193 P asswor d Datei Bearbeiten Ansicht Favoriten Extras BL20 E GW EN Embedded Website of BL20 Modular I O Module Change Admin Password Home Network Configuration Change Administrator Password Poe Configuration This form allows you to setup your own password for your gateway If you alter the default password Gateway Diagnostics there s no way to recover the password except sending it to the TURCK service Ethernet Statistics Links Change Admin Password Old password New password Retype new password For comments or questio
13. 11 1 3 Lightning protection The cables must be routed in double grounded metal piping or in reinforced concrete cable ducts Signal cables must be protected against overvoltage by varistors or inert gas filled overvoltage arrestors Varistors and overvoltage arrestors must be installed at the point where the cables enter the building 11 1 4 Transmission media For a communication via Ethernet different transmission media can be used E coaxial cable 10Base2 thin coax 10Base5 thick coax yellow cable E optical fiber 10BaseF E twisted two wire cable 10BaseT with shielding STP or without shielding UTP Note i TURCK offers a variety of cable types for fieldbus lines as premoulded or bulk cables with different connectors The ordering information on the available cable types can be taken from the BL20 catalog D301173 0713 BL20 Ethernet multiprotocol gateway 11 3 Guidelines for Electrical Installation 11 2 Potential relationships 11 2 1 General The potential relationship of a Ethernet system realized with BL20 modules is characterized by the following The system supply of gateway and I O modules as well as the field supply are realized via one power feed at the gateway E All BL20 modules gateway Power Feeding and I O modules are connected capacitively via base modules to the mounting rails The block diagram shows the arrangement of a typical BL20 station with Ethernet gateway Figure 11
14. BL20 2AIHFH BL20 4AI U I BL20 E 8AI U I 4AI PT NI BL20 E 4AI TC BL20 2AOH I BL20 4DI NAMUR 7 overshoot upper BL20 xAl x Measurement value range error OoR limit BL20 2AI PT NI 2 3 BL20 2AI THERMO PI BL20 E 4AI TC BL20 4AI U I BL20 E 8AI U I AAI PT NI BL20 2AIH I overflow BL20 E 4AO U I Measurement value range error OoR BL20 2AOHH Value above upper limit BL20 1SSI sensor value overflow 8 undershoot lower BL20 xAl x Measurement value range error OoR limit BL20 2AI PT NI 2 3 BL20 2AI THERMO PI BL20 E 4AI TC BL20 4Al U I BL20 E 8AI U I 4AI PT NI BL20 2AIH I undervoltage BL20 E 4AO U I Measurement value range error OoR BL20 2AOHH value below lower limit BL20 1SSI sensor value underflow D301173 0713 BL20 Ethernet multiprotocol gateway 8 7 Implementation of PROFINET Table 8 3 PROFINET Error code possible module diagnostics Error codes d module diag No Text 1 0 module diagnostic message of the module nostics dec 9 error BL20 E 8AI U I 4AI PT NI overflow underflow OUFL BL20 E 4AO U I BL20 2AOH I invalid value 16 parameterization BL20 E 1SWIRE PLC SLAVE RDYerr error BL20 1RSxxx parameterization error BL20 1SSI BL20 2RFID x invalid parameter BL20 E 2CNT 2PWM parameter error at channel CHO CNT1 PAR ERR CH1
15. Figure 13 3 Process input data of the SSI Data Image module Process input data SSI PLC Meaning of the data bits process input Table 13 3 Designation Value Description Meaning of the data bits process input REG_RD_DATA 0 Content of the register to be read if REG_RD_ABORT 0 2 4 If REG RD ABORT 1 then REG RD DATA O REG RD ABORT 0 The reading of the register defined in REG RD ADR has been accepted and executed The content of the register can be found in the user data REG RD DATA byte 0 3 1 Reading of the register defined in REG RD ADR has not been accepted The user data range REG RD DATA Bytes 0 3 is zero REG RD ADR 0 63 Address of the register to be read If the read operation is successful REG RD ABORT 0 the user data is located in REG RD DATA of the process input data bytes 0 to 3 REG WR ACEPT 0 Writing the user data from the process output to the register addressed with REG WR ADR in the process output could not be done 1 Writing the user data from the process output to the register addressed with REG WR ADR in the process output was successful D301173 0713 BL20 Ethernet multiprotocol gateway 13 7 Appendix Table 13 3 Designation Value Description Meaning of the data bits process input REG WR AKN No modification of the data in the register bank by process output i e REG WR 0 A write job would be a
16. Table 4 27 Attr No Attribute name Get Set Type Description Object Instance dec hex 3 diagnostic instance 104 68h GW G S BOOL 0 disabled summarized 1 active diagnostics 1 bit of diagnosis mapped at the end of the input data image page 4 2 Changes become valid after a start up 105 69h GW G S BOOL 0 disabled manufacturer 1 active specific The channel specifc diagnostic bits are diagnostics mapped into the process input data see scheduled page 4 2 diagnostics Changes become valid after a start up 106 6Ah reserved Object Instance 4 COS CYCLIC instance Table 4 28 Attr No Attribute name Get Type Description Object Instance dec Set 4 COS CYCLIC hed instance 104 68h COS data G S ENUM The actual data are loaded to the non mapping USINT volatile memory of the station Changes become valid after a start up 0 standard Data of COS message input data 1 process input data only the process data input image is transferred to scanner 2 to 7 reserved D301173 0713 BL20 Ethernet multiprotocol gateway 4 21 Implementation of EtherNet IP 4 3 4 Miscellaneous Parameters Class VSC 126 Instance 1 port 1 Instance 2 port 2 Table 4 29 Attr No Attribute name Get Type Description Object Instance dec Set hex A default 109 6Dh Ethernet port G S DWORD 0 Autonegotiate AutoMDIX A setting Parameters 1 100BaseT half duplex linear topology AutoMDIX disabled
17. ote Disconnect Get device state P Load from device n Store to device Parameter Measured value Simulation Diagnosis Display channels Channels Topology Scan Diagnostic Scan Up Download Manager Print Additional functions XQ Add device Exchange device E Delete device Properties TCP IP BL Service Ethernet Se Bojeye aoa g d AAN Ss Compare offline Compare online Set value Scan list Identification About Update DTM Busaddress management KG all e o lt NONAME gt Administrator D301173 0713 BL20 Ethernet multiprotocol gateway Browser HIMA Export Accessory Preset DTM TAG address tag DTM maintenance M Write device data to file 3 23 Properties gateway and I O modules Figure 3 14 Searching network Nodes in the Busaddress management A Search function in the Busad dress manage ment 3 24 File Edit View Project Device Extras Wi PLECIA HEET Bojeye arinagq ib Be Sle IPL Pt 8 98 x 28 Busaddress management Orline avalable devices Add devices arualy Industrial LAN 192 168 1 44 255 255 255 0 Devos oe I rineD TP acess __ Netnack S E ereladdesr ode Devicetype Online ID_ Busaddess Designation Tag Jee SS EE SES DJOONE NN Note The access of the IO ASSISTANT to the station is only possible if the station al
18. A Attention When installing please pay attention to the following the shield should be connected immediately when entering the system the shield connection to the shield rail should be of low impedance the stripped cable ends are to be kept as short as possible the cable shield is not to be used as a bonding conductor The insulation of the shielded data cable should be stripped and connected to the shield rail when the system is used in stationary operation The connection and securing of the shield should be made using metal shield clamps The shield clamps must enclose the shielding braid and in so doing create a large surface contact area The shield rail must have a low impedance for example fixing points of 10 to 20 cm apart and be connected to a reference potential area The cable shield should not be severed but routed further within the system for example to the switchgear cabinet right up to the interface connection Note Should it not be possible to ground the shield on both sides due to switching arrangements or device specific reasons then it is possible to route the second cable shield side to the local reference potential via a capacitor short connection distances If necessary a varistor or resistor can be connected parallel to the capacitor to prevent disruptive discharges when interference pulses occur Note A further possibility is a double shielded cable galvanically separated
19. 1 A comparison of the register contents has produced the following result REG SSI POS lt REG LOWER LIMIT STS OFLW 0 A comparison of the register contents has produced the following result REG SSI POS x REG UPPER LIMIT 1 A comparison of the register contents has produced the following result REG SSI POS gt REG UPPER LIMIT D301173 0713 BL20 Ethernet multiprotocol gateway 13 9 Appendix Table 13 3 Designation Value Description Meaning of the data bits process input ERR SSI 0 SSI encoder signal present 1 SSI encoder signal faulty e g due to a cable break SSI DIAG 0 No enabled status signal is active SSI_STSx 0 1 At least one enabled status signal is active SSI_STSx 1 13 10 D301173 0713 BL20 Ethernet multiprotocol gateway Data image of the technology modules Process output data Field output data is output from an BL20 1SSI module to a field device The process output data is the data that is transferred by the PLC via a gateway to the BL20 1SSI module The transmission is realized in a 8 byte format which is structured as follows 1 byte contains a Stop bit for interrupting communication with the encoder 1 byte is used for controlling the comparison operations 1 byte contains the register address of the data to be written to bytes 0 to 3 of this telegram and a write request E 1 byte contains the register address for the data that is to b
20. Vendor lt All vendors Scan For Devices Disable Device Update Device C Add Folder Edit Object Edit Object With bration Se Groups Modbus TCP Master Version 3 4 3 0 Model Number Description A device that works as a Modbus Master on Ethernet Append selected device as last child of Ethernet You can select another target node in the navigator while this window is open E Dont save network path in project I 7 Secure online mode P Pous 3e Devices Current user nobody 7 10 D301173 0713 BL20 Ethernet multiprotocol gateway Programming with CoDeSys 7 3 6 Adding a Modbus TCP slave 1 Now add the Modbus TCP slaves to the project and rename them if necessary H rm Figure 7 10 BL20_E_MP project CoDeSys Selecting a slave Be t9 ve moet i onne pebug Tods Window Hep SSi A iC IEEE gk x io Gag m B Start Pag X BL20 E MP Modbus TCP Sla J Device CoDeSys Control Winv3 Cikan m PLCLogic Ty o Application poet Append device Insert device Plug device Update device Gateway 1 j fl Library Manager m AUR live pa
21. All mounting rails must be mounted onto the mounting plate with a low impedance over a large surface area and must be correctly earthed Use corrosion resistant mounting rails Figure 11 2 200 mm 7 87 inch B Mounting j 2 tu 3 options N e C ATS 35 m ma mama B mounting rail EDD ee eee C mounting plate A N h3 N x N Mount the mounting rails over a large surface area and with a low impedance to the support system using screws or rivets Remove the isolating layer from all painted anodized or isolated metal components at the connection point Protect the connection point against corrosion for example with grease caution use only suitable grease 11 6 D301173 0713 BL20 Ethernet multiprotocol gateway Shielding of cables Industri A 11 4 Shielding of cables Shielding is used to prevent interference from voltages and the radiation of interference fields by cables Therefore use only shielded cables with shielding braids made from good conducting materials copper or aluminum with a minimum degree of coverage of 80 The cable shield should always be connected to both sides of the respective reference potential if no exception is made for example such as high resistant symmetrical analog signal cables Only then can the cable shield attain the best results possible against electrical and magnetic fields A one sided shield connection merely achieves an isolation against electrical fields
22. BL20_E_GW_EN BOOL Gi Tasks Z Mere ata Type E fa MainTask BL20 E GW INT Status Word Ch MainProgram IR BL20 Inputs slot 1 slot 2 rogremiads BL20_E Inputs slot 3 E MainRoutine BL20 E GW INT Inputs slot 4 E Unscheduled Programs popa danh l BL20 E GW INT Inputs slot 4 3 Motion Groups a E Ungrouped Axes 8 41620 E GW ENO AE ETHERNE D301173 0713 BL20 Ethernet multiprotocol gateway 5 13 Application example BL20 E GW EN with EtherNet IP Allen Bradley 5 14 D301173 0713 BL20 Ethernet multiprotocol gateway Industri A 6 Implementation of Modbus TCP 6 1 Common Modbus description ccccccscscccscsccsccssccseccsssccssccssccsscesssccscccsscessescsccesccsesesssecesccssscccsccssceees 6 2 6 1 1 Protocol description 6 1 2 PRIM PNE 6 2 Implemented Modbus functions e eere ee eee eee eee eee seen ete ea aste ta sse ea ss eaae seen aee eP ase eaa P e eene eee eo s eaa 6 6 6 3 Modbus Te ELT EORR ETT 6 7 6 3 1 Structure of the packed in output process data e e eie eeee teen teen ttts ntn ttostttettttna tton ttt s ttnas 6 12 Packed input process data ccscssscssssscsssscssesccsecssesccssecsssecsssessnsecssscesseecsscscsusecsseccsccesseeesneesscessesessecesseesaseessueceaneesaeeceaeeeeasees 6 12 Packed output process Data cesssssecsecssseccssecsssecsnecsssseessescssecesseecsseceseecese
23. D301173 0713 BL20 Ethernet multiprotocol gateway i 3 5 3 3 5 4 3 5 5 3 5 6 3 5 7 3 5 8 3 5 9 3 5 10 3 5 11 3 6 3 6 1 3 7 3 7 1 3 7 2 3 7 3 3 7 4 3 7 5 3 7 6 3 7 7 3 7 8 3 7 9 3 8 3 8 1 3 8 2 3 9 3 9 1 3 9 2 3 9 3 3 9 4 3 10 3 10 1 3 10 2 3 10 3 3 10 4 3 10 5 3 10 6 4 1 4 1 1 4 1 2 4 2 4 2 1 4 2 2 4 2 3 4 2 4 4 2 5 4 2 6 Resetting the IP address switch position RESTORE ssssscssecsssscsssccssccsseesscesssccsseecsueecsuecessscessesueesusecsaseceseessaeeesneeesnsees Address setting via DIP switches 2 to 27 srssssssssssssssssssssssssssssssssssssnsoessssssescsssesssssssssssansssssnsnsosssssescssscsessesssassssssssasovonesesssesess Address setting via the mode DHCP ssssssessscssssscessseccsnssecsssseccsnscecsnssscsssscecsuscecsusscessscecsusccsnseesuuseecussesessnseecunsescesseeecunseeceesess Address setting via the mode BootP Address setting via the mode PGM Address setting via the mode PGM DHCP universal mode m F Reset Reset to factory setting sssssssssssssecsssecssssssnscessecsssccsssccenscsssscessccesscccsuccessecessecessecesseecssccssscesascessscesuscesascceseeceaeeesneessnsees Addressing via I O ASSISTANT 3 FDT DTM essssscssssssssccssscssscccssccessccessccessccsssecsssecsnsecsnscesuscesascessccssscssneecsuccesnecessecesseeenseestes Addressing via Web server Version gt VN 03 00 cccssssssssscssss
24. Power distribution modules Digital input modules Analog input modules ierit entren keen eio rel ennt rece t esiti Digital output modul s ertt casae t RIPE ee RD TOR IER Tope ctee deed eie t eq Analog output modules eie entere eet iet esent tene edet ne tenues edet ete eee et eee Ree e Rete ee ten Technology Modules e M E Implementation of EtherNet IP Diagnostic messages via the process data eee ee eee esee eee en etes e tns ten ssa ta tisse ea senses ss sa sesta senso 4 2 Summarized Diagnostics esce tete aAA AKAT ENEE AAE ATES e eec up ete indere titu aiei 4 2 SYele re V Te IBITETe a o 1 i e D IEEE D 4 2 Classes and Instances of the EtherNet IP stations Ether Net IP Standard lass6s ttti tee tae ae ede eo e ER et t Dieu dt tut red Eee hate identity Obj Te OI D rer M Assembly Object 0x04 wicccccncecsveccotecsosscannseetsscsesecsccacsssecsnssesvecesnsssonsesunesenecssaiccsesestadectsscddruseciuedesusctabesesVoc ansvesheetenisscanocconsesedecotaecteces Connection Manager Object 0x06 titt titi ete tiep eres de Dele delen eco ceneeoe ed ee petere Rep dee eene TCP IP Interface Object OxF5 M Ethernet Link Object OXF6 3 25 itte aiara aE ele iee renais Eea tereti ences idee be Red D301173 0713 BL20 Ethernet multiprotocol gateway 4 3 4 3 1
25. 2 10BaseT full duplex linear topology AutoMDIX disabled 3 100BaseT half duplex linear topology AutoMDIX disabled 4 100BaseT full duplex linear topology AutoMDIX disabled 112 70h 10 controller G DWORD The number of instances of this parameter software revision depends on the number of I O controllers 4 22 D301173 0713 BL20 Ethernet multiprotocol gateway Industri A 5 Application example BL20 E GW EN with EtherNet IP Allen Bradley 5 1 GONNA ss ssssiescosccsicssscssicssssasstcasscosiesssoassioasisosionsssdcsseesaesseasssacsaseeaseastaasscsaseoateastosssasssnasubssteasaseseaneseoiseonsssase 5 2 5 1 1 ESTO DET EEUU 5 2 SHAWA E ereet AE E E a MU ILE EL EE 5 2 SOFT Wa ensuing 5 2 5 2 AfUPIDSceliprlme T 5 3 5 2 1 Configuration of the network in RS Logix 5000 eese terere teen ttts ntes nett netto ttts n ttssnintts nonis 5 3 Configuration of the controller eese a a 5 3 Configuring the BL20 station eee eese esent teen tttnn ttes tte notte notte EEEREN 5 4 5 2 2 Downloading the VO configuration sssssssscssssscsssssccsssecssssecssssscessssecssscersssescesssecessseecsnscecsnseeceusscecsnseecesssecesnseecsnsescesnseeeesee 5 7 5 3 I O GataiMAP PING sicesicsiccsscencssscesesssasactssossbeadsssnssesssscssesossousscossiossssnssesesaessios sensbiensiceccossseocsiessduosto
26. 64h maj rel 1000 Min Rel 101 Max instance G USINT Contains the number of the highest instance 65h of an object created on this level in the class hierarchy 102 it of instances G USINT Contains the number of Object Instances 66h created in this class 103 Max class G USINT Contains the number of the last Class 67h attribute Attribute to be implemented 4 16 D301173 0713 BL20 Ethernet multiprotocol gateway VSC Vendor Specific Classes Industri A 4 3 2 Gateway Class VSC 100 64h This class contains all information which refers to the whole station not to the different I O channels Class instance Note i Please refer to paragraph Class Instance of the VSCs page 4 16 for the description of the class instance for the VSC Object Instance 1 Table 4 23 Attr No Attribute name Get Type Description Instance dee Set hex Boot instance 100 Max object G USINT Contains the number of the last object 64h attribute attribute to be implemented 101 Hardware revision G STRUCT Contains the hardware revision number of the 65h station USINT Maj USINT Min 102 Firmware revision G STRUCT Contains the firmware revision of the boot 66h firmware maj min 103 Service tool ident G UDINT Contains the BOOT ID number that serves as 67h number an identification number for the software I O ASSISTANT 104 Hardware G STRUCT Contains station hardware information UINT 68h info
27. BL20 Ethernet multiprotocol gateway Process data access 3 The counter is set to 0 by setting the variable xReset BOOL to 1 XReset has been defined and mapped to BItBL20 E GW EN l Data 1 0 by building an Alias in the Main Program Figure 5 15 2 gu e 5 c RSLogix 5000 BL E GW EN MP Controller Tags BL E GW EN MP controller D efinition and File Edit View Search Logic Communications Tools Window Help 8 x mapping of PESE Wiles abu a e jj ale i cs Offline I E RUN A Pa z amp l Forces b S No Edits a BU m D 4j ooo oe g Controller BL_E_GW_EN_MP Scope fg BL_E_GW_EN_ v Show Show All 9 Controller Tags BL E GW EN MP x FY 7 Controller Fault Handler m o Aiseto aae DAS Power Up Handler AB ETHERNET 8 83 Tasks 3 JE Galain A AB ETHERNET_ MainTask AB ETHERNET_ CRM Ef RSLogix 5000 BL_E_GW_EN_MP Program Tags MainProgram Joes lg File Edit View Search Logic Communications Tools Window Help B8 Xx alal amp ae lhe fie var aal Offline f E RUN E Path lt none gt Forces gt T Ok i No Edits ar eh lt ain Scope MainProgam v Show Show dil Controller BL E GW EN MP Controller T m a en A ae Base Tag Data Type Ux Controller Fault Handler P 8 Power Up Hander Reset BL2 E GW ENH Data 110C
28. BL20 E GW EN GW UU UD s Top view without label ifla z E Table 3 6 Designation Function Meaning of the DIP switches underlaba Label 20 27 10 3 Address switch for setting the last byte of the gateway s IP address only if MODE is OFF see Table 3 7 Combinations of address switches page 3 17 MODE 2 Depending on its setting this switch changes the function of address switches 2 2 see Table 3 7 Combinations of address switches page 3 17 CFG 1 Switching from OFF to ON activates the Synchronization of the station configuration Note i The setting of DIP switch 27 CFG and 2 MODE is also important for the firmware download Please read Firmware Download page 10 11 D301173 0713 BL20 Ethernet multiprotocol gateway Address assignment Industri A Table 3 7 Address CFG MODE Name Function Combinations switches of address 22 27 switches Value 0 OFF OFF RESTORE Restoring the Default setting of the gateway page 3 15 1 254 OFF OFF Address Setting the last byte of the gateway s IP address Resetting the IP address switch position RESTORE page 3 17 1 OFF ON DHCP gateway Address setting via the mode DHCP 2 OFF ON BOOTP gateway Address setting via the
29. CNT2 PAR ERR CH2 PWM1 PAR ERR CH4 PWM2 PAR ERR 21 hardware failure BL20 E 8AI U I A4AI PT NI Hardware error BL20 2AIH I BL20 E 4AI TC BL20 E 4AO U I BL20 2AOH I BL20 2RFID x transceiver hardware error BL20 1RSxxx Hardware error 22 behavior at BL20 2AIH I communication error error communication loss BL20 2AOH I BL20 E 1SWIRE Communication SWIRE slave SDegp BL20 2RFID x parameter not supported by transceiver 24 User software BL20 2AIH I Invalid parameter error BL20 2AO H BL20 2RFID x software error 25 Cold junction BL20 2AI THERMO PI no Pt1000 sensor found compensation ator BL20 E 4AI TC 27 unknown error BL20 E 2CNT 2PWM Hardware error 8 8 D301173 0713 BL20 Ethernet multiprotocol gateway Diagnosis in PROFINET Industri A Table 8 3 PROFINET Error code possible module diagnostics Error codes p module diag No Text 1 0 module diagnostic message of the module nostics dec 28 Common error BL20 2AIH I HART status error BL20 E 4AI TC Measurement value range error BL20 2AOH I HART status error BL20 E 1SWIRE general error message GEN BL20 1SSI SSI group diagnostics 29 configuration BL20 E 1SWIRE SWIRE MASTER SWep error TYPE ERROR TYPE D301173 0713 BL20 Ethernet multiprotocol gateway 8 9 Implementation of PROFINET 8 5 Parameterization 8 5 1 Gateway parameters The BL20 gateways for PROFINET occupie 4 parameter bytes Description of the gateway parameters
30. Communication bytes and nominal current consumption of the BL20 modules right to the gateway max sum lmg 400 mA is reached a Bus Refreshing module has to be used in order to provide the module bus voltage To the right of the Bus Refreshing module the sum of the modules current consumptions can amount to 1 5 A Attention Ensure that a sufficient number of Bus Refreshing and Power Feeding modules are used if the system is extended to its maximum Note i If the system limits are exceeded the software I O ASSISTANT 3 FDT DTM generates an error message when the user activates the command Verify station For the calculation of the maximum system extension the following table contains an overview about the modules nominal current consumptions Table 10 1 Module Communication bytes Nominal current Communica on the module bus consumption at the tion bytes and module bus nominal current consumption of the BL20 modules BL20 PF 24VDC D 2 28 mA BL20 PF 120 230VAC D 2 25 mA BL20 2DI 24VDC P 1 28 mA BL20 2DI 24VDC N 1 28 mA BL20 2DI 120 230VAC 1 28 mA BL20 4DI 24VDC P 1 29 mA BL20 4DI 24VDC N 1 28 mA BL20 4DI NAMUR 5 40 mA BL20 E 8DI 24VDC P 1 15 mA BL20 E 16DI 24VDC P 2 15 mA BL20 16DI 24VDC P 2 45 mA D301173 0713 BL20 Ethernet multiprotocol gateway 10 3 Guidelines for station planning Table 10 1 Communica tion bytes and nominal current consumption of
31. PLC PRG dj GVL fj Modbus TCP Master v x Ld i sL20 EMP f Device CoDesys Control wind ModbusTCP Slave Modbus Slave Channel Modbus Slave Init ModbusTCPSlave Configuration ModbusTCPSlave 1 O M E al PLC Logic Access Type Trigger REA Length WRITE Offset Application Write Single Register Function Code 06 CYCLIC 16 0800 c in Library M eer E P c PR RM Task Conf Channel E Main Name Counter value 1 g Modbus TCP Access Type Write Single Register Function Code 06 x Sened moger ord nes um Comment READ Register Offset Length 1 Error Handling Keep last Value WRITE Reaister Offset 0x0800 Length 1 OK Cancel LI e Pous S Devices Current user nobody 7 18 D301173 0713 BL20 Ethernet multiprotocol gateway Programming with CoDeSys 1 2 Mapping counter value to QWO The mapping of the counter value VAR Counter to the station s output register is done the the ModbusTCPSlave I O Mapping Double click the field variable in the respective line Use the button to open the dialog box Input Assistant Select the variable to be mapped As Counter been defined in PLC PRG see Programming example program it can be found there Figure 7 19 BL20 E MP project CoDeSys cl 2 Mapping of the Ele Edt View project Buld Onine Debug Tools Window Help countervalueto 35 08 amp Ha Ux dA th gilo QWO Devi
32. active A Group diagnostics is activated 1 inactive Group diagnostics is not activated Byte 2 U AUXERR Error message Voltage U Activate system diagnostics U Auxerr Uauxerr Will generate an error message as soon as the power supply goes below a level at which the function of the relays is not guaranteed 0 active A Error message Uauyera activated 1 inactive Error message U uyer hot activated Byte 3 reserved Byte 4 reserved Was up to version VN 01 03 Lifeguarding time of the SWIRE slaves Lifeguarding time of Lifeguardi the SWIRE slaves ng time mS only up to 0x02 OxFF Lifeguarding time of the SWIRE slaves versi n 0x64 A Setting of lifeguarding time of SWIRE slaves timeout time up to VNO01 03 automatic reset of the slaves in the event of communication failure n 10ms Default 1s OxFF OxFF Lifeguarding off D301173 0713 BL20 Ethernet multiprotocol gateway 3 55 Properties gateway and I O modules Table 3 28 Parameter Value Module param name eters Byte 5 6 SDbpiacSX Input bit communication error slave x Slave diagnostics message from Byte 1 Bit 7 is accepted in the feedback interface as Bit 4 0 active A SDbiac5X is accepted 1 inactive SDpacSx is not accepted Byte7 8 reserved Byte 9 to24 Device ID TYPE setting for the LIN slave at position x on the SWIRE bus slave x 0x20 SWIRE DIL MTB OxFF OxFF Basic setting no slave BL20 E 2CNT 2PWM see separa
33. correspond to the modules in the station communication running green Station is in the Force Modeof Deactivate the Force Mode of the I O flashing the I O ASSISTANT ASSISTANT 1Hz red Hardware error firmware not Replace the gateway running 3 12 D301173 0713 BL20 Ethernet multiprotocol gateway Technical data Industri A Table 3 5 LED displays LED Status Meaning Remedy lOs red Incompatible deviation of Compare the configured list of flashing module list modules in your BL20 station to the 1Hz The gateway reports an error current configuration The communication to the field Check the physical station for bus is disturbed defective or incorrectly plugged A trouble free process data electronic modules exchange is not assured red No communication Atleast one module has to be flashing 4 Hz via the module bus plugged and has to be able to communicate with the gateway red green behavior similar to flashing red flashing 1Hz ERR OFF No diagnostic message red Pending diagnostic message at Check the station for diagnostic the gateway or at one of the messages connected modules BUS OFF Station is not supplied Check the voltage supply at the MS gateway green Displays the logical connection to a Master 1 Modbus TCP connection green Gateway ready for operation flashing red Gateway error Check the IP addresses in the network IP address conflict
34. nical data of a Uys nominal value 24V DC station provision for other modules lys at max system extension see chapter 10 from page 10 3 approx 600 mA U nominal value 24V DC lisse maximum current from field supply 8A permissible range according to EN 61 131 2 18 to 30 V DC Residual ripple according to EN 61 131 2 Voltage anomalies according to EN 61 131 2 Ime Supply of module bus nodes 400 mA Connection technology push in tension clamps LSF from Weidmueller Physical interfaces Field bus Ethernet Transmission rate 10 100 Mbps Passive fiber optic adapters can be connected current consumption max 100 mA Fieldbus connection technology RJA5 female connector RJ45 male connector Fieldbus shielding connection via Ethernet cable Address setting via DIP switches 2 to 27 service interface Ethernet Isolation voltages Ug U against service interface Urry supply voltage against Ethernet 500 V AC Uery supply voltage against Ethernet Useruety ETH1 against ETH2 500 V AC D301173 0713 BL20 Ethernet multiprotocol gateway 3 9 Properties gateway and I O modules Ambient conditions Ambient temperature E tambient 0 4 55 C zi tstore 25 85 C relative humidity according to EN 61131 2 EN 50178 5 to 95 indoor Level RH 2 no condensation
35. storage at 45 C no function test Climatic tests according to IEC 61131 2 Vibration resistance 10 to 57 Hz constant amplitude 0 075 mm yes 0 003 inch 1g 57 to 150 Hz yes constant acceleration 1 g Mode of vibration Frequency sweeps with a change in speed of 1 Octave min Period of oscillation 20 frequency sweeps per axis of coordinate Shock resistant according to IEC 68 2 27 18 shocks sinusoidal half wave 15 g peak value 11 ms in each case in direction per space coordinate Resistance to repetitive shock IEC 68 2 29 1 000 shocks half sinus 25 g peak value 6 ms in each case in direction per space coordinate Drop and topple Height of fall weight lt 10 kg 1 0m Height of fall weight 10 to 40 kg 0 5 m Test runs 7 Device with packaging electrically tested printed circuit board A Using the device Electromagnetic compatibility EMC according to EN 50 082 2 Industry in residential areas can cause disturbances In this case addi tional measures to suppress the disturbance are necessary Static electricity according to EN 61 000 4 2 Discharge through air direct 8 kV Relay discharge indirect 4 kV Electromagnetic HF fields according to EN61 10 V m 000 4 3 and ENV 50 204 Conducted interferences induced by HF 10V fields according to EN 61 000 4 6 Fast transients Burst according to EN 61 000 4 4 Emitted
36. 3 BL20 E Gw EN MP I Data 3 2700 Decimal INT BL20 E Gw EN MP L Data 4 i Decimal INT BL20 E Gw EN MP D T mE AB ETHERNET El BL20 E Gw EN MP O Data x Decimal INT 2 BL20 E Gw EN MP O Data 0 Q Decimal INT BL20_E_GW_EN_MP 0 Data 1 4114 Decimal INT Ga 0 1769 L30ER BL20_E_GW_EN_MP Ethernet fa 1769 L30ER BL20 E GW EN MP fJ ETHERNET MODULE BL20 E GW EN MP D301173 0713 BL20 Ethernet multiprotocol gateway Network configuration 5 2 2 Downloading the I O configuration 1 Ifthe configuration of the network is completed it can be downloaded to the controller by using for example the Communication Download command 2 Inthe Download dialog box start the download by pressing the Download button Figure 5 7 aerer lt Download of h fi Download offline project BL2 E Gw EN MP to the controller the con 1g urad Connected Controller tion Name PLC Type 1769 L30ER 4 CompactLogix5330ER Controller Path AB_ETH 14192 168 1 58 CompactBus 0 Serial Number 602B2DA7 Security No Protection d The controller is in Remote Run mode The mode will be changed to Remote Program prior to download a DANGER This controller is the system time master Servo axes in synchronized controllers in this chassis or other chassis may be turned off A DANGER Unexpected hazardous motion of machinery may
37. 4 0x04 PHYSICAL LINK G STRUCT OBJECT Path size UINT Number of 16bit words 0x02 path Padded 0x20 OxF6 0x24 0x01 EPATH 5 0x05 INTERFACE G Structure TCP IP Network Interface Configuration see CONFIGURATION of page 4 12 IP address G UDINT Current IP address NETWORK MASK G UDINT Current network mask GATEWAY ADDR G UDINT Current default gateway NAME SERVER G UDINT 0 no name server address configured NAME SERVER 2 UDINT 0 no secondary name server address configured DOMAIN NAME G UDINT 0 no Domain Name configured 6 0x06 HOST NAME G STRING 0 no Host Name configured see page 4 12 12 0x0C Quick Connect G S BOOL 0 deactivate 1 activate 4 10 D301173 0713 BL20 Ethernet multiprotocol gateway Classes and Instances of the EtherNet IP stations Common Services Industri A Table 4 13 Service code Class Instance Service name Common ser Vicas 01 0x01 yes yes Get Attribute All 02 0x02 no no Set Attribute All 14 OxOE yes yes Get Attribute Single 16 0x10 no yes Set Attribute Single E Interface Status The Status attribute indicates the status of the TCP IP network interface Refer to the state diagram Figure 4 1 TCP IP object state diagram acc to CIP Spec Vol 2 Rev 1 1 for a description of object states as they relate to the Status attribute Table 4 14 Bit s Name Definition Interface Status f 0 3 Interface Configuration Indicates the status of the Interface Configu
38. BL20 Ethernet multiprotocol gateway 1 1 About this manual 1 1 1 1 1 1 2 Documentation concept This manual contains all information about the gateways BL20 E GW EN of the product line BL20 Version lt VN 03 00 gateway for Modbus TCP Version gt VN 03 00 multiprotocol gateway for Modbus TCP EtherNet IP PROFINET In addition to a short BL20 system description and the protocol independent properties of the gateway and if necessary of the I O modules technical properties diagnostics parameters etc the following chapters contain two protocol dependent chapters respectively The protocol dependent chapters contain on the one hand the protocol specific gateway properties and on the other hand an application example for the respective Ethernet protocol describing the device s connection to automation devices E EtherNet IP chapter 4 Implementation of EtherNet IP chapter 5 Application example BL20 E GW EN with EtherNet IP Allen Bradley E Modbus TCP chapter 6 Implementation of Modbus TCP chapter 7 Application example BL20 E GW EN for Modbus TCP CoDeSys Win V3 E PROFINET chapter 8 Implementation of PROFINET chapter 9 Application example BL20 E GW EN with PROFINET S7 Additionally the manual contain protocol independent guideline for station configuration the electrical installation etc Additional documentation BL20l O modules TURCK documentation no Ger
39. BL20 1AI U 10 0 10VDC channel Oo N BL20 2AI THERMO PI mains suppression BL20 2AI THERMO PI value representation BL20 2AI THERMO PI diagnostic BL20 2AI THERMO PI channel a wn yn gt om r f ha bh kk ww w BSEBBEESER BL20 2AI THERMO PI element DONOOhWNAOBOHOMO40404 040 0 BL20 2AI THERMO PI mains suppression BL20 2AI THERMO PI value representation Integer 15Bit sign 12Bit left justified release block activate z deactivate Type K 270 1370 C Type B 100 1820 C Type E 270 1000 C Type J 210 1200 C Type N 270 1300 C Type R 50 1760 C Type S 50 1540 C Type T 270 400 C 50mV z 100mV 10 500mV 11 1000mV BL20 2AI THERMO PI diagnostic BL20 2AI THERMO PI channel o E A A A A oh BL20 2AI THERMO PI element Do womhogNu o2oso2oo2sO 2 5 Map for diagnostic data Register Bitpos Length Siot Module Parameter Value A040 0 1 3 BL20 1AI U 10 0 10VDC overflow underrun channel x 0 1 actvate A060 0 1 4 BL20 2AI THERMO PI measurement value range errorchannelx 0 1 actvate A060 1 1 4 BL20 2AI THERMO PI open circuit channel x 0 1 actvate A060 2 1 4 BL20 2AI THERMO PI no PT1000 sensor cold j comp channel x 0 1 activate A060 8 1 BL20 2AI THERMO PI measurement value range errorchannelx 0 1 actvate A060 9 1 4 BL20 2AI THERMO PI open circuit channel x D 1 a
40. BL20 PF 24VDC D 0x023000xx BL20 PF 120 230VAC D 0x053000xx D301173 0713 BL20 Ethernet multiprotocol gateway 13 25 Appendix 13 26 D301173 0713 BL20 Ethernet multiprotocol gateway 14 Industri A Glossary Acknowledge Acknowledgment of a signal received Active metal component Conductor or conducting component that is electrically live during operation Address Identification number of e g a memory position a system or a module within a network Addressing Allocation or setting of an address e g for a module in a network ARP Used to definitely allocate the hardware addresses MAC IDs assigned worldwide to the IP addresses of the network clients via internal tables Analog Infinitely variable value e g voltage The value of an analog signal can take on any value within certain limits Automation device A device connected to a technical process with inputs and outputs for control Programmable logic controllers PLC are a special group of automation devices Baud Baud is a measure for the transmission speed of data 1 Baud corresponds to the transmission of one bit per second bit s Baud rate Unit of measurement for measuring data transmission speeds in bit s Bidirectional Working in both directions Bonding strap Flexible conductor normally braided that joins inactive components e g the door of a switchgear cabinet to the cabinet main body Bus Bus system for
41. Process data ACCESS sisciiscssccssccnstscssstescessconsssesseasseoisiscacosisccessconcsicesbiscacsssostesssanioasssassisesisossssesssesssbensesssoensesoins 5 11 Setting OUTPUTS issii issie iesi asr aE San aE SEENE ESEE EEEE AE EEE SE a E NEIE IEE AN SISET ETS KSEE iaaa 5 11 ExaAMple Program HR 5 12 Implementation of Modbus TCP Common Modbus description ccccscccccsccscsescccsccceccsesccssccssccssscessccssccsesesscccssccssecsssccssccssscsssessccssecsesceses 6 2 Protocol CeSCrIPtION 6 3 DEiCHnIepi e 6 4 Implemented Modbus functions cerne eee esee esee eee ee e eerte seen setas eese ta setas etes esas etas esses sepas esas ss esas ena 6 6 MODUS PEGISEGES per cR E Structure of the packed in output process data e eee eeee tte ttes nte ttes ttnnsttsso ttes tts stt status ReGISter 0x OOC Gateway StAtUs o Register 0x1 130h Modbus Connection Mode ssessccsssssccssssecssseecesssccesnseersnsscecsnseecsnssscessseecsnseecenseccussecesnseecsnssccessseessnseeeese Register 0x1 131 Modbus Connection TimeoOuUt eerte nne nnne Register 0x113C and 0x113D Restore Modbus connection parameters Register Ox113E and Ox113F Save Modbus Connection Parameters E Register Ox1140 Disable protocol eerte tenente tentent eteno tetto tette tto not ttt
42. Table 8 4 Byte Bitparameters Value Meaning gateway parameters A default 0 Byte 0 setting bit 0 bit 1 Output behavior if one module is missing 00 output 0 A The gateway switches the outputs of modules to 0 No error information is transmitted No error information is transmitted 01 output substitute The gateway switches the outputs of all modules to value 0 with the exception of analog output modules Error information is transmitted to the analog output modules Depending on their configuration these modules set their outputs either to 0 or to a default value or to maintain the original values The non configured analog output modules set their outputs to 0 10 hold current value The gateway maintains the actual output settings of all modules with the exception of analog output modules Error information is transmitted to the analog output modules Depending on their configuration these modules set their outputs either to 0 or to a default value orto maintain the original values The non configured analog output modules set their outputs to O 11 exchange process The gateway carries on exchanging process data data with the other module bus stations No error information is transmitted bit 2 bit 3 Output behavior if one module is wrong 00 output 0 A The gateway switches the outputs of modules to O No error information is transmitted No error information is transmitted 01 o
43. count number of the following entries CLOCK FREQUENCY kHz MAIN FLASH in kB MAIN FLASH SPEED ns SECOND FLASH kB RAM kB RAM SPEED ns RAM data WIDTH bit SERIAL EEPRPOM kbit RTC SUPPORT in AUTO SERVICE BSL SUPPORT BOOL HDW SYSTEM D301173 0713 BL20 Ethernet multiprotocol gateway 4 17 Implementation of EtherNet IP Object Instance 2 Table 4 24 Object instance 2 gateway instance Attr No Attribute name Get Type dec Set hex Description 109 Status register 2 G STRUCT 6Dh The Status Word contains general station status information Station Bit 15 reserved Bit 14 Force Mode Active Error The Force Mode is activated Bit 13 reserved Bit 12 reserved Internal bus Bit 11 I O Cfg Modified Error The configuration has been changed in an incompatible way Bit 10 I O Communication Lost Error Communication on the internal module bus disturbed Voltage errors Bit 09 U too low System voltage too low 18 VDC Bit 08 U too high System supply voltage too high 30 VDC Bit 07 U too low Load voltage too low lt 18 VDC Bit 06 reserved Bit 05 reserved Bit 04 reserved Warnings Bit 03 I O Cfg Modified Warning The station configuration has changed Bit 02 reserved Bit 01 reserved Bit 00 I O Diags Active Warning At least one l O channel
44. l O map for input data Bit positi Hex Dec 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 o 0x0000 0000 03 15 03 14 03 13 03 12 03 11 03 10 03 00 03 08 0307 03 08 03 05 03 04 03 03 03 02 03 01 03 00 0x0001 0001 04 15 04 14 04 13 04 12 04 11 04 10 04 08 04 08 0407 0406 04 05 04 04 04 03 04 02 04 01 04 00 Ox0002 0002 04 31 04 30 04 29 04 28 04 27 04 26 04 25 04 24 04 23 04 22 04 21 04 20 04 19 04 18 04 17 04 16 0203 0202 0201 02 00 01 01 01 00 i ay 03 aL 02 Description 1 Column Register address n Column Modul number bitposition a ze M u a Dosucs Di M module diagnostics 1 bit for each module Process input data 6 Words D301173 0713 BL20 Ethernet multiprotocol gateway Programming with CoDeSys According to the examples for setting the modbus channels see Setting the Modbus channels examples and data mapping page 7 18 the following channel is add to read out the group diagnosis register Read Holding Registers FC3 register 0x0005 length 1 Figure 7 35 Channel for Chamel reading out the VES sand Access Type Read Holding Registers Function Code 3 group diagnosis wl z Tigger Cyder yde Time ms 100 Comment READ Register Offset 0x0005 Length 1 WRITE Register Offset 0x0000 Length 1 In the example the group diagnosis is in IW2 Figure 7 36 BL20 MP project Co
45. neighborhood detection via LLDP s Online topology detection oeste ee Ree PM ea evt E a Eee EE Ene Diagnostics With Step 7 vi ic cisscsusesssecvesceustssscocdiececeonstscsosousscessbonbussouavecesesvostesseustseuadeveseesnstateeeseevesveecdeasteusens 9 18 Diagnostic messages in the hardware configuration uu essssscssesecsseeecessescesnseecesseceessscecsssseessssccessecessesecsssecesnseesnaneessnsneees 9 18 Diagnostic telegram with error code eee eer teeenn tenente eret tette ttet a i E AA tetto osten 9 19 Guidelines for station planning Modulle arrangement PARE 10 2 Random module arrangerrient ei t e ice e AH MA MEARUM an 10 2 Complete planning Maximum system extension POWEP SUP DIY eee E 10 6 Power supply to the gateway t ete Ree ee D te ele sper ee insta siet eerte epi tier te Rene iere eicit Rud 10 6 D301173 0713 BL20 Ethernet multiprotocol gateway 10 2 2 10 2 3 10 2 4 10 2 5 10 3 10 4 10 5 10 6 11 11 1 11 1 1 11 1 2 11 1 3 11 1 4 11 2 11 2 1 11 3 11 3 1 11 3 2 11 3 3 11 3 4 11 3 5 11 4 11 5 11 5 1 11 5 2 12 13 13 1 13 1 1 13 1 2 13 1 3 13 1 4 13 1 5 13 2 13 2 1 13 2 2 13 3 13 4 13 5 14 D301173 0713 BL20 Ethernet multiprotocol gateway Industr A Module bus refreshing BL20 BR 24V DC D ssssssssscsssscsssccssssessscsssescssecsssescssccssueccsneessuccesncessecensesssee
46. the write access is executed and the write authorization remains active until the connection is closed A 1 The write authorization for the respective Modbus connection is already opened during the establishment of the connection The first Modbus connection thus receives the write authorization all following connections don t only if bit 0 1 0 MB OnlyOneWritePermission 0 all Modbus connections receive the write authorization A 1 only one Modbus connection can receive the write permission A write permission is opened until a Disconnect After the Disconnect the next connection which requests a write access receives the write authorization 6 3 4 Register 0x1131 Modbus Connection Timeout This register defines after which time of inactivity a Modbus connection is closed through a Disconnect 6 3 5 Register 0x113C and 0x113D Restore Modbus connection parameters Register 0x113C and 0x113D are used to reset the parameter registers 0x1120 and 0x1130 to Ox113B to default For this purpose write Ox6C6F to register 0X113E To activate the reset of the registers write 0x6164 load within 30 seconds in register 0x113D Both registers can also be written with one single request using the function codes FC16 and FC23 The service resets the parameters without saving them This can be achieved by using a following save service D301173 0713 BL20 Ethernet multiprotocol gateway 6 17 Implementation of Modbus T
47. whereby the innermost shield is connected on one side and the outermost shield is connected on both sides D301173 0713 BL20 Ethernet multiprotocol gateway 11 7 Guidelines for Electrical Installation 11 5 Potential compensation Potential differences can occur between installation components that are in separate areas if these are fed by different supplies have double sided conductor shields which are grounded on different installation components A potential compensation cable must be routed to the potential compensation Warning Never use the shield as a potential compensation A potential compensation cable must have the following characteristics Low impedance In the case of compensation cables that are routed on both sides the compensation line impedance must be considerably smaller than that of the shield connection max 10 96 of shield connection impedance E Should the length of the compensation cable be less than 200 m then its cross section must be at least 16 mm 0 025 inch If the cable length is greater than 200 m then a cross section of at least 25 mm 0 039 inch is required E The compensation cable must be made of copper or zinc coated steel The compensation cable must be connected to the protective conductor over a large surface area and must be protected against corrosion E Compensation cables and data cables should be routed as close together as possible meaning the enclosed area s
48. 0 Rotary Switch Mode PGM DHCP PROFINET Station Name turck bl20 e Network Settings IP Address 192 168 1 112 Netmask 255 255 255 0 Default Gateway 192 168 1 1 MAC Address 3 29 Properties gateway and l O modules 3 7 3 Login password Login to the web server by using the default password password The default password can be changed by the administrator at every time under Change Admin Password page 3 31 Note A reset of the device to the default settings using the switch position 900 F Reset also causes a reset of the password to password Figure 3 20 Web server Home screen rc C fne Que Go 7T http 192 1681112 h O B X Datei Bearbeiten Ansicht Favoriten Extras BL20 E GW EN Embedded Website of BL20 Modular I O Module T Home x Home gt Home Gateway Diagnostics Gateway Information Ethernet Statistics Type UE BL20 E GW EN Identificaton Number 6827329 Firmware Revision V2 12 11 5 3 7 4 Network Configuration On the Network Configuration page network relevant settings can be changed Figure 3 21 Web server Network Configuration 3 30 M90 00000000099 jie Go F http 192168 1112 n O BOX 7 Network Configuration x iw lY 93 Datei Bearbeiten Ansicht Favoriten Extras BL20 E GW EN Embedded Website of BL20 Modular I O Module Network Configuration gt Home Network Configuration Network Set
49. 10 2 Power supply 10 2 1 Power supply to the gateway The gateway BL20 E GW EN offers an integrated power supply see also Power supply page 3 14 10 2 2 Module bus refreshing BL20 BR 24VDC D The number of BL20 modules which can be supplied via the internal module bus by the gateway or a Bus Refreshing module depends on the modules nominal current consumptions at the module bus Table 10 1 Communication bytes and nominal current consumption of the BL20 modules page 10 3 Attention A The sum of the nominal current consumptions seeTable 10 1 Communication bytes and nominal current consumption of the BL20 modules page 10 3 of the used BL20 modules may not exceed 400 mA Ifa Bus Refreshing module is mounted the sum of the current consumptions which follow the Bus Refreshing module must not exceed 1 5 A Note E The Bus Refreshing modules which are used in a station with BL20 E GW EC have to be combined with the base modules BL20 P3T SBB B or BL20 P4T SBBC B tension clamp or with the base modules BL20 P3S SBB B or BL20 P4S SBBC B screw terminals With the system supply it must be ensured that the same ground potential and ground connections are used Compensating currents flow via the module bus if different ground potentials or ground connections are used which can lead to the destruction of the Bus Refreshing module All Bus Refreshing modules are connected to one another via the same ground potential The power to th
50. 5 1 Default setting of the QateWay ssccssssecssseccssssccsnseccssseecessesccssseccsnseecsnssscssseseesnseecsnseeccsnsescesseseesnsescesseccesnseesussesensseessuneesessees 3 5 2 Function of DIP switCheS sssssssssssssesssesssssessrssesesessssssssrseeee 3 5 3 Resetting the IP address switch position RESTORE 3 5 4 Address setting via DIP switches 2 to 27 7 3 5 5 Address setting via the mode DHOP sssssssssssccsssssessssecssssscessseecssssscessssccsnseessnsseesuscessnssecssseesussecsnssseesseseesussecsnssesessnecensneeees 3 5 6 Address setting via the mode BOotP ssssecsssssssssseessnsescessseesssssecsnsecessueecsnsseessunseessssecsnssessssessssnscesnsseeesunsessnsuseesuseceesnnseesanees 3 5 7 Address setting via the mode PGM eese tenente teen tte notte neto notte netto tts ttt NEER ER iO i 3 5 8 Address setting via the mode PGM DHCP universal mode eee etes tiennent tensor tesnt tts sottonots 22 PROFINET M 3 5 9 F Reset Reset to factory setting 3 5 10 A Addressing via l O ASSISTANT 3 FDT DTM 3 5 11 Addressing via Web server Version gt VN 03 00 ssssssssssssssccsssecsessssccessccsssscessecessecssscesucessecessecsucessecesscessucessuccesncecsnscesaes 26 35 12 Addressing via IP Address TOO sssssscsssssscssseseessssecssseecssseecesssecssssseesssscessssecsnsssecsssecsnssesseecsnsescesussessnseseesusscsesseceesnesseenneeeesnesees 27 3 6
51. 9 PROFINET neighborhood detection via LLDP Due to the neighborhood detection there is no previous PROFINET name assignment see Device name assignment BL20 gateway page 9 13 is necessary for a new device of the same type and with an identical process data width in case of a device exchange The device name and the IP address will be assigned to the new device by the neighbor device configured before see Configuring the neigh borhood detection page 9 15 Necessary setting of the PROFINET controller The neighborhood detection without using a PC or removable media can only be executed if the func tion Support device replacement without exchangeable medium is activated within the properties of the PROFINET controller Figure 9 15 Properties PN IO R0 S2 2 E4 Se ttings of the Media Redundancy Time of Day Synchronization Options PROFINET General Addresses PROFINET Device Synchronization controller Shott description PN IO Device name PN IO Use different method to obtain device name IV Support device replacement without exchangeable medium Interface Type Ethemet Device number 0 Address 192 168 1 3 Networked Yes Properties Comment Cont __ He In case of a device exchange a new device thus not receives the device name from the removable medium or the PG but from the IO controller The device name is assigned by means of the devices port interconnections configured in the topology definition 9 14 D3
52. BL20 2AO H BL20 E 4AO U I Y SNIS S LS S Relay modules BL20 2DO R NC BL20 2DO R NO BL20 2DO R CO Technology modules BL20 1RS232 BL20 1RS485 422 BL20 1SSI BL20 E 1SWIRE AL A OR A BL20 E 2CNT 2PWM 41S 4 AA BL20 2RFID A s BL20 2RFID S s SPE NE NY NEN NTN Power distribution modules BL20 BR 24VDC D BL20 BR 24 VDC RED BL20 PF 24VDC D APNE NYS BL20 PF 120 230VAC D APE NEN YON APNE NEON D301173 0713 BL20 Ethernet multiprotocol gateway 3 5 Properties gateway and I O modules 3 3 Technical data 3 3 1 Top view BL20 E GW EN lt VN 03 00 Figure 3 1 Top view BL20 E GW EN VN 03 00 A LEDs for BL20 module bus B serviceinterface no function C DIP switch for the fieldbus address D DIP switch for the operation mode E DIP switch for the configura tion acceptance F LEDs for the Modbus com munication G EtherNet switch with EtherNet LEDs H terminals for field supply terminals for system supply MODE ADDRESS ifo afia aio off lt on mo Unlock end bracket before dismounting Slide top cover for configuration and service A ETH2 ETH1 UL GND Usys GNDsys 3 6 D301173 0713 BL20 Ethernet multipr
53. Checkthe position ofthe DIP switches gateway in RESTORE mode F Reset activated red green auto negotiation x and or waiting for DHCP BootP address assignment LEDs at female connectors ETH1 ETH2 green OFF No Ethernet link ON Link flashing Ethernet Traffic yellow ON 100 Mbps OFF 10 Mbps D301173 0713 BL20 Ethernet multiprotocol gateway 3 13 Properties gateway and l O modules 3 4 Connection options at the gateway The fieldbus connection is realized via an integrated RJ45 Ethernet switch the connection of the power supply via push in tension clamps Figure 3 4 Connection options at the gateway ETH2 ETH1 Unlock end bracket before dismounting Slide top cover for configuration and service AN GNDsys 3 4 1 Powersupply The BL20 E GW EN provides an integrated power supply unit an push in tension clamps for Field supply UL GNDL and E system supply USYS GNDSYS 3 4 2 Field bus connection via Ethernet switch The BL20 ECO gateways for Ethernet provide an integrated RJ45 Ethernet switch Figure 3 5 1 2 TX 22TX RJ45 female 3 RX connector om 4 n c 5 n c 6 RX 87654321 F ne 3 o 3 4 83 Service interface The access of the software I O ASSISTANT 3 FDT DTM via the service interface Mini USB is not supported For a connection to the gateway via l O ASSISTANT 3 FDT DTM is done via Ethe
54. Deactivating the Firewall in Windows 2000 XP Windows Firewall General Exceptions Advanced Windows Firewall helps protect your computer by preventing unauthorized users from gaining access to your computer through the Internet or a network V On recommended This setting blocks all outside sources from connecting to this computer with the exception of those selected on the Exceptions tab Don t allow exceptions Select this when you connect to public networks in less secure locations such as airports You will not be notified when Windows Firewall blocks programs Selections on the Exceptions tab will be ignored Q Off not recommended Avoid using this setting Turning off Windows Firewall may make this computer more vulnerable to viruses and intruders Windows Firewall is using your domain settings What else should know about Windows Firewall Figure 13 9 n fox Deactivating Jai syemanssecuity Windows frel 45 the Firewall in e Control Panel Hoe Help protect your computer with Windows Firewall Windows 7 Allow a program or feature Windows Firewall can help prevent hackers or malicious software from through Windows Firewall access to your compugazthzauab tha In mme XC Jed di Windows Firewall Customize Settings 3 Search Control Panel Bj Change notification settings How does a firewall h 3 Turn Windows Firewall on or Wh
55. GW LED switches to orange During this time the gateway s voltage supply must not be interrupted In case of a power failure faulty data will be stored in the gateway Note i Resetting the gateway is only possible when the station is not connected to the fieldbus no AR active no AR active D301173 0713 BL20 Ethernet multiprotocol gateway 8 3 Implementation of PROFINET 8 4 Diagnosis in PROFINET In PROFINET critical events diagnostic messages are reported acyclically as alarms In addition to information as slot number subslot number channel type etc the diagnostic telegrams contain error codes which define the diagnostic event more precisely The error codes are interpreted by the PLC software or respective function block so that the diagnostic messages are normally displayed as plain text You will find an example of a diagnostic telegram in chapter 9 under Diagnostic telegram with error code page 9 19 Please read the following sections for the meaning of the error codes of the gateway and the I O modules 8 4 1 Gateway Error codes Table 8 1 gateway error codes Value dec Diagnostics meaning for the gateway Error codes 1 to 9 according to the standards 2 Undervoltage Undervoltage channel 0 Undervoltage at Usys Channel 1 Undervoltage at U Error codes 16 to 31 manufacturer specific 16 Parametrization error configuration error Station configuration change
56. Writing of configuration data Reading and writing of device data Reading of diagnostic data Reading of I O data Reading of Identification Data Objects I amp M functions Reading of differences between the expected and the actually plugged modules 8 6 1 Description of the acyclic gateway user data Table 8 5 Index Name Data Type r w Comment Gateway Appli cation Instance 1 Gateway parameters WORD r w Parameter data of the module 0x01 2 gateway STRING r Product name of the gateway 0x02 Designation 3 Gateway revision STRING r Firmware revision of the gateway 0x03 4 Vendor ID WORD r Ident number for TURCK 0x04 5 Gateway Name STRING r Name assigned to the gateway 0x05 6 Gateway type STRING r Device type of the gateway 0x06 7 Device ID WORD r Ident number of the gateway 0x07 8 0x08 to reserved 23 0x17 24 Gateway diagnosis WORD r Diagnosis data of the gateway 0x18 025 reserved 0x19 to 31 Ox1F 32 Module input list Array of r List of all input channels in the 0x20 BYTE station 33 Module output list Array of r List of all output channels in the 0x21 BYTE station 8 14 D301173 0713 BL20 Ethernet multiprotocol gateway Description of user data for acyclic services Industri A Table 8 5 Index Name Data Type r w Comment Gateway Appli cation Instance 34 Module diag list Array of r List of all module diagnosis 0x22 BYTE
57. all previous editions invalid D301173 0713 BL20 Ethernet multiprotocol gateway 1 5 About this manual 1 6 D301173 0713 BL20 Ethernet multiprotocol gateway Industri A 2 BL20 philosophy 2 1 The SETA Cade AD Te REED 2 2 2 1 1 Flexibility t 2 2 2 1 2 USIje fadrtee e ERR 2 2 2 1 3 Easy A Corr Loro P SE0 2 2 2 2 Jivjiuf4 i n 2 3 22 1 GATOWOYS 2 3 ECO ate ways M 2 3 Gateways with integrated power supply eee eene tee nnt nnn tts ettet tton tts ttt notte ntis notis nns 2 4 Gateways without integrated power supply eese eene nete tients tts tte not ttts nnn tts nont 2 4 2 2 2 Power distribution MOCUIES essssessssseccsseccssecessecsssecssseccsscccssccssseesuscessscesssecsssecessecessccescusecsssccssccessecessessueccsuecesneesssecessceessees 2 2 3 Electronics modules standard product line 2 24 ECO electronics modules sss 2 2 5 Base MOCUIES csscsssecsssecsseecssscccsscesstcesssccsseeesneeesneessees 2 2 6 ife Mel MEME ETE TCU LIT Rr 224 Izielecte Cim 2 2 8 Beim M 2 2 9 Marking material 5 nit Rt Ee are e aei N e e rade
58. and Instances of the EtherNet IP stations 4 2 1 EtherNet IP Standard Classes The BL20 stations support the following EtherNet IP Standard Classes in accordance with the CIP specification Table 4 1 Class Code Object name EtherNet IP s A Standard 01 0x01 Identity Object 0x01 Classes 04 0x04 Assembly Object 0x04 06 0x06 Connection Manager Object 0x06 245 0xF5 TCP IP Interface Object 0xF5 246 OxF6 Ethernet Link Object OxF6 D301173 0713 BL20 Ethernet multiprotocol gateway 4 3 Implementation of EtherNet IP 4 2 2 Identity Object 0x01 The following description of the Ethernet Link Object is taken from the CIP specification Vol 2 Rev 2 1 by ODVA amp ControlNet International Ltd and adapted to BL20 Class Attributes Table 4 2 Attr No Attribute name Get Type Value Class Attributes Set 1 0x01 REVISION G UINT 1 2 0x02 MAX OBJECT INSTANCE G UINT 1 6 0x06 MAX CLASS ATTRIBUTE G UINT 7 7 0x07 MAX INSTANCE ATTRIBUTE G UINT 7 Object instance 1 instance attributes Table 4 3 Attr No Attribute name Get Type Description Instance attri Set butes object instance 1 1 0x01 VENDOR G UINT Contains the vendor ID TURCK 48 2 0x02 PRODUCT TYPE G UINT Indicates the general type of product Communications Adapter 12 Ox0C 3 0x03 PRODUCT CODE G UINT Identifies a particular product within a device type Def
59. buffer by the RXBUF FLUSH TXBUF FLUSH 13 4 D301173 0713 BL20 Ethernet multiprotocol gateway Data image of the technology modules Industri A Table 13 2 Designation Meaning of the data bits process output Valu Description RXBUF FLUSH The RXBUF FLUSH bit is used for clearing the receive buffer If STATRES 1 A request with RXBUF FLUSH 1 will be ignored If STATRES 0 RXBUF FLUSH 1 will clear the receive buffer TXBUF FLUSH 0 1 The TXBUF FLUSH bit is used for clearing the transmit buffer If STATRES 1 A request with TXBUF FLUSH 1 will be ignored If STATRES 0 TXBUF FLUSH 1 will clear the receive buffer RX_CNT_ACK 0 3 The value RX_CNT_ACK is a copy of the value RX_CNT The value TX_CNT was transferred together with the last data segment of the process output data RX_CNT_ACK has to be set analog to RX_CNT in the status byte RX_CNT_ACK is an acknowledge for the successful transmission of the data segment with RX_CNT New data can now be received TX_CNT 0 3 This value is transferred together with every data segment The TX_CNT values are sequential The TX_CNT values are sequential 00 gt 01 gt 10 gt 11 gt 00 decimal 0 gt 1 gt 2 gt 3 gt 0 Errors in this sequence show the loss of data segments TX BYTE CNT 0 7 Number of the valid bytes in this data segment D301173 0713 BL20 Ethernet multiprotocol gateway 13 5 Appen
60. data exchange e g between CPU memory and I O levels A bus can consist of several parallel cables for data transmission addressing control and power supply Bus cycle time Time required for a master to serve all slaves or stations in a bus system i e reading inputs and writing outputs Smallest unit connected to a bus consisting of a PLC a coupling element for modules on the bus and a module D301173 0713 BL20 Ethernet multiprotocol gateway 14 1 Glossary Bus system All units which communicate with one another via a bus ie Capacitive coupling Electrical capacitive couplings occur between cables with different potentials Typical sources of interference are for example parallel routed signal cables contactors and electrostatic discharges Check back interface The check back interface is the interface from the counter module to the internal module bus The bits and bytes are converted by the gateway from the respective type of communication applicable to the fieldbus in to the module specific bits and bytes Coding elements Two piece element for the unambiguous assignment of electronic and base modules Configuration Systematic arrangement of the I O modules of a station Control interface The control interface is the interface from the internal module bus to the counter module The commands and signals directed to the counter module are converted by the gateway from the respective type of communication applicabl
61. description of the class instance for the VSC Object instance 1 standard input process data compressed Table 4 25 Attr No Attribute name Get Type Description Object instance Set hex 1 standard ieu input process data com pressed 100 64h Max object G USINT Contains the number of the last object attribute attribute to be implemented 101 65h Attribute list G ARRAY OF List of all attributes that are supported by USINT this instance 102 66h Packed process G ARRAYOF Input process data 16 bit aligned input data WORD compressed 103 67h Process data byte G USINT The number of bytes that are exchanged count with this Instance Object instance 2 standard output process data compressed Table 4 26 Attr No Attribute name Get Type Description Object instance dec hex Set 2 standard out putprocessdata 100 64h Max object G USINT Contains the number of the last object compressed attribute attribute to be implemented 101 65h Attribute list G ARRAYOF Listofallattributes that are supported by USINT this Instance 102 66h Packed process G S ARRAYOF Output process data 16 bit aligned input data WORD compressed 103 67h Process data byte G USINT The number of bytes that are exchanged count with this Instance 4 20 D301173 0713 BL20 Ethernet multiprotocol gateway VSC Vendor Specific Classes Object Instance 3 diagnostic instance Industri A
62. electromagnetic compatibility ee sssessccsseeecsnseecessseccsnseecsnssscesnsecsnssecsssuscessnseesscecsssseeessuseesnsecssusseesunsessssnees 11 5 11 3 2 Grounding of inactive metal COMpOnentS ssssesssssssesssssseesssessteesesssteeseessteesenssteesssssteesensstesnsssstosteensssteesessteosssssteessssstessss 11 5 11 3 3 zelo i NAE EREE EEE EE EA EEN ENEN EE 11 5 11 3 4 Earth free operation RR 11 5 11 3 5 Mounting BT T et RR 11 6 11 4 EUHABIDRESECIU TER 11 7 11 5 Potential compensation 5 eroe poro een rt eor eo ae aos cesscceseseusencosesecesesacesseeesssssesesecosesseceseressenssesessessenedsses 11 5 1 Switching inductive loads rrt e beber eee HER HEURE be Re oben eub rie pod 11 5 2 Protection against Electrostatic Discharge ESD D301173 0713 BL20 Ethernet multiprotocol gateway 11 1 Guidelines for Electrical Installation 11 1 11 1 1 General notes General Cables should be grouped together for example signal cables data cables heavy current cables power supply cables Heavy current cables and signal or data cables should always be routed in separate cable ducts or bundles Signal and data cables must always be routed as close as possible to ground potential surfaces for example support bars cabinet sides etc 11 1 2 Cable routing Correct cable routing prevents or suppresses the reciprocal influencing of paral
63. error depending on the parameter setting 0 activea Group diagnostics is activated 1 inactive Group diagnostics is not activated PKZineo PKZ error field Activate slave diagnostics info field PKZ ppSx As soon as a slave on the bus clears its PKZ bit this is indicated as an individual error depending on the parameter setting 0 active A Single diagnostics is activated 1 inactive Single diagnostics is not activated 3 54 D301173 0713 BL20 Ethernet multiprotocol gateway Parameters of the I O modules Industri A Table 3 28 Parameter Module param name eters Value Byte 2 PKZ ERR Group PKZ error field Activate slave diagnostics PKZ p2 As soon as a slave on the bus clears its PKZ bit this is indicated as an individual error depending on the parameter setting 0 active A Group diagnostics is activated 1 inactive Group diagnostics is not activated TYP iro Configuration error field As soon asa slave on the bus does not match the set configuration and therefore cannot be started this is indicated as an individual error depending on the parameter set 0 active A Single diagnostics is activated 1 inactive Single diagnostics is not activated TY Pepe Group configuration error field Activate slave diagnostics TYP p25x As soon as only one slave on the bus is incorrectly configured this is indicated as an error depending on the parameter setting 0
64. flow control error 3 frame error 4 buffer overflow 3 64 D301173 0713 BL20 Ethernet multiprotocol gateway Diagnostic messages of the modules Industri A BL20 1RS485 422 Table 3 52 Diagnostic byte Bit Diagnosis BL20 1RS485 422 n 0 parameterization error 1 Hardware failure 2 Data flow control error only in the RS422 mode 3 frame error 4 buffer overflow E BL20 1SSI Table 3 53 Diagnostic byte Bit Diagnosis BL20 1SSI n 0 SSI group diagnostics 1 Open circuit 2 sensor value overflow 3 sensor value underflow 4 parameterization error BL20 E 1SWIRE Bit 7 Bit 6 Bit 5 Bit 4 Bit 3 Bit 2 Bit 1 Bit 0 Byte n IGENERALep Uswenn free COMerr free RDY err free ISWerr R Byte n 1 free UAuxERR TYPenn free PKZERR free SDerr free TYP ear field Byten 2 TYPeppS8 TYPeppS7 TYPeprS6 IYPga4S5 TYPeppS4 MYPerS3 MYPerS2 TYPgaaS1 Byte n 3 TYPeppS16 TYPeppS15 TYPepeS14 MYPerrS13 TYPeppS12 TYPeppS11 MYPerrS10 TYPepRS9 Slave diagnosis Byten44 SDegnS8 SDeppS7 SDeppS6 SDeppSS5 SDepgS4 SDerrS3 SDgS2 SDegaSt Byten45 SDQQS16 SDeppS15 SDepeS14 SDepgS13 SDg4S12 SDerrS11 SDegrS10 SDegnS9 PKZ field Byte n46 PKZ RRS8 PKZgngS7 PKZenpS6 9 PKZeanSS 9 PKZegnS4 9 PKZegnS3 PKZepnS2 PKZeppS1 Bytent 7 PKZppqS16 PKZpagS15 PKZeqpS14 PKZegnS13 PKZegnS12 PKZeppS11 PKZepp
65. interference according to EN 50 081 2 industry according to EN 55 011 Class A A group 1 D301173 0713 BL20 Ethernet multiprotocol gateway Technical data Industri A Approvals and tests Table 3 3 Designation Approvals and tests fora BL20 Approvals station UL in preparation CSA Tests EN 61131 2 Cold DIN IEC 68 2 1 Temperature 25 C 185 F duration 96 h device not in use Dry heat DIN IEC 68 2 2 Temperature 85 C 185 F duration 96 h device not in use Damp heat cyclic DIN IEC 68 2 30 temperature 55 C 131 F duration 2 cycles every 12 h device in use Pollution severity according to lEC664 2 EN 61 131 2 Protection class according to IEC 529 IP20 3 3 5 Technical data for the push in tension clamp terminals Table 3 4 Designation Technical data Push intension Protection class IP20 clamp terminal Insulation stripping length 8 mm 1 0 32 inch 0 039 Max wire range 0 14 to 1 5 mm 0 0002 to 0 0023 inch 26 to 16 AWG Crimpable wire e solid core H 07V U 0 14 to 1 5 mm 0 0002 to 0 0023 inch 26 to 16 AWG f flexible core H 07V K 0 5 to 1 5 mm 0 0008 to 0 0023 inch 25 to 16 AWG f with ferrules according to DIN 46 228 1 ferrules crimped gas tight 0 25 to 1 5 mm 0 0004 to 0 0023 inch 30 to 16 AWG Danger This device can cause radio disturbances in residential areas
66. is changed in the Control Panel in Windows 2000 Windows XP under Network Connections in Windows 7 under Network and Sharing Center Figure 13 5 Changing the IP address in Windows 2000 XP 13 16 s Network Connections E ioj xj File Edit View Favorites Tools Advanced Help A Qes O 9 Lose Corm ER Address Network Connections bd Go LAN or High Speed Internet Network Tasks a Create a new connection Change Windows Firewall ted AMD PCN settings 2 xl See Also a 1 IndustrialNet Properties 3 xl eari Troubles nonien General Advanced Internet Protocol TCP IP Properties 2 x Connect using neral Other Places x J Control Panel amp My Network Places E My Documents ij My Computer Hg VMware Accelerated AMD PCN This connection uses the following ite 3 Client for Microsoft Netwo ks 8 File and Printer Sharing for Mi OPES Packet Schedule F Internet Protocol TCP IP Details A stall Ininstall Network Connections Install Uninstal System Folder Description Transmission Control Protocol Interr wide area network protocol that pro across diverse interconnected netw I Show icon in notification area whe V Notify me when this connection ha You can get IP settings assigned automatically if your network supports this capability Otherwise you need to ask your network a
67. its input until the signal is sent to the bus system Reference potential Potential from which all voltages of connected circuits are viewed and or measured Repeater Amplifier for signals transmitted via a bus Root connecting Creating a new potential group using a power distribution module This allows sensors and loads to be supplied individually RS 485 Serial interface in accordance with EIA standards for fast data transmission via multiple transmitters sS Serial Type of information transmission by which data is transmitted bit by bit via a cable Setting parameters Setting parameters of individual stations on the bus and their modules in the configuration software of the master Shield Conductive screen of cables enclosures and cabinets D301173 0713 BL20 Ethernet multiprotocol gateway 14 5 Glossary 14 6 Shielding Description of all measures and devices used to join installation components to the shield Short circuit proof Characteristic of electrical components A short circuit proof part withstands thermal and dynamic loads which can occur at its place of installation due to a short circuit Station A functional unit or I O components consisting of a number of elements TCP Abbreviation for Transmission Control Protocol connection oriented transport protocol within the Internet protocol suite Certain error detection mechanisms i e acknowledgements time out monitoring can guarante
68. multiprotocol gateway 6 7 Implementation of Modbus TCP Table 6 3 Address hex Access A Description Modbus regis ters of the module Ox113E to Ox113F rw Modbus parameter save page 6 18 permanent storing of parameters 0x1140 VN 03 00 and rw Disable Protocol page 6 18 higher 0x1141 VN 03 00 and ro Active Protocol page 6 18 higher 0x2000 to 0x207F rw service object request area page 6 19 0x2080 to Ox20FF ro service object response area page 6 19 0x2400 ro System voltage U y lt mV 0x2401 ro Load voltage U mV 0x2405 ro load current A Ox27FE ro no of entries in actual module list 0x27FF rw no of entries in reference module list 0x2800 to 0x283F rw Reference module list max 32 modules per station x 2 registers for module ID 0x2A00 to 0x2A3F ro Actual module list max 32 modules per station x 2 registers for module ID 0x8000 to 0x8400 ro process data inputs max 32 modules per station x 32 registers for module ID 0x9000 to 0x9400 rw process data outputs max 32 modules per station x 32 registers for module ID 0xA000 to 0xA400 ro Diagnosis max 32 modules per station x 32 registers for module ID 0xB000 to 0xB400 rw Parameters max 32 modules per station x 32 registers for module ID 6 8 D301173 0713 BL20 Ethernet multiprotocol gateway Modbus registers Industri A The following table shows the register mapping for the differe
69. multiprotocol gateway Parameters of the I O modules E BL20 2AI I 0 4 20MA 1 byte per channel Industri A Table 3 11 Byte Bit Parameter name Value Module param eters 0 1 0 current mode 0 0 20 mA A A default 124 20mA setting 1 value representation 0 Integer 15 bit sign A 1 12bit left justified 2 Diagnosis 0 activate A 1 deactivate 3 Channel 0 activate A 1 deactivate BL20 1Al U 10 0 10VDC Table 3 12 Byte Bit Parameter name Value Module param i d 7 oter 0 0 voltage mode 0 0 10VA A default 12 10 10V setting 7 7 1 value representation 0 Integer 15 bit sign A 1 12bit left justified 2 Diagnosis 0 activate A 1 deactivate BL20 2Al U 10 0 10VDC 1 byte per channel Table 3 13 Byte Bit Parameter name Value Module param eters 0 1 0 voltage mode 0 0 10VA 12 10 10V A default 1 value representation 0 Integer 15 bit sign A setting 1 12bit left justified 2 Diagnosis 0 activate A 1 deactivate 3 Channel 0 activate A 1 deactivate D301173 0713 BL20 Ethernet multiprotocol gateway 3 35 Properties gateway and I O modules BL20 2AI PT NI 2 3 2 byte per channel Table 3 14 Byte Bit Parameter name Value Module param 2 eters 0 Mains suppression 0 50 Hz A 0 60 Hz A default 1 value representatio
70. of data from the data terminal device if the software handshake is active BL20 1SSI Table 3 27 Byte Bit Module param eters Parameter name Value Meaning A default 0 4to0 setting reserved Sensor idle data cable test 0 activate A ZERO test of data cable 1 deactivate After the last valid bit a ZERO test of the data cable is not carried out 7 6 reserved 1 3to0 Number of invalid bits LSB 0000 to 1111 Number of invalid bits on the LSB side of the position value supplied by the SSI encoder The meaningful word width of the position value transferred to the module bus master is as follows SS FRAME LEN INVALID BITS MSB INVALID BITS LSB The invalid bits on the LSB side are removed by shifting the position value to the right starting with the LSB Default 0 bit 0x0 INVALID_BITS_MSB INVALID_BITS_LSB must always be less than SSI FRAME LEN D301173 0713 BL20 Ethernet multiprotocol gateway 3 51 Properties gateway and I O modules Table 3 27 Byte Bit Module param eters Parameter name Value Meaning 1 6to4 Number of invalid bits MSB 000 to 111 Number of invalid bits on the LSB side of the position value supplied by the SSI encoder The meaningful word width of the position value transferred to the module bus master is as follows SSI FRAME LEN INVALID BITS MSB INVALID BITS LSB Number of invalid bits on the MSB s
71. of fu Elbe c X X d 51 e OKIE ye 1 vx 9X StartPage jj Device j BL20 E GW EN E PLC PRG dj GVL a global vari Devices able H BL20 EMP alu TE m 3 jg Device CoDeSys Control WinV3 2 xReset BOOL 5 SI PLCLogic 3 END VAH Application 4 d cv a E E i Library Manager 8 PLc PRG PRG a Task Configuration MainTask i Ethernet Ethernet d Modbus TCP Master Modbus TCP Mi fj BL20 E Gw EN Modbus TCP sla m 4 m LI n Pous Se Devices Current user nobody INS Ln3 Col8 Ch8 Global variable list The creation of a Global Variable List is possible too right click to APPL Add object gt Global Variable List Define the global variables The global variables are also automatically exported when building the project if they have been chosen for export in the symbol configuration see also Predefined feature setsFigure 7 1 page 7 4 D301173 0713 BL20 Ethernet multiprotocol gateway Programming with CoDeSys 7 3 9 Modbus channels The communication between Modbus TCP master and Modbus slaves is realized through defined Modbus channels These channels are set in the register tab Modbus Slave Channel using the Add Channel button The process data of a slave can then be monitored under ModbusTCPSlave I O Mapping see 7 3 11 Reading out the process data page 7 28
72. parameterization via the GSDML file of the gateway Note This parameter is not part of the module parameters but is only important for the communication between gateway and the modules This parameter extension is always necessary even if the module is parameterized via a IO supervisor module parameterization activated The module receives its parameter settings from the controller IO supervisor I O ASSISTANT or similar In this case parameter changes which were done in the meantime for example by a configuration tool or similar will be overwritten with the valid parameter data set module parameterization deactivated Changes in the parameter settings are ignored for the respective module The stored parameter data will be used Note i If the module parameterization is activated and a module is replaced by a new one the gateway has to be operated with active U in order to keep the module s parameter settings for the new module U has to be switched off and the station has to be separated from the field bus Now the gateway sends the parameters defined for the old module into the new module D301173 0713 BL20 Ethernet multiprotocol gateway 8 13 Implementation of PROFINET 8 6 Description of user data for acyclic services The acyclic data exchange is done via Record Data CRs CR Communication Relation Via these Record Data CRs the reading and writing of the following services is realized
73. remains active the option Don t allow exceptions it deactivated Figure 13 10 Adapting the Firewall in Win dows 2000 XP 13 20 Windows Firewall Windows Firewall is helping to protect your PC Windows Firewall helps protect your compter by preventing unau from gaining access to your computer through the Internet or a net On recommended This setting blocks all outside sources frym connecting computer with the exception of those sel C Don t allow exceptions Select this when you connect to public netwhrks ir locations such as airports You will not be notified Firewall blocks programs Selections on the Excepl ignored 8 Off not recommended Avoid using this setting Turning off Windows Firewall r computer more vulnerable to viruses and intruders Windows Firewall is using your domain settings What else should know about Windows Firewall Cox Windows Firewall Allgemein Ausnahmen Erweitert Der Windows Firewall ist dez Einstellungen ber eine Gru Programm hinzuf gen E3 Programme und Dienste Name Adaptive Server AnywH M Datei und Druckerfreid v Netzwerkdiagnose f r V v OPCEnum exe v OPCTestClient exe v PACTware 3 6 Port1 35 CO Remotedesktop M Remoteunterst tzung RSLins exe MA RSL anis KANN IBAN fi C Benachrichtigen wenn F che Risiken bestehen b Wahlen Sie ein Programm aus oder klicken Si
74. sends active diagnostics 115 ON IO G S 73h CONNECTION TIMEOUT ENUM USINT Reaction to the I O connection exceeding the time limit SWITCH IO FAULTED 0 The modules are switched to Faulted State SWITCH IO OFF 1 The gateway switches off the outputs of the modules SWITCH IO HOLD 2 No further changes to the I O data The outputs are held 138 GW Status Get DWORD Ox8A Register Set Allows to enable disable the status register which is part of the input data 0 deactivated 1 activated default D301173 0713 BL20 Ethernet multiprotocol gateway VSC Vendor Specific Classes Industri A Table 4 24 Attr No Attribute name Get Type Description Object instance dec Set 2 gateway hex instance 139 GW Control Get DWORD Allows to enable disable the control register Ox8B Register Set which is part of the output data 0 deactivated 1 activated default 140 Disable Protocols Get UINT Deactivate the other Ethernet protocols if 0x8C Set necessary 0 EtherNet IP can not be disabled via EtherNet IP interface Bit 1 Modbus TCP Bit 2 PROFINET Bit 15 web server D301173 0713 BL20 Ethernet multiprotocol gateway 4 19 Implementation of EtherNet IP 4 3 3 Process Data Class VSC102 66h This class contains the process relevant information Class instance Note A Please refer to paragraph Class Instance of the VSCs page 4 16 for the
75. the application level The application increases the service no with every request The service is blocked until the service number in the request area matches the service number in the response area The register result shows whether the execution was successful or not The register data reg count contains the number of data registers 0 to 122 The optional data area can contain depending on the service the requested data D301173 0713 BL20 Ethernet multiprotocol gateway 6 19 Implementation of Modbus TCP Supported service numbers Table 6 8 Service Code Meaning Supported 7 service numbers 0X0000 no function 0x0003 indirect reading of registers 0x0010 indirect writing of registers A service request may have the following results Table 6 9 Service Code Meaning results of the service request 0x0000 error free execution of service OxFFFE service parameters incorrect inconsistent OxFFFF service code unknown Note The services indirect reading of registers and indirect writing of registers offer an additional possibility to access any Modbus register Current Modbus masters support only a limited number of register areas that can be read or written during the communication with a Modbus server These areas can not be changed during operation In this case the services mentioned above enables non cyclic access to registers Indirect reading of registers 1 122 Count M
76. the module s process data 0 PV primary variable 1 SV 2nd variable 2 TV 3rd variable 3 QV 4th variable 6 HART variable C Defines the channel of which the HART variable is read 0 channel mapping 0 channel 1 1 channel 2 647 variable mapping Defines which HART variable of the connected sensor is mapped into the module s process data 0 PV primary variable 1 SV 2nd variable 2 TV 3rd variable 3 QV 4th variable 7 HART variable D Defines the channel of which the HART variable is read 0 channel mapping 0 channel 1 1 2 channel 2 647 variable mapping Defines which HART variable of the connected sensor is mapped into the module s process data 0 PV primary variable 1 SV 2nd variable 2 TV 3rd variable 3 QV 4th variable 3 40 D301173 0713 BL20 Ethernet multiprotocol gateway Parameters of the I O modules E BL20 E 8AI U I 4PT Ni 1 byte per channel Industri A Table 3 19 Byte Bit Parameter Value Meaning Module param name eters A default 0to7 0to5 Operation 000000 voltage 10 10 V DC Standard A setting mode B n 3 wire mea surement only 000001 voltage 10 VDC standard the first of the usedthannel 000010 voltage 10 10 VDC NE 43 NaS t00 DE 000011 voltage 0 10 VDC NE 43 parameterized The param
77. the response 6 1 2 Data model The data model distinguishes 4 basic data types Table 6 1 Data Type Object type Access Comment Data types for f Modbus Discrete Inputs Bit Read This type of data can be provided by an I O system Coils Bit Read Write This type of data can be alterable by an application program Input 16 bit Read This type of data can be provided by an I O system Registers word Holding 16 bit Read Write This type of data can be alterable by an application Registers word program For each of these basic data types the protocol allows individual selection of 65536 data items and the operations of read or write of those items are designed to span multiple consecutive data items up to a data size limit which is dependent on the transaction function code It s obvious that all the data handled via Modbus bits registers must be located in device application memory Access to these data is done via defined access addresses see Modbus registers page 6 7 The example below shows the data structure in a device with digital and analog in and outputs 6 4 D301173 0713 BL20 Ethernet multiprotocol gateway Common Modbus description BL20 devices have only one data block whose data can be accessed via different Modbus functions The access can be carried out either via registers 16 bit access or for some of them via single bit access Figure 6 5 Picture of the Gateway da
78. 0 E GW EN for Modbus TCP CoDeSys Win V3 Evaluation of the module diagnosis information The diagnosis data of module BL20 2AI THERMO PI at slot 4 of the example station can be found in registers 0xA060 to 0xAO7F see also Modbus TCP report Figure 7 16 Modbus report Mapping of parameter and diagnostic data page 7 17 whereby only register 0xA060 contains diagnosis information According to the examples for setting the modbus channels see Setting the Modbus channels examples and data mapping page 7 18 the following channel is add to read out the module diagnosis Read Holding Registers FC3 register 0xA060 length 1 Figure 7 37 Diagnosis chan channel nel Name Diag slot 4 Access Type Read Holding Registers Function Code 3 x Trigger Cydic Cycle Time ms 100 Comment READ Register Offset OxA060 Length 1 WRITE Register Offset 0x0000 Length 1 961W3 in the I O image of the example station shows the diagnosis information available at slot4 P Figure 7 38 BL20 MP project CoDeSys Diagnosis data Eie Edit View Project Buld Onine Debug Tools Window Help at slot 4 LAIC A Gic Devices XE Start Page jj BL20 E GW EN fj Device s PLC PRG vx S BL20 EMP fj Device connected CoDeSysi Modbus Slave Channel Modbus slave Ini Status Information s A PLCLogic Channels Q Application run Variable Mapping Channel Address Type
79. 0 MT Network Connection 2 this capability Otherwise you need to ask your network administrator Media State for the appropriate IP settings Duration Configure Speed This connection uses the following items Obtain an IP address automatically Eoi for Microsoft Networks Use the following IP address NEN dE QoS Packet Scheduler IP address 192 168 1 al File and Printer Sharing for Microsoft Networks Activity Subnet mask 255 255 255 Z Intemet Protocol Version 4 TCP IPv4 Default gateway poi See also Link Layer Topology Discovery Mapper 170 Driver Packets 4 Link Layer Topology Discovery Responder Obtain DNS server address automatically HomeGroup Internet Options Windows Firewall Use the following DNS server addresses Preferred DNS server Install Uninstall Properties Description Transmission Control Protocol Intemet Protocol The default wide area network protocol that provides communication across diverse interconnected networks Validate settings exit ok Alternate DNS server D301173 0713 BL20 Ethernet multiprotocol gateway 13 17 Appendix 13 2 2 Changing the IP address via lI O ASSISTANT V3 The Busaddress Management DTM in the software I O ASSISTANT access via Additional functions gt Busaddress Management offers the
80. 01173 0713 BL20 Ethernet multiprotocol gateway Application example Configuring the neighborhood detection A neighbor port can be assigned to each Ethernet port of a device In case of a device exchange this port is then used to assign the IP address and the device name to the new device The definition of the partner port is done either in the properties of the devices Ethernet ports or directly in the PROFINET Topology Editor seepage 9 16 Partner port definition via port configuration Selection of the port at the neighboring device to which this port is physically connected Figure 9 16 Partner port definition Example D301173 0713 BL20 Ethernet multiprotocol gateway r Dg 8 BS Oe HW Config SIMATIC 300 1 Configuration QW Station Edit Insert PLC View Options Window Help Ba alin m ED SR ke BL20 E GW EN Cere Js Port Interconnection Local port Medium General Addresses Topology Options SIMATIC 300 1 4 turck bI20 e 1 Port 1 RJ45 X1 P1 Local port Copper Partner port Copper m 4 turck bi20 e 1 Any partner X Any partner Altemating partner port SIMATIC 300 1 PN IO CPU 315 2 PN DP Port 1 RO S2 X2 P1 R SIMATIC 300 1 PN IO CPU 315 2 PN DP Port 2 RO S2 X2 P2 R SIMATIC 300 1 1 SCALANCE X202 2PIRT Port 1 RJ45 X1 P1 SIMATIC 300 1 1 SCALANCE X202 2PIRT Port 2 RJ45 X
81. 0xA10070xx Analog input modules BL20 1AI I 0 4 20MA 0x012350xx BL20 2AIH 0 4 20MA 0x225570xx BL20 1AI U 10 0 10VDC 0x011350xx BL20 2AI U 10 0 10VDC 0x235570xx BL20 2AI PT NI 2 3 0x215770xx BL20 2AI THERMO PI 0x215570xx BL20 2AIH I 0x2179COxx BL20 4AI U I 0x417790xx BL20 E 4AI TC 0x427790xx BL20 E 8AI U I AAI PT NI 0x6199B0xx Digital output modules BL20 2DO 24VDC 0 5A P 0x212002xx BL20 2DO 24VDC 0 5A N 0x222002xx BL20 2DO 24VDC 2A P 0x232002xx BL20 2DO 120 230VAC 0 5A 0x250002xx BL20 4DO 24VDC 0 5A P 0x013003xx BL20 E 8DO 24VDC 0 5A P 0x610004xx 13 24 D301173 0713 BL20 Ethernet multiprotocol gateway Ident codes the BL20 modules Industri A Table 13 7 Module ident code Module ident codes BL20 16DO 24VDC 0 5A P 0x413005xx BL20 E 16DO 24VDC 0 5A P 0x820005xx BL20 32DO 24VDC 0 5A P 0x614007xx Analog output modules BL20 1AO 1 0 4 20MA 0x010605xx BL20 2AO 1 0 4 20MA 0x220807xx BL20 2A0 U 10 0 10VDC 0x210807xx BL20 2AO H 0x217AB7xx BL20 E 4AO U I 0x417A09xx Relay modules BL20 2DO R NC 0x230002xx BL20 2DO R NO 0x220002xx BL20 2DO R CO 0x210002xx technology modules BL20 1RS232 0x014799xx BL20 1RS485 422 0x024799xx BL20 1SSI 0x044799xx BL20 E 1SWIRE 0x169C99xx BL20 E 2CNT 2PWM 0x017BCCxx BL20 2RFID A 0x017977xx BL20 2RFID S 0x2179CCxx Power distribution modules BL20 BR 24VDC D 0x013000xx BL20 BR 24VDC RED 0x440030xx
82. 1 Block diagram ofa BL20 station with PROFINET gateway Service USB T im Module bus CPU Switch t FI jj 5V Logi Logi 5 Logi Logi m 24 Qj ipe ns V V v V M ILI fe oo O Eti Eth Us U Us U u Gateway Outpu Intput Bus Output Power Outpu Refreshing Feeding D301173 0713 BL20 Ethernet multiprotocol gateway Electromagnetic compatibility EMC Industri A 11 3 Electromagnetic compatibility EMC BL20 products comply in full with the requirements pertaining to EMC regulations Nevertheless an EMC plan should be made before installation Hereby all potential electromechanical sources of interference should be considered such as galvanic inductive and capacitive couplings as well as radiation couplings 11 3 1 Ensuring electromagnetic compatibility The EMC of BL20 modules is guaranteed when the following basic rules are adhered to E Correct and large surface grounding of inactive metal components Correct shielding of cables and devices Proper cable routing correct wiring Creation of a standard reference potential and grounding of all ele
83. 1 P2 SIMATIC 300 1 1 SCALANCE X202 2PIRT Port 3 POF X1 P3 SIMATIC 300 1 1 SCALANCE X202 2PIRT Port 4 POF X1 P4 SIMATIC rei een igen 107 Port 1 X1 P1 SIMATI 2 turck 4gen 107 Port 2 X1 P 3 t S0 Port 1 X1 P1 SIMATIC 300 1 turckfgen 90 Port 2 X1 P2 100m z Ex axi analog input analog output digital input digital output BL20 16D0 24VDC 0 54 P BL20 2D0 120 230VAC 0 54 BL20 2D0 24VDC 0 54 N BL20 2D0 24VDC 0 54 P BL20 2D0 24VDC 24 P BL20 2DO R CO BL20 2DO R NC BL20 2DO R NO BL20 32D0 24VDC 0 54 P BL20 4D0 24VDC 0 54 P BL20 E 16D0 24VDC 0 54 P BL20 E 8D0 24VDC 0 54 P empty slot power technology 20 E GW PN f c a s n a s n a P E m 5827226 a e TURCK e BL20 E 8D0 24VDC 0 54 P GSDML V2 25 TURCK BL20 E Gw EN 20121220 010100 ml Slot is occupied module is too wide or the functionality of the inserted module is not transferable to the new module Chg 4 9 15 Application example BL20 E GW EN with PROFINET S7 Neighborhood assignment using the Topology Editor The assignment of neighboring devices is done either in the tabular or the graphical view The copper ports of the devices are shown in green the fiber optic ports in orange Figure 9 17 gh g E GW arnim PROFINET OET PLC Vie
84. 1011 1000 mV reserved E BL20 4AI U I 1 byte parameters per channel Table 3 16 Byte Bit Parameter name Value Module param eters 0to3 0 range 0 0 10V 0 20mMAA 1 10 410 V 4 20 mA A default 1 value representation 0 Integer 15 bit sign A setting 1 12 bit left justified 2 Diagnosis 0 release A 1 block 3 Channel 0 activate A 1 deactivate 4 Operation mode 0 voltage A 1 current D301173 0713 BL20 Ethernet multiprotocol gateway 3 37 Properties gateway and I O modules BL20 4AI U I 1 byte parameters per channel Table 3 17 Byte Bit Parameter name Value Module param eters 0to3 0 reserved 1 value representation 0 Integer 15 bit sign A A default 1 12 bit left justified setting 2 Diagnosis O release A 1 block 3 channel x 0 activate A 1 deactivate 4 element Kx 0000 Type K 270 1370 CA 0001 Type B 100 1820 C 0010 Type E 270 1000 C 0011 Type J 210 1200 C 0100 Type N 270 1300 C 0101 Type R 50 1760 C 0110 Type S 50 1540 C 0111 Type T 270 400 C 1000 50 mV 1001 100 mV 1010 500 mV 1011 1000 mV 1100 Type K 454 2498 F 1101 Type J 346 2192 F 1110 Type C 0 2315 C 1111 Type G 0 2315 C 3 38 D301173 0713 BL20 Ethernet multiprotocol gateway Parameters of the I O modules Industri A
85. 115200 bps reserved 4 Select RS485 0 parameterization of the module as RS422 1 parameterization of the module as RS485 5 reserved 6 DisableReducedCtrl Constant setting The diagnostic messages are shown in Byte 6 of the process input data independently from Diagnosis Byte 6 of the process output data contains 2 bits with which the receive or transmit buffer can be cleared Byte 7 contains the status or control byte User data are represented in Bytes 0 5 Diagnosis 0 release A 1 block Stop bits O 1bitA 1 2bit 2 1 Parity 00 none 01 oddA The parity bit is set so that the total number of bits data bits plus parity bit set to 1 is odd 10 even The parity bit is set so that the total number of bits data bits plus parity bit set to 1 is odd 3 Data bits 0 7A The number of data bits is 7 O 8A The number of data bits is 8 3 50 D301173 0713 BL20 Ethernet multiprotocol gateway Parameters of the I O modules Industri A Table 3 26 Byte Bit Module param eters Parameter name Value XON character 0 255 17 A only in the RS422 mode XON character This character is used to start the transmission of data from the data terminal device if the software handshake is active XOFF character 0 255 19 A only in the RS422 mode XOFF character This character is used to start the transmission
86. 1173 0713 BL20 Ethernet multiprotocol gateway Application example 3 Selecta node and close the dialog with OK The features of the selected node are now shown in the in the dialog Edit Ethernet Node Device name assignment BL20 gateway If necessary the deivce name can now be changed to the needs of the application In this example the following name is assigned to the BL20 gateway E Devicename turck bl20 e 1 Figure 9 14 Edit Ethernet Node ss Adap tation of Ethernet node the Ethernet Nodes accessible online node configura MAC address 00 07 46 80 00 01 Browse tion Set IP configuration Use P parameters Gateway IP address E Do not use router Subnet mask Use router C Obtain IP address from a DHCP server Identified by Cc CintIDD serena Assign device name Device name turck bI20 e 1 Assign Name Reset to factory settings Reset Note i Here you can also assign an application specific device name to the devices which were found Please observe that the device name assigned here has to be similar to the device name assigned to the node in the properties dialog box see Figure 9 11 Dialog Properties TURCK If this is not guaranteed the PLC will not be able to clearly identify the node D301173 0713 BL20 Ethernet multiprotocol gateway 9 13 Application example BL20 E GW EN with PROFINET S7 9 1
87. 2 210 Shield connection gateway tete entente nnne tnttt nott tonto ttt notos ERER AEEA E D301173 0713 BL20 Ethernet multiprotocol gateway 2 1 BL20 philosophy 2 1 2 1 1 2 1 2 2 1 3 2 2 The basic concept BL20 is a modular I O system for use in industrial automation It connects the sensors and actuators in the field with the higher level master BL20 offers modules for practically all applications Digital input and output modules Analog input and output modules E Technology modules counters RS232 interface A complete BL20 station counts as one station on the bus and therefore occupies one fieldbus address in any given fieldbus structure A BL20 station consists of a gateway power distribution modules and I O modules The connection to the relevant fieldbus is made via the bus specific gateway which is responsible for the communication between the BL20 station and the other fieldbus stations The communication within the BL20 station between the gateway and the individual BL20 modules is regulated via an internal module bus Note m The gateway is the only fieldbus dependent module on a BL20 station All other BL20 modules are not dependent on the fieldbus used Flexibility All BL20 stations can be planned to accommodate the exact number of channels to suit your needs because the modules are available with different numbers of channels in block and slice design A BL20 stati
88. 20 16 bit Obit E GW EN gt VN 1 BL20 2DI 24VDC P 01 BL20 2DI 2bit Obit 2 BL20 4DI 24VDC P 02 BL20 4DI Abit Obit 24VDC P 3 BL20 1AI U 10 0 10VDC O3 BL20 1ALU 16bit Obit 0 0 10VDC 4 BL20 2AI THERMO PI 32 bit Obit 5 BL20 2D0 24VDC 0 5A P 05 B Obit 2 bit 2 5D 6 BL20 E 8D0 24VDC 0 5A P 06 BL20 E 8D8 Obit 8 bit 24VDC 0 5A P Local VO data incl status control T Word Summarized diagnostics Y 0 Words Total size for in out data rounded on full words 1 Word For detailed information about status control word see online help 2 2 lO map for input data Ox0000 0000 0315 0314 03 13 03 12 03 11 03 10 03 09 03 08 03 07 0306 0305 0304 03 03 03 02 03 01 03 00 Ox0001 0001 0415 0414 04 13 04 012 04 11 04 10 04 08 04 08 0407 0406 0405 0404 04 03 04 02 0401 04 00 0x0002 0002 0431 0430 0429 0428 0427 0426 0425 0424 0423 0422 0421 0x0004 0004 GW i5 GW 14 GW 13 GW I2 GW GW 0 GWO GW 08 GWOT Gwe GW 05 0x05 0005 3 E d s Description 1 Column Register address n Column Modul number bitposition GW gateway status diagnostics bits M module diagnostics 1 bit for each module Process input data 6 Words 2 3 I O map for output data SS egere equ ae SE wae ae ae ae Sea aa Sa pug e eene meg n ncque eese ope 0x0800 2048 gt a 06 07 06 00 0605 0604 0603 0602 06 01 0600 05 01 05 00 Description 1 Column Register address n Column Modul number bitposition Process output data 1 W
89. 20 Ethernet multiprotocol gateway 7 25 Application example BL20 E GW EN for Modbus TCP CoDeSys Win V3 7 3 10 Building login and start 1 The WIN V3 PLC has to be running This is done in the Windows task bar Figure 7 28 Starting the WIN V3 PLC Start PLC Stop PLC Exit PLC Control About Bea 2 Building the program 4 05PM 2 11 2013 Figure 7 29 Building the program 7 26 BL20 E MP project CoDeSys SCA A File Edit View Project Build Online Debug Tools Window d 55 Ens ESSE EE SERE 2M PLCLogic Application d c i Library Manager E PLc Pc PRG B amp B Task Configuration MainTask Ethernet Ethernet J BL20 E Gw EN M pe A l P Pous Devices BL20 EMP 2 Device CoDeSys Control Win V Start Page Modbus Slave Channel cg d build 1p E Pic PRG GV J Modbus TCP Master x Slave Init ModbusTCPSlave Configuration ModbusTCPSlave 1 0 Mapping Status In Line Access Type 1 Write Multiple 1648040 245 4 1 parameters WRITE Offset Default Value Length Comment Move up Move down New Delete l Edit Current user nobody D301173 0713 BL20 Ethernet multiprotocol gateway Programming with CoDeSys
90. 3 35 Smart Software Solutions GmbH PLC PRG in Structured Text ST X o J ewe J 5 Thenew project is created 6 In CoDeSys the project tree is build up as follows Figure 7 5 Project tree Eie Edit View Project Buld Onine Debug Tools Window Help ea Elec BAXA L20 f o rj Device CoDeSys Control WinV3 S S PLCLoaic Application ii Library Manager 8 Pc PRc PRG S Task Configuration MainTask Note If the window devices should not be displayed it can be activated via View Devices 7 6 D301173 0713 BL20 Ethernet multiprotocol gateway Programming with CoDeSys 7 3 3 Defining the communication settings Double clicking the Device CoDeSys Control Win V3 opens the corresponding editors The communication path Gateway to the HMI is defined in the Communication Settings tab Gateway definition 1 Usethe Add gateway button to open the dialog box Gateway and where necessary assign a new gateway name 2 Keep the setting localhost or define an IP address for the gateway instead When using the setting localhost the CoDeSys communication gateway of the PC on which this CoDeSys installation is running is used as programming interface Figure 7 6 BL20 E MP project CoDeSys eae C fem Communica File Edit View Project Build Online Debug Tools Window Help tion settings Agee ls X d tay 11 Devices ax Device vx 45 BL20 EMP fJ Device CoDeSys C
91. 4 3 2 4 3 3 4 3 4 5 1 5 1 1 5 2 5 2 1 5 2 2 5 3 5 4 5 4 1 5 4 2 6 1 6 1 1 6 1 2 6 2 6 3 6 3 1 6 3 2 6 3 3 6 3 4 6 3 5 6 3 6 6 3 7 6 3 8 6 3 9 6 4 6 5 7 1 7 1 1 7 1 2 7 2 7 3 73 1 7 32 7 3 3 7 34 Industr A MESS DESOT4gMerrrllqe e M Class Instance of the VSCS escessssssesssssssssessessecsscssessessssssessesssssncsssssucsuscsussusssessessnsansanecsncanceascauscasssucsucsassssceueeseesseesceseeaseaneeseessessees Gateway Class VSC 100 64h Process Data Class VSC102 66h Miscellaneous Parameters Class VSC 126 Application example BL20 E GW EN with EtherNet IP Allen Bradley icu ee A m 5 2 Used Rer Te E To INI 5 2 Network configuration 5 3 Configuration of the network in RS Logix 5000 eese teen enent teen tte nnt ttts rettet nonet tts notti nin tte nonet 5 3 Downloading the I O configuration csssssscsssecsseecsseccssecsssecsssecssscessccsssecssccssuccesuecesuccessecsnscessscessscesucesseecsucessceesscessueessueessnseesies 5 7 1 O GataiMap pin socssessicsiscccsicssscscsescsecasacsscssssesssecessesssesssussscescsesnsssaconsseusseteadecssesssousdecosevascoesdousssbssdouscodsssassesese 5 9
92. 5 04 24 0423 0422 0421 0420 04 18 04 18 04 17 04 16 0x0003 0003 02 03 0202 02 01 02 00 01 01 01 00 0x0004 0004 Gw 15 GW 14 GW 13 GW 12 GW 11 GW 10 GW 0e Gwe Gwar GW 06 GW 05 GW 04 GW 03 GW02 GW01 GW 00 0x0005 0005 M05 M04 M03 M02 mot MOO Description 1 Column Register address n Column Modul number bitposition GW gateway status diagnostics bits M module diagnostics 1 bit for each module Process input data 6 Words 2 3 O map for output data Ox0800 2048 06 07 0606 0605 0604 0603 0602 0601 0600 0501 0500 Description 1 Column Register address n Column Modul number bitposition Process output data 1 Word D301173 0713 BL20 Ethernet multiprotocol gateway Programming with CoDeSys Figure 7 16 Modbus report Mapping of Station report parameter and diagnostic data 2 4 Map for parameter data Parameter Value BL20 1AI U 10 0 10VDC voltage mode 0 10V 10 10V Integer 15Bit sign gt 12Bit left iustfied release block gt activate deactivate 50Hz 60Hz Integer 15Bit sign gt 12Bit left ustified release block activate deactivate Type K 270 1370 C Type B 100 1820 C Type E 270 1000 C Type J 210 1200 C Type N 270 1300 C Type R 50 1760 C Type S 50 1540 C Type T 270 400 C 4 50mV BL20 1AI U 10 0 10VDC value representation BL20 1AI U 10 0 10VDC diagnostics
93. 7 46 80 18 88 192 168 1 3 255 255 255 0 192 168 1 1 ROTARY 2 0 0 0 3 00 00 00 00 00 00 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 RESTO 0 0 0 0 Found 3 Devices D301173 0713 BL20 Ethernet multiprotocol gateway 3 27 Properties gateway and I O modules 3 6 Synchronization of the station configuration 3 6 1 DIP switch CFG The DIP switch CFG at the gateway serves to take over the Current Configuration of the BL20 station as Required Configuration to the gateway s non volatile memory Note i Storing the Current Configuration via SET Taster is necessary in EtherNet IP as well as in Modbus TCP in PROFINET the referenced configuration is defined by the master Figure 3 18 DIP switch for storing the station configu ration 3 28 i ADDRESS ERR BUS Switching from OFF to ON starts the storage ofthe Current Configuration asthe Required Configuration Reference configuration Procedure Switching the DIP switch CFG from OFF to ON Starting of storage process LED IOs flashes green 1 Hz LED IOs shortly lits up orange storage process active set back the DIP switch from ON to OFF storage process terminated successfully if the LEDs IOs and GW are constant green Note i If the DIP switch is not set back the gateway will continuously restart the storage process Only setting the switch back from ON to OFF wi
94. 864 436865 slot 2 0x9020 36896 436897 slot 3 0x9040 36928 436929 slot 32 0x93E0 37856 437857 6 10 D301173 0713 BL20 Ethernet multiprotocol gateway Modbus registers Industri A Table 6 4 Description Hex Decimal 5 digit Modicon Mapping of BL20 E GW EN Modbus regis ters holding registers Diagnostics max 32 modules per station OxA000 to x 32 registers for module ID 0xA400 slot 1 OxA000 40960 440961 slot 2 0xA020 40991 E 440992 slot 3 OxA040 41023 441024 slot 32 OxA3EO 41983 441984 Parameters max 32 modules per station x 0xB000 to 32 registers for module ID 0xB400 slot 1 OxBOO0 45056 i 445057 slot 2 0xB020 45088 445089 slot 3 0xB040 45120 2 445121 slot 32 OxB3EO 46048 446049 D301173 0713 BL20 Ethernet multiprotocol gateway 6 11 Implementation of Modbus TCP 6 3 1 Structure of the packed in output process data In order to assure a largely efficient access to the process data of a station the module data are consistently packed and mapped to a coherent register area The I O modules are divided into digital and intelligent modules analog modules serial interfaces Note i For the data mapping the BL20 1SWIRE modules are not considered as intelligent modules Their process data is mapped into the register area for the digital in and output modules Both module types are mapped in separate register ranges The data mappin
95. ATIC PC Station p FR E E E H 6827329 TURCK Modular Fieldbus IO System in IP20 L GSDML V2 25 TURCK BL20 E Gw EN 20121220 3 Chosethe profile rack RACK 300 for the Siemens CPU from the catalog and add it to the network window D301173 0713 BL20 Ethernet multiprotocol gateway 9 5 Application example BL20 E GW EN with PROFINET S7 4 After this select the Siemens CPU from the hardware catalog In this example a CPU 315 2 PN DP version 6ES7 315 2EH14 0ABO V 3 2 is used Figure 9 6 Selecting the CPU n MN Station Edt Inset PLC View Options Window Help elx Oe SS EE T EEAS Profile Standard bi Eg CPU 300 Eg CPU 312 CPU 312 IFM CPU 312 CPU 313 53 cpu 313C CPU 313C2 DP GM CPU 3130 2 PIP CPU 314 CPU 314 IFM CPU 314C 2 DP CPU 314C 2 PN DP y CPU 314C 2 PIP CPU 315 CPU 3152 DP B CPU 315 2 PN DP d Cg amp ES7 315 2EG10 0480 Cg amp ES 315 2EH13 0480 Eg 6ES7 315 2EH14 0480 Ig v3 1 o un ki i 3 CPU 315F 2 DP E CPU 315F 2 PN DP CPU 316 zy CPU 316 2 DP i CPU 317 2 CPU 317 2 PN DP 3 CPU 317F 2 F a CPU 317F 2 PN DP BES 315 2EH14 DABO zd 384 KB work memory 0 05ms 1000 instructions 3 PROFINET connection 7 Communication loadable FB
96. Address setting ADDRESS Note The internal module bus does not require any addressing EEPROM Thus they will get lost in case of a subsequent address assignment via a BootP DHCP or PGM Attention After changing the position of the rotary coding switches a voltage reset must be carried out to store the new address Attention The settings carried out via DIP switches 2 to 2 are not stored in the module s 3 18 D301173 0713 BL20 Ethernet multiprotocol gateway Address assignment Industri A 3 5 5 Address setting via the mode DHCP Address setting is carried out by a DHCP server in the network after the start up of the gateway In order to activate the DHCP mode the DIP switch MODE is set to ON the address switches 2 to 27 to address 1 see Table 3 7 Combinations of address switches Figure 3 8 DHCP mode ADDRESS MODE d u CrOpLI T UuSERCZE off on Note F The IP address as well as the default subnet mask assigned to the gateway by the DHCP server are stored in the module s EEPROM If the gateway is subsequently switched to another address mode the settings IP address subnet mask etc will be read from the module s EEPROM Attention After every change of the address mode a voltage reset must be carried done DHCP supports three mechanisms for IP address
97. Bit bit by bit BL20 4DO x 4 Bit bit by bit BL20 E 8DO x 8 Bit bit by bit BL20 16DO x 16 Bit bit by bit BL20 E 16DO x 16 Bit bit by bit BL20 32DO x 32 Bit bit by bit Analog input modules BL20 1AI x 1 word word by word BL20 2AI x 2 word word by word BL20 2AIH I 12 word word by word BL20 4AI x 4 word word by word BL20 E 4AI TC 4 word word by word BL20 E 8AI U I 4AI PT NI 8 word word by word Analog outputs BL20 1AO x 1 word word by word BL20 2AO x 2 word word by word BL20 2AOH I 8 word 2 word word by word BL20 E 4AO U I 4 word word by word 6 14 D301173 0713 BL20 Ethernet multiprotocol gateway Modbus registers Industri A Table 6 5 Module Process input Process output Alignment Data width of the I O modules A Theprocessdata Technology modules of the SWIRE modules is BL20 1RSxxx 4 word 4 word word by word mapped into the register area for BL20 1SSI 4 word 4 word word by word thedigitalin gi5o E CNT 2pWM 12 word 12 word word by word and output modules BL20 E SWIRE A 4 word 4 word word by word BL20 2RFID S 12 word 12 word word by word Power distribution modules BL20 BR x BL20 PF x D301173 0713 BL20 Ethernet multiprotocol gateway 6 15 Implementation of Modbus TCP 6 3 2 Register Ox100C Gateway status This register contains a general gateway sta
98. C 2 wire 100001 Ni 100 60 C 150 C 2 wire 100010 Ni 1000 60 C 250 C 2 wire 100011 Ni 1000 60 C 150 C 2 wire 100100 Ni 1000TK5000 60 C 250 C 2 wire 100101 reserved 100110 reserved 100111 reserved 101000 Ni 100 60 C 250 C 3 wire 101001 Ni 100 60 C 150 C 3 wire 101010 Ni 1000 60 C 250 C 3 wire 101011 Ni 1000 60 C 150 C 3 wire 101100 Ni 1000TK5000 60 C 250 C 3 wire 101101 reserved 101110 reserved 101111 reserved 110000 resistance 0 250 Q 110001 resistance 0 400 Q 110010 resistance 0 800 Q 110011 resistance 0 2000 110100 resistance 0 4000 110101 reserved to 111110 111111 deactivated 6 value 0 Integer 15 bit sign A representation A Kx 12 bit left justified 7 diagnostics Kx 0 release A 1 block 3 42 D301173 0713 BL20 Ethernet multiprotocol gateway Parameters of the I O modules Industri A 3 9 3 Analog output modules BL20 1AO I 0 4 20MA Table 3 20 Byte Bit Parameter name Value Module param et r 0 current mode 0 0 20 mA A 1 4 20 mA A default 1 value representation 0 Integer 15 bit sign A setting 1 12 bit left justified 2 reserved to7 1 Substitute value low byte 2 Substitute value high byte E BL20 2Al I 0 4 20MA 3 byte per channel Table 3 21 Byte Bit Parameter name Value Module param d 7 eters 0 3 0 current mode 020 20
99. CP 6 3 6 Register 0x113E and Ox113F Save Modbus Connection Parameters Registers 0x113E and 0x113F are used for permanent storing the parameters in registers 0x1120 and 0x1130 to 0x113B For this purpose write 0x7361 to register 0x113E To activate the saving of the registers write 0x7665 save within 30 seconds in register Ox113F Both registers can also be written with one single request using the function codes FC16 and FC23 6 3 7 Register 0x1140 Disable protocol Note i This register is only valid for BL20 E GW EN with multiprotocol functionality meaning for gateways with VN 03 00 and higher Bit 7 Bit 6 Bit 5 Bit 4 Bit 3 Bit 2 Bit 1 Bit O PROFINET received EtherNet IP deactivate deactivate Bit 15 Bit 14 Bit 13 Bit 12 Bit 11 Bit 10 Bit 9 Bit 8 Web Server deactivate 6 3 8 Register 0x1141 Active protocol Note E This register is only valid for BL20 E GW EN with multiprotocol functionality meaning for gateways with VN 03 00 and higher Bit 7 Bit 6 Bit 5 Bit 4 Bit 3 Bit 2 Bit 1 Bit 0 prorinet Modbus cthernet IP TCP active active active Bit 15 Bit 14 Bit 13 Bit 12 Bit 11 Bit 10 Bit 9 Bit 8 Web Server active 6 18 D301173 0713 BL20 Ethernet multiprotocol gateway Modbus registers Industri A 6 3 9 Register 0x2000 bis 0x207F The Service Object T
100. CPSlave 999999999999 4 Create new variable Mapto existing variable Current user nobody 7 24 D301173 0713 BL20 Ethernet multiprotocol gateway Programming with CoDeSys 4 Write Parameters of the station Disable channel diagnosis at channel 1 at slot 3 of the station BL20 1Al U 10 0 10VDC Writing parameters is normally done once during the program start and is thus not set as a normal Modbus channel under ModbusSlave Channel but as an Initialization channel under Modbus Slave Init see Figure 7 27 Setting the initialization channel for the parameterization Access Type Write Single Register function code 06 Write Register Offset 0xB040 see below The parameters of the station can be found in register 0xB040 to OxBO60 Parameterization of the station The example parameterization will be the disabling of the channel diagnosis at channel 1 slot 3 of the station Register OxBO40 Bit 2 The parameter register is build up as follows Figure 7 26 a 2 4 Map for parameter data Assignment of parameterreg Station report isters Register Bitpos Length Sit Module Parameter Value rang 5040 0 1 3 BL20 1AI U 10 0 10VDC voltage mode 0 010V a 1 10 10V 5040 1 1 3 BL20 1AI U 10 0 10VDC value representation 0 Integer 15Bit
101. Coils E FC2 Read Discrete Inputs E FC5 Write Single Coil E FC15 Write Multiple Coils Data mapping in the input discrete and coil areas Mapping Mapping input discrete area All digital inputs are stored in this area offset 0 Mapping Mapping Coil area All digital outputs are stored in this area offset 0 6 22 D301173 0713 BL20 Ethernet multiprotocol gateway Error behavior of outputs watchdog 6 5 Error behavior of outputs watchdog In case of a failure of the Modbus communication the outputs behavior is as follows depending on the defined time for the Watchdog register 0x1120 page 6 7 E watchdog 0 ms default outputs hold the momentary value E watchdog gt 0 ms outputs switch to 0 after the watchdog time has expired Note i Please observe that changes in the watchdog time have to be saved per save command see Register 0x113E and 0x113F Save Modbus Connection Parameters page 6 18 Note i Setting the outputs to predefined substitute values is not possible in Modbus TCP Eventually parameterized substitute values will not be used D301173 0713 BL20 Ethernet multiprotocol gateway 6 23 Implementation of Modbus TCP 6 24 D301173 0713 BL20 Ethernet multiprotocol gateway Industri A 7 Application example BL20 E GW EN for Modbus TCP CoDeSys Win V3 7 1 UTDPBLIPCEEDUULI M T 2 7 1 1
102. DTM can only be executed via Ethernet The download using the USB interface is not supported More information is available in the program s online help Attention A The station should be disconnected from the fieldbus when downloading Firmware must be downloaded by authorized personnel only The field level must be isolated D301173 0713 BL20 Ethernet multiprotocol gateway 10 11 Guidelines for station planning 10 12 D301173 0713 BL20 Ethernet multiprotocol gateway Industri A 11 Guidelines for Electrical Installation 11 1 cler 11 2 11 1 1 II g 11 2 T1452 Cable TOULIDIg sette a E E etie iie es ec E TM mRNA TER AIME 11 2 Cable routing inside and outside of cabinets 0 0 essssessscssssecessscessscessseecenssecessseessnssscesseseesnseecsssecsnsescenseeecsnsescesneeesene 11 2 Cable routing outside buildings ettet tto ntt no ttts nott notti notis notis notti nones 11 3 11 1 3 Lightning protetti er 11 3 11 1 4 Transmission n TT LE RM 11 3 11 2 Potential relationships 11 4 11 2 1 EEE E 11 4 11 3 Electromagnetic compatibility EMC sesessessssesoesesoesesoesososeoeossosoosoesoroesoroesoseesoseesoseososeososeososesssorseeoseesos 11 5 11 3 1 Ensuring
103. DeSys C ian group diagnosis se g t vew Project Bud Online Debug Tools Window Hep Eu die d 5 Dig Devices vax Start Page jJ BL20 E GW EN fj Device S PLC PRG yx Ed BL20 EMP S j bewiee eonnedtedj CaDesysi Modbus Slave Configuration Modbus Slave Channel Modbus Slave init ModbusGenericSerialSlave 1 0 Mapping gt 2 PLCLogic Channels LE e Application run Variable Mapping Channel Address Type Default Val Cu Gv d Status 5 Status 0 IW1 WORD 1 i Library Manager 5 group diag IW2 ARRAY 0 E PLC_PRG PRG S group diag 0 IW2 WORD 3 R Task Configuration Bito X4 0 BOOL MainTask b Bit1 eD4 1 BOOL fj Ethernet Ethernet Bit2 amp DX42 BOOL fj Modbus TCP Master Bit3 amp DX4 3 BOOL S ff BL20 E Gw EN Bit4 DX4 4 BOOL Bit5 amp DX45 BOOL D Bits 1X4 6 BOOL E Bit7 amp X47 BOOL Bits X5 0 BOOL Bit X5 1 BOOL b Bit10 X5 2 BOOL Bitll 9 amp DX5 3 BOOL Bit12 X5 4 BOOL Bit13 X5 5 BOOL A Bit14 X5 6 BOOL _ E Die o ove 7 pant z 4 n IEC Objects Variable Mapping Type BL20_E_GW_EN_Insta M ModbusTCPSlave umma nd Create new variable Mapto existing variable P Pous S Devices Current user nobody bit3 1 slot 4 sends diagnosis information BL20 2AI THERMO PI see also Used hard software page 7 2 D301173 0713 BL20 Ethernet multiprotocol gateway 7 31 Application example BL2
104. Default Val Cui d cv 2 9 Diag slot 4 IW3 ARRAY 0 fi Library Manager 3 9 Diag slot 4 0 IW3 WORD 2 B PLc Pac Re Bito 1X6 0 BOOL y decet b Siti X6 1 BOOL amp MainTask Bit2 X6 2 BOOL og Ethernet Ethernet Bit3 1X6 3 BOOL fj Modbus TCP Master Bit4 64 BOOL Sf amp L2o cw EN Bits IX6 5 BOOL Bit eDX6 6 BOOL Bit7 amp D6 7 BOOL Bit8 D7 0 BOOL F E Bit9 D7 1 BOOL Bit10 D7 2 BOOL b Bit11 D7 3 BOOL Bit12 D7 4 BOOL Bit13 D7 5 BOOL Biti4 D7 6 BOOL Biti5 D7 7 BOOL 4 m IEC Objects Variable Mapping Type BL20 E GW EN Insta ModbusTCPSlave a 4 m r Create new variable Mapto existing variable D Pous amp Devices Current user nobody 7 32 D301173 0713 BL20 Ethernet multiprotocol gateway Programming with CoDeSys Meaning Bit 1 Open circuit at channel 1 see also Diagnostic messages of the modules page 3 56 Figure 7 39 1 5 Map for diagnostic data Mapping of p diag diagnosis data Register Bit pos Length Slot Modue Parameter Vawerange according to A040 0 1 3 BL20 1AI U 10 0 10 VDC Overflow underrun channel x NN Modbus report A060 0 1 4 BL20 2AI THERMO PI Measurement value range error channel x 0 1 A060 BL20 2AI THERMO PI Open circuit channel x 0 1 A080 2 1 4 BL20 2AI THERMO FI No PT1000 sensor cold j comp channel x 0 1 activat
105. Drive PowerFlex 4M E AC Drive via 22 COMM E Allen Bradley Drive 3 PowerFlex 70 EC E AC Drive via 20 COMM E Allen Bradley Drive PowerFlex 700 AC E Active Converter via 20 COMM E Allen Bradley Drive PowerFlex 700 Vector 20 208 240V AC Drive via 20 COMM E Allen Bradley Drive PowerFlex 700 Vector 40 400 480V AC Drive via 20 COMM E Allen Bradley Drive PowerFlex 700 Vector 60 600V AC Drive via 20 COMM E Allen Bradley Drive PowerFlex 7000 2 E MV Drive Fourth Gen Control via 20 COMM E Allen Bradley Drive v s gt 218 of 218 Module Types Found CO Close on Create Create Close Help 5 Enter the necessary device information like Module name and Communication format and define the station s IP address and the connection parameters 6 Inthe Assembly Instances 103 and 104 please enter the connection parameters of the station Figure 5 3 ey Module Configuring the Type ETHERNET MODULE Generic Ethemet Module B L2 0 Vendor Allen Bradley Parent Local station m som AEN Connection Parameters n LUN Assembly Description nstance Size Input 32 bit Output 32 bit Comm Foma Data INT_ contain Y Address Host Name Gratin 1 08 16 Q Host Name v Open Module Properties DK mem Help 5 4 D301173 0713 BL20 Ethernet multiprotocol gateway Network configuration Note If the variable Assembly Instances 103 and 104 see page 4 6 are used the Connec
106. E ecc 2 2 axle 2 2 OTN AGEN GSS 5 E ird enn bie trs irure tef tes ee RENI Ure E AE E E EN 2 2 acr 2 2 BL20 components RRRRRRRR 2 3 GAT WAYS 2 3 Power distribution MOCUIES scsessssssecseecsseccssecessecsssecssscesseccsssessssecssscssnccesuscessecsssecsnscessnsecssscessscessscessecesusccssccesssessuecsuseesuseesnseesee 2 4 Electronics modules standard product line c secssssssessssscscsssscsscssssssssssscssucsssessscsssessnccsssssucsssesesesecssscesecsssessncsssessncsusesssessseesees 2 5 ze e Tad one duin C 2 6 Base modules End plate End bracket JUD DOS sesiosss scssscssensnss reris ee rbt ra een A Dea rs ras iu ORTU adtaicvasndeas A TAAR OOA A I EnsHEnEUSIie EE M 2 9 Shield connection gateway eset ansehen soosssvosensendodsvnsdedsvasass uposs wrdadsa ssensavosedsersdessssgoas ebd ropas epa eoi rbd sns00 2 10 Properties gateway and I O modules Function of the gateway sisccscsceasscscesscocecssoassessdsccssesssscsoessstecsecssesoustesseuesecessesssoesssecusedsseussousssebussusseuosedsesessssees 3 3 Version OVErVIE
107. E_MP H Memory area 0 contains Data Input O BL20_E_MP Build complete 0 errors 0 warnings Precompile OK Program loaded Current user nobody D301173 0713 BL20 Ethernet multiprotocol gateway 7 27 Application example BL20 E GW EN for Modbus TCP CoDeSys Win V3 7 3 11 Reading out the process data The station s process data are shown in the register tab ModbusTCPSlave I O Mapping Note In order assure a regular updating of the process data activate the function Always update variables Figure 7 32 BL20 E MP project CoDeSys es ce Modbus TCP File Edit View Project Build Onine Debug Tools Window Help Slavel Oimage 1 8 amp IM So Ie es TIBI OS QU o m Devices X ge with process ETIT 2x StartPage j BL20 E GW EN GV PLC PRG jj Modbus TCP Master data Ei s ModbusTCP Slave Modbus Slave Channel Modbus Slave Init ModbusTCPSlave Configuration Bl PLCLogic Channels E e Application run Variable Mapping Channel Address Type Current Value GVL 5 Application PLC_PRG Counter value 1 WORD fif Library Manager Bit 0 QX BOOL E PLc PRG PRG Biti 19X BOOL Task Configuration Bit2 369x622 BOOL MainTask Bit3 3 0X6 BOOL f Ethernet Ethernet v Bit4 X4 BOOL 6g Modbus_TCP_Master Modbus TO N b Bits X5 B
108. Ethernet Vendor 35 Smart Software Solutions GmbH Groups Ethernet Adapter Version 3 4 2 0 Model Number Description Ethernet Link Append selected device as last child of Device Don t save network path in project EM m J F Secure online mode B Pous S Devices D301173 0713 BL20 Ethernet multiprotocol gateway Current user nobody 7 9 Application example BL20 E GW EN for Modbus TCP CoDeSys Win V3 7 3 5 Adding the Modbus master A right click on the Ethernet master opens the context menu Select Add Device and add the Modbus TCP master to the network Figure 7 9 BLOEM Adding the Modbus master File Edit View Project Build Online Debug Tools Window Help DEGREE o BRB X K M4 Be ee Ei utes Add Device Communication Name Modbus_TCP_Master fj Device CoDeSys Control winv3 al Aore Select the ne nO Application Gateway 1 il Library Manager DOE E P c PRc PRG Fe G 5 B Task Configuration a e MainTask Name at fj Fieldbusses c EthernetIP Copy els Modbus Paste 7 wets Modbus TCP Master X Delete Modbus TCP Master 35 Smart Software Solutions GmbH pa Modbus TCP Master netX Hilscher Swiss GmbH gt Properties a A ModbusTCP Slave Device Add Object eee Action Append device Insert device Plug device Update device
109. F 60 15 lo of 256 The BootP DHCP Server sends the IP Address via BootP DHCP to the device and after a few seconds the stations answers with its new IP address when having stored it Figure 13 15 ig BOOTP DHCP Server 2 3 lek Set IP address Ey mis ms r Request History Clear History Add to Relation List 15 0 15 13 54 DHCP 00 07 46 FF 60 15 15 13 22 DHCP 00 07 46 FF 60 15 15 13 06 DHCP 00 07 46 FF 60 15 m Relation List New Delete Enable nare Eneble DHOR Disable BODTP DHEP Ethernet Address MAC IP Address Hostname Description 00 07 46 FF 60 15 DHCP 192168 1 50 gt Status Entries Sent 192 168 1 50 to Ethemet address 00 07 46 FF 60 15 1 of 256 Achtung The device looses it s IP address in case of a power reset if the BootP DHCP server is shut down D301173 0713 BL20 Ethernet multiprotocol gateway 13 23 Appendix 13 5 Ident codes the BL20 modules Each module is identified by the gateway using a unique identifier Table 13 7 Module ident code Module ident codes Digital input modules BL20 2DI 24VDC P 0x210020xx BL20 2DI 24VDC N 0x220020xx BL20 2DI 120 230VAC 0x230020xx BL20 4DI 24VDC P 0x410030xx BL20 4DI 24VDC N 0x420030xx BL20 4DI NAMUR 0x015640xx BL20 E 8DI 24VDC P 0x610040xx BL20 16DI 24VDC P 0x810050xx BL20 E 16DI 24VDC P 0x820050xx BL20 32DI 24VDC P
110. FADO LII 2 7 1 2 SOE E E A AU MEE dA AT MN 2 7 2 Network configuration P 3 7 3 Programming With CoDeSyS ccsccscsccssessssscscsecsesesescccsccsssescscccsccsssesesccesccsssesesccesccssccscsesescccsccssecseserens 4 7 3 1 Predefined feature sets sosta re RUE OR HARE KM RU UR EAD EUR EUER EHE RISUS ERU ERREUR EARS eth ERIS ntn 4 7 32 CHEATING iis elrojro p 5 7 3 3 Defining the communication settings eee tenente nnt tts ntes titt tits ntis notte nostis netos tiene ntt 7 erus rmi 7 Setting the communication path 7 3 4 Adding the Ethernet Adapter 7 3 5 Adding the Modbus master E 7 3 6 Adding a Modbus TCP Slave sessscsssssccsssssccssssecsssssccssscecssssecessssecsnssseesusceesnssecssseseessssesssssessucesussessnsescessssecsnsseeesueceesnsseeesaeeeesneeees 7 3 7 Programming example program eese testen tenentes nnne notte nont ts ttti notte nont tts notis tttt notis nonni Small example eT oT X 7 3 8 CoDeSys Global variables ient eae tenter epe i premium umn eq ve n gd rem inen enn em tes Global variable list 7 3 9 Modbus channels Modbus data mapping Setting the Modbus channels examples and data MaPPING sscscsssccsseccssecsss
111. I 4AI PT NI Table 3 41 Diagnostic byte Bit Diagnosis BL20 E 8AI U I 4AI PT NI A thresholds n 0 Measurement value range error OoR A value represen channel 0 tation ofthe ton 7 1 Wire break WB A module in man Jal D30071 channel 7 2 Short circuit SC A 3 Overflow underflow OUFL A 4to6 reserved 7 Hardware error 3 10 4 Digital output modules BL20 2DO 24VDC 0 5A P Table 3 42 Diagnostic byte Bit Diagnosis BL20 2DO 24VDC 0 5A P n 0 overcurrent short circuit channel 1 1 overcurrent short circuit channel 2 BL20 2DO 24VDC 0 5A N Table 3 43 Diagnostic byte Bit Diagnosis BL20 2DO 24VDC 0 5A N n 0 overcurrent short circuit channel 1 1 overcurrent short circuit channel 2 BL20 2DO 24VDC 2A P Table 3 44 Diagnostic byte Bit Diagnosis BL20 2DO 24VDC 2A P n 0 overcurrent short circuit channel 1 1 overcurrent short circuit channel 2 D301173 0713 BL20 Ethernet multiprotocol gateway 3 61 Properties gateway and I O modules BL20 4D0 24VDC 0 5A P Table 3 45 Diagnostic byte Bit Diagnosis BL20 4DO 24VDC 0 5A P n 0 overcurrent short circuit 1 ch min BL20 16DO 24VDC 0 5A P Table 3 46 Diagnosticbyte Bit Diagnosis BL20 16DO 24VDC 0 5A P n 0 Overcurrent short circuit channel 1 4 1 Overcurrent short circuit channel 5 8 2 Overcurrent short circuit channel 9 12 3 Overcurrent short circui
112. Industri A Status diagnosis The area status diagnosis comprises a maximum of 9 registers The first register contains a common gateway station status The following registers max 8 contain a group diagnostic bit for each I O module which shows whether a diagnostic message is pending for the relevant module or not Status diagnosis n 0x0000 n 0x0008 Gateway status group diagnosis l O modules 0 127 reg 100Ch register 0x1018 to Ox101F Packed output process data E output register area 0x0800 to OxO9FF 0x0800 Ox09FF intelligent modules Digital output modules free output data Note Independent of the I O configuration an access to all 512 registers is always possible Registers that are not used send 0 answering a read access write accesses are ignored D301173 0713 BL20 Ethernet multiprotocol gateway Implementation of Modbus TCP Data width of the I O modules in the modbus register area The following table shows the data width of the BL20 I O modules within the modbus register area and the type of data alignment Table 6 5 Module Process input Process output Alignment Data width of the I O modules digital inputs BL20 2DI x 2 Bit bit by bit BL20 4DI x 4 Bit bit by bit BL20 E 8DI x 8 Bit bit by bit BL20 16DI x 16 Bit bit by bit BL20 E 16DI x 16 Bit bit by bit BL20 32DI x 32 Bit bit by bit digital outputs BL20 2DO x 2
113. L20 4DI 24VDC P 4 Bit 3 BL20 2AI U 10 0 10VDC 4 Byte 4 BL20 2AI THERMO PI 4 Byte 5 BL20 2DO 24VDC 0 5A P 2 Bit 6 BL20 E 8DO 24VDC 0 5A P 8 Bit 9 2 D301173 0713 BL20 Ethernet multiprotocol gateway Application example 9 1 3 New project in the Simatic Manager 1 Create a new project in the Simatic Manager using the File New command 2 Adda Simatic station to the project using the Insert station command In this example a Simatic 300 station is used Figure 9 1 T SIMATIC Manager BL20 E GW EN C Program Files x86 Siemens Step Selecting H Bp File Edit PLC View Options Window Help Simatic station Do 2 Station gt 1 SIMATIC 400 Station Jy GS ESI Subnet gt 2 SIMATIC 300 Station Program 3 SIMATIC H Station CUN 7 4 SIMATIC PC Station S7 Block 5 Other Station M7 Software gt SAES 7 PG PC Symbol Table Text Library gt External Source The configuration of the PROFINET network is then done in the software s hardware configuration 9 1 4 Setting the PG PC interface In order to be able to build up communication between the PLC and your PG PC via Ethernet the respective interface network card of the PG PC has to be activated The configuration of the interface is done via the Set PG PC Interface command Open this dialog in the Simatic software for example via the Options Set PG PC Interface com mand o
114. M DHCP in order to enable the BootP DHCP Mode see also chapter 3 section Adressierung page 3 9 After having been connected to the network the BL20 sends DHCP requests to the server using its MAC ID Figure 13 13 DHCP request FJ BOOTP DHCP Server 2 3 Eile Tools Help 5 x of the device Add to Relation List Hostname themet Address MA 00 07 46 FF 50 15 m Relation List Enable BOOTE able BOOTP DHCP Enable DHEP Dis Ethemet Address MAC Type IP Address Hostname Description r Status Unable to service DHCP request from 00 07 46 FF 60 15 Entries D of 256 13 22 D301173 0713 BL20 Ethernet multiprotocol gateway Addressing via DHCP A double click on the request entry opens the New Entry dialog box in which an IP address can be assigned to the s MAC ID Figure 13 14 icixi Setting the IP Ele Tools Help r Request History address via Clear History Add to Relation List D H CP Type Ethernet Address MAC IP Address 15 13 54 DHCP 00 07 46 FF 60 15 15 13 22 DHCP D nz4RFFRIH 181306 DC E Ethemet Address MAC 00 07 46 FF 60 15 IP Address 192 168 1 50 r Relation List Hostname New Delete eret Description Ethemet Address MAC r Status Entries Unable to service DHCP request from 00 07 46 F
115. MATIC 300 1 Configuration BL20 E GW EN Add O oh Station Edit Insert PLC View Options Window Help al x modules tothe 452 8 WS mc dada EO Bn station Bix Add a station Ethemet 1 PROFINET O System 100 E Suchen anni Sour D turckige ii tuck pi Profile Standard vi B Additional Field Devices a CPU 315 2 PN DP p e vo TURCK BL20 T anme B BL2OE GW EN ERA analog input analog output E digital input E digital output BL20 16D0 24VDC 0 54 P J BL202D0 120 220VACOSA E lj BL202D0 24 DC 05A N lj BL202D0 24 DC 054 P m J BL202D0 24VDC 2A P p J BL202D0 R CO TT J BL202D0 R NC 4 cese J BL202D0 R NO Slot 9 Module Order number laddress Q address Diagnostic address Comment j BL20 32D0 24VDC 0 54 P S B d tack bite FEZO E x if BL20 4D0 24VDC 0 54 P J BL20 E 1600 24VDC 0 54 P f F BL20 8D0 24VD0 0 54 P E empty slot E power C technology 6827019 256 257 ig BL20E GW PN 6827020 258 261 FGEN 5827024 I Gateway 6827226 r mmi m3 1 0 m 6827226 nt TURCK 3 BL20 800 24VDC 0 54 P BSDMLV2 25 TURCK BL20 E GW EN 20121220 010100ml Press Fl to get Help Chg 1 Save your hardware configuration via Station gt Save and Compile 2 and download it to the PLC via PLC Download command The hardware configuration is completed Note If changes in the configuration of a node are m
116. OOL fj BL20_E_GW_EN Modbus TCPS Bit 6 1X BOOL Bit7 39x62 BOOL ry Bit 8 WQX BOOL Bit 9 Oxtt BOOL Bit 10 WQX BOOL Bit 11 2eQXt3 BOOL Bit 12 9X4 BOOL Bit 13 2e9Xi5 BOOL Bit 14 WQX BOOL Bit 15 2eQx 2 BOOL C m J IEC Objects Variable Mapping Type BL20_E_GW_EN_Insta o ModbusTCPSlave 5 Create new variable 7 Mapto existing variable 4 I fe POUs Devices zn ERE Program loaded Program unchanged Current user nobody 7 28 D301173 0713 BL20 Ethernet multiprotocol gateway Programming with CoDeSys 7 3 12 Diagnosis evaluation Evaluation of the Status word of the BL20 Station IW1 Register 0x0004 contains the Status word of the Station see Modbus data mapping page 7 16 According to the definition of the Modbus communication channel see Setting the Modbus channels examples and data mapping page 7 18 it is read from IW1 of the station image Figure 7 33 Status Word of the station 1 2 I O Belegung der Eingangsdaten File Edit View Project Build Online Debug Tools Window Help ia ele R3 MESE EAE Devices a X Ej StartPage jj BL20 E GW EN d GV E PLC PRG f S BL20 EMP m ModbusTCP Slave Modbus Slave Channel Modbus Slave Init ModbusTCPSlaveVCo EM PLCLogic Channels o Application run Variable Mapping Channel Address GVL Applica
117. PSlave r Create new variable Mapto existing variable 4 43 A Pous S Devices Current user nobody 7 22 D301173 0713 BL20 Ethernet multiprotocol gateway Programming with CoDeSys 3 Read Reading the station s Status Word Access Type Read Holding Registers function code 03 Read Register Offset 0x0004 see below The station s Status Word is read from register 0x0004 and displayed in amp IW1 in the ModbusTCPSlave I O Mapping Figure 7 23 Status Word mapping acc to Modbus report 2 2 I O map for input data P PR Figure 7 24 BL20 E MP project CoDeSys S S T Setting the Eie Edit View Project Build Onine Debug Tools Window Help Modbus chan SS A NEJ dh talala 3 LS OF s nel for reading StartPage ff Device jj BL20_E_GW_EN 2 PLC PRG GVL fj Modbus_TCP_Master X the status word Device CoDeSys Control win Modbus Slave Channel Modbus Slave Init ModbusTCPSiave Configuration ModbusTCPSiave 1 0 Mapping Status 1n B af PLC Logic Name Access Type Trigger REA Length WRITE Offset Application Counter value 1 Write Single Register Function Code 06 CYCLIC 16 0800 D ev xReset Read Holding Registers Function Code 03 CYCLIC 1650 1 fi Library Manager Status Read Holding Registers Function Code 03 CYCLIC 1620 1 Channel Name Status D Access T
118. Packet Interval RPI 10 0 C Maior Fault On Controller If Connection Fails while in Run Mode v Use Unicast Connection over EtherNet IP Sims 1 0 3200 0 ms 8 The station is now added to the project tree Figure 5 6 Project tree with stations g RSLogix 5000 BL2_E_GW_EN_MP 1769 L30ER 20 12 Controller Tags BL2 E GW EN MP controller A Eile Edit View Search Logic Communications Tools Window Help ae amp Bo Rem Run FD Run Mode No Forces b src attery No Edits W O 0K E J Controller BL2 E GW EN MP Controller Tags Controller Fault Handler Power Up Handler amp E3 Tasks 5 8 MainTask t Cg MainProgram Unscheduled Programs e Motion Groups Ungrouped Axes E Add On Instructions amp Data Types Cg User Defined Cy Strings Ga Add On Defined E E Predefined Cg Module Defined Trends amp 3 Yo Configuration c f 1769 Bus x 44 b VR QQ Feed Pan 48 ETH 11192 168 1 58 CompactBus 0 E x 9 4 1 i gt B lt gt WFavornes Lamon K An Kf Timer X Scope foBL2 E Gw EN v Show All Tags 8 4 Value Force Mask 6e fined AB ETHERNET Ce Hex SINT 400 BL20E GW EN MP pee NES AB ETHERNET BL20 E GW EN MP Data eee Decimal INT 5 BL20 E Gw EN MP I Data O 1 Decimal INT BL20 E Gw EN MP I Data 1 32767 Decimal INT BL20 E Gw EN MP l Data 2 2700 Decirnal INT
119. S10 PKZeRRS9 D301173 0713 BL20 Ethernet multiprotocol gateway 3 65 Properties gateway and I O modules The following table shows the meaning of the diagnostic bits Table 3 54 Designation Valu Meaning Meaning of the e diagnostic bits Byte 1 SWerr SWIRE MASTER If the physical structure of the SWIRE bus does not match the configuration stored in the BL20 E 1SWIRE this bit indicates an error 0 Dataexchange The physical structure of the SWIRE bus was accepted and the SWIRE bus is in operation 1 Offline The physical structure was not accepted the SWIRE bus does not start operation SW LED flashing RDY ree SPS SLAVE This bit indicates an error if the configuration stored in the BL20 E 1SWIRE does not match the SET configuration stored in the PLC 0 Data exchange No error present The SWIRE bus is ready for data exchange 1 Offline The configuration stored in the BL20 E 1SWIRE was not accepted The data exchange is prevented RDY LED flashing COM Communication SWIRE A communication error is present such as a slave is no longer reached its internal timeout has elapsed or communication is faulty The master cannot carry out data exchange with at least one slave 0 OK No error present 1 faulty An error is present Uswerr Voltage Us Voltage fault in U y voltage 17 VDC for supplying the SWIRE slaves 0 OK No error present 1 under volta
120. S_CMP2 and FLAG CMP2 always have a value based on the result of the comparison with the SSI encoder value CLR CMP1 Default status i e reset of FLAG CMP1 not active Reset of FLAG CMP1 active EN CMP1 Default status i e the data bits REL CMP1 STS CMP1 and FLAG CMP 1 always have the value 0 irrespective of the actual SSI encoder value Comparison active i e the data bits REL CMP1 STS_CMP1 and FLAG CMP1 always have a value based on the result of the comparison with the SSI encoder value STOP Request to read the SSI encoder cyclically Request to interrupt communication with the encoder 13 12 D301173 0713 BL20 Ethernet multiprotocol gateway Data image of the technology modules Industri A 13 1 3 SWIRE module SWIRE in Modbus In Modbus the process data of SWIRE modules are mapped to the data area for digital In and output modules not to the data area for intelligen modules see chapter 6 3 page 6 7 ff Process input data Byte Bit 7 Bit 6 Bit 5 Bit 4 Bit3 Bit 2 Bit 1 Bit 0 n 1 Data from modules to the left n SWIRE Slave 2 SWIRE Slave 1 SD2 PKZ ST2 SI2 SD1 PKZ ST1 SH n 1 SWIRE Slave 4 SWIRE Slave 3 SD4 PKZ ST4 Sl4 SD3 PKZ ST3 SIS n 2 SWIRE Slave 6 SWIRE Slave 5 SD6 PKZ ST6 SI6 SD5 PKZ ST5 SI5 n 3 SWIRE Slave 8 SWIRE Slave 7 SD8 PKZ ST8 SI8 SD7 PKZ ST7 SI7
121. Spec Vol 2 Rev 0x00000000 1 1 configuration BOOTP DHCP disabled and BOOTP OR stored config valid DHCP enabled Waiting for configuration Applying configuration Set_Attributes request received BOOTP DHCP response received Status 0x00000000 Configuration applied TCP IP network Change interface i interface configured configuration Status 0x00000001 D301173 0713 BL20 Ethernet multiprotocol gateway BOOTP DHCP disabled and stored config valid Implementation of EtherNet IP 4 2 6 Ethernet Link Object OxF6 The following description of the Ethernet Link Object is taken from the CIP specification Vol 2 Rev 1 1 by ODVA amp ControlNet International Ltd and adapted to BL20 Class Attributes Table 4 17 Attr No Attribute name Get Type Value Class Attributes Set 1 0x01 REVISION G UINT 1 2 0x02 MAX OBJECT INSTANCE G UINT 1 3 0x03 NUMBER OF INSTANCES G UINT 1 6 0x06 MAX CLASS IDENTIFIER G UINT 7 7 0x07 MAX INSTANCE ATTRIBUTE G UINT 6 Instance Attributes Table 4 18 Attr No Attribute name Get Type Description Instance attri Set butes 1 0x01 INTERFACE SPEED G UDINT Speed in megabits per second e g 10 100 1000 etc 2 0x02 INTERFACE FLAGS G DWORD see Table 4 19 Interface flags 3 0x03 PHYSICAL G ARRAYOF Contains the interface s MAC address ADDRESS USINT TURCK 00 07 46 x xx xx 6 0x06 IN
122. Synchronization of the station configuration eeeeee esee esee esten stent en sets testas tassa tosta senses sss sns 28 3 6 1 BPS enSuct X 28 3 7 Web server remote access configuration Version gt VN 03 00 3 7 1 IP address 3 7 2 Access rights 3 7 3 L gin PASS WONG e 3 7 4 Network Configuration sssarssa iet ttes termin E tive rere iustt ies nen MaMa noo Aes 3 7 5 Gateway Configuration 3 7 6 Sunc T 3 7 7 Ethernet Statistics 3 7 8 Mo ccn 3 7 9 Change Admin Password D301173 0713 BL20 Ethernet multiprotocol gateway 3 1 Properties gateway and I O modules 3 8 Status and Control Word of the BL20 stations eerie eere senten eene enn tn s etn sense en tasses sinas ta senses sensn ano 33 3 8 1 STATUS WOK M 33 Meaning of the status DSe ct RR RCRREN OR ERR RENTES qu PH WR RAT aces HU RUE 33 3 8 2 Control WOOL ps 33 3 9 Parameters of the I O modules essessesesoesesoesossesoesesoesoroesoesosoesosoesossosoesosoesoesosossoroesossosossosoesosoesosoesosossososee 34 3 9 1 Digital input modules det eR ER e E s USERS EE EEUU ERR GERMEN KATEA dee tiefe ire 34 3 9 2 Analog input ev eR L H 34 3 9 3 Analog output modules a tod taa dista
123. TERFACE 2 WORD Allows port wise changes of the Ethernet CONTROL settings 7 0x07 INTERFACE TYPE 10 Ox0A INTERFACE LABEL Table 4 19 Bits Name Definition Default value Interface flags 0 Link Status Indicates whether or not the Ethernet Depends on 802 3 communications interface is application connected to an active network 0 inactive link 1 active link 1 Half Full Duplex 0 half duplex Depends on 1 full duplex application If the Link Status flag is 0 the value of the Half Full Duplex flag is indeterminate D301173 0713 BL20 Ethernet multiprotocol gateway Classes and Instances of the EtherNet IP stations Industri A Table 4 19 Bits Name Definition Default value Interface flags 2to4 Negotiation Status Indicates the status of the automatic Depends on duplex negotiation auto negotiation application 0 Auto negotiation in progress 1 Auto negotiation and speed detection failed Using default values for speed and duplex 10Mbps half duplex 2 Auto negotiation failed but detected speed default half duplex Half duplex 3 Successfully negotiated speed and duplex 4 Auto negotiation not attempted Forced speed and duplex 5 Manual Setting 0 interface can activate changes to link 0 Requires Reset parameters auto negotiate duplex mode interface speed automatically 1 device requires a Reset service to be issued to its Identity Object in order to adapt the changes 6 Loc
124. Tags BL E GW EN MP controller M apping ofthe File Edit View Search Logic Communications Tools Window Help BL20 station alsa amp m e oll SSO RIS fte lew Je F ok WAT F va wi T INT Scope BL E Gw EN Show Show All amp Value Force Mask e Description BL20_E_GW_EN C coc 3 AB ETHERNET_ E BL20_E_GW_EN C Data eon Hex SINT 400 BL20 E Gw EN I coc AB ETHERNET_ BL20_E_GW_EN l Data e Decimal INTIS cH BL20 E Gw EN IL Data 0 Decimal INT j Status Word BL20_E_GW_EN Dataf1 Decimal INT Inputs slot 1 slot 2 BL20_E_GW_EN I Datal2 Decimal INT l Inputs slot 3 BL20_E_GW_EN 1 Data 3 Decimal INT __ Inputs slot 4 E lt gt BL20_E_GW_EN I Data 4 Decimal INT Inputs slot 4 BL20 E Gw EN O Cue Forced AB ETHERNET OG Decimal INT 2 H BL20 E Gw EN D Data D0 Decimal INT Control Word BL20 E Gw EN D Data 1 Decimal INT Outputs slot 5 slot 6 5 10 D301173 0713 BL20 Ethernet multiprotocol gateway Process data access 5 4 Process data access 5 4 1 Setting outputs Example In order to set outputs 0 and 1 at slot 5 ofthe station BL20 2DO 24VDC 0 5A P see example station bit 0 and bit 1 in data word 1 BL20 E GW EN l D
125. VDC P Slot 3 BL20 1Al U 10 0 10VDC 03 BL20 1AI U Term0D 16 bit Obit 10 0 10VDC Slot 4 BL20 2AI THERMO PI 04 BL20 2AI Term0E 32 bit Obit THERMO PI Slot 5 BL20 2D0 24VDC 0 5A P 05 BL20 2D0 Term F 0 bit 2 bit 24VDC 0 5A P Slot 6 BL20 E 8DO 24VDC 0 5A P O6 BL20 E 8DO Term0G 0 bit 8 bit 24VDC 0 5A P Local O data incl status control 5 Words 2 Words Total size for in out data rounded on full words 5 Words 2 Words In the PLC Configuration software the in and output size entries for the assembly instances may be depicted in words DATA INT or even in double words DATA DINT The l O ASSISTANT mapping results have thus to be converted into the respective data format PLC configuration Values for Assembly Instance 103 input data 5 Words Values for Assembly Instance 104 output data 2 Words Note If a module with a firmware lt 1 9 is used the variable Assembly Instances 103 and 104 are not supported In this case the Assembly Instances 101 and 102 have to be used The defined data width for each of these Instances is 128 words For detailed information about the status word please see online help The control word is mapped into the process data but has no function for the standard EtherNet IP gateways It can only be used in the EtherNet IP gateways with DeviceNet master see online help 1 2 O map for input data Word0 DA 15 0A 14 DA 13 04 12 0A 11 0A 10 DA OA OAT OA 0A 5 0A4 0A3 0A 2 0A 1 0A 0 Word
126. W asesir taata 3 3 EWpIRHnesunHrrge e 3 4 TAE e T E Top view BL20 E GW EN lt VN 03 00 sssssssscssssssssscsssccsssccssscecssecessecessccsssecsnsecsnsecssseessseessseesaesueessneessusessneessusecsnsessnseesssessnseesneeees Top view BL20 E GW EN 2 VN 03 00 ssssssssssscssesssssscssecsssccsssecssscessseecusecssuccessccessecessessnsecsnscsssscessseesascessneceascceseecsnseesnseesnesesaeets Block diagram sussicireinonainn i RE ERRE EER General technical data of a station ss Technical data for the push in tension clamp terminals ee EDL Ol ey fe c H Connection options at the gateway eese eere eee enses tense en tss tn tns staat assa ess ts sens sos sens toss enses senses snae 3 14 o WEOM SUPP te CR 3 14 Field bus connection via Ethernet switch ccssssssssscssssecsseecsssecssecsssccssesesseccssesesscessueessuecesneceseesssecsacecsuecsseseeseessneessneessneessnees 3 14 Semice interface ERE n 3 14 Address assignment S o ines noas 3 15 Default setting of the Gateway cssesccseesscsssscsnssscesssccssssecenssecesssseesnssecsnssecsssesesssseessssseessnseesenseeeesnseecensescesnseecsnsescenseesanseseens 3 15 Function Of DIP SWITCIES sinauran 3 16
127. _E_GW_EN_MP 0 Data Du Decimal INTI2 G Predefined BL20 E Gw EN MP 0 Data 0 0 Decimal INT amp amp Oy Module Defined BL20 E Gw EN MP D Data 1 4114 Decimal INT E Trends i 3 10 Configuration c B 1769 Bus 0 1769 L30ER BL20 E GW EN MP Bs Ethernet a 1769 L30ER BL20_E_GW_EN_MP 8 ETHERNET MODULE BL20 E GW EN MP Iw lt gt Monitor Tags KEdit Tags lis T E m The controller tags are divided into xxx C the station s mapped configuration data E xxx the station s mapped input data E xxx O the station s mapped output data D301173 0713 BL20 Ethernet multiprotocol gateway I O data mapping 5 3 l Odata mapping Each station is now accessible via the controller tags for viewing input data and or forcing outputs The data mapping depends on process data mappings of the configured FGEN modules see chapter 4 Assembly Object 0x04 Mapping of process data page 4 8 ff The detailed station data mapping can be found in the EtherNet IP report generated using the BLxx PACTware DTM Figure 5 11 1 EtherNet IP report TM EUN 1P 1 1 Station description report with data mapping Station address 192 168 1 112 Adr Slot Name TAG Descr Data Size In Data Size Out Slot 0 BL20 E GW EN gt VN 03 00 192 168 1 112 BL20 Term0A 16 bit 16 bit E GW EN gt VN 03 00 Slot 1 BL20 2DI 24VDC P 01 BL20 2DI Term0B 2bit Obit 24VDC P Slot 2 BL20 4DI 24VDC P 02 BL20 4DI Term0C 4 bit 0 bit 24
128. a 0x2000 8192 48193 408193 to to to to 408320 0x207F 8319 48320 D301173 0713 BL20 Ethernet multiprotocol gateway 6 9 Implementation of Modbus TCP Table 6 4 Description Hex Decimal 5 digit Modicon Mapping of BL20 E GW EN Modbus regis ters holding registers Disable protocol VN 03 00 and higher 0x1140 4416 44417 404417 Active protocol VN 03 00 and higher 0x1141 4417 44418 404418 service object response area 0x2080 8320 48321 408321 to to to to Ox20FF 8447 48448 408448 System voltage Usys mV 0x2400 9216 49217 409217 Load voltage UL mV 0x2401 9217 49218 409218 load current I A 0x2405 9221 49222 409222 no of entries in actual module list Ox27FE 10238 410239 no of entries in reference module list Ox27FF 10239 410240 Reference module list 0x2800 to 10240 410241 max 32 modules per station x 2 registers Ox283F to to for module ID 10303 410304 Actual module list 0x2A00 to 10752 to 410753 to max 32 modules per station x 2 registers Ox2A3F 10815 410816 for module ID Slot related address assignment Process data inputs max 32 modules per 0x8000 to station x 32 registers for module ID 0x8400 slot 1 0x8000 32768 432769 slot 2 0x8020 32800 432801 slot 3 0x8040 32832 432833 slot 32 0x83E0 33760 433761 Process data outputs max 32 modules per 0x9000 to station x 32 registers for module ID 0x9400 slot 1 0x9000 36
129. ade after the download of the configuration and the starting of the PLC PROFINET requires a reset fo the respective device This can be done following different ways Hardware reset F RESET at the gateway see also F Reset Reset to factory setting page 3 22 Software reset HW Config PLC Ethernet Edit Ethernet Node Browse select a node and execute the reset in the dialog box Edit Ethernet Node via Reset other PROFINET tool PST tool from Siemens etc D301173 0713 BL20 Ethernet multiprotocol gateway Application example BL20 E GW EN with PROFINET S7 9 1 8 Scanning the network for PROFINET nodes The Simatic hardware configuration offers the possibility to browse the PROFINET network using a broadcast command in order to find active PROFINET nodes The active nodes are identified via their MAC address 1 Open the respective dialog box by using PLC Ethernet Edit Ethernet Node Figure 9 13 Configure Ethernet node 9 12 B Station Edit Insert PLC Dee Bs T I View Options Window Help Download Upload Faulty Modules Operating Mode Clear Reset Set Time of Day Monitor Modify Update Firmware Ethernet PROFIBUS Save Service Data Download Module Identification Upload Module Identification to PG Module Information Save Device Name to Memory Card Ctri L
130. age in the event of a fault Inductive coupling Magnetic inductive couplings occur between two cables through which an electrical current is flowing The magnetic effect caused by the electrical currents induces an interference voltage Typical sources of interference are for example transformers motors parallel routed network and HF signal cables Intelligent modules Intelligent modules are modules with an internal memory able to transmit certain commands e g substitute values and others IP Abbreviation for Internet Protocol protocol for the packet oriented and connectionless transport of data packets from a transmitter to a receiver crossing different networks Lightning protection All measures taken to protect a system from damage due to overvoltages caused by lightning strike Low impedance connection Connection with a low AC impedance LSB Least Significant bit Mass All interconnected inactive components that do not take on a dangerous touch potential in the case of a fault Master Station in a bus system that controls the communication between the other stations Modbus TCP The Modbus protocol is part of the TCP IP protocol The communication is realized via function codes which are implemented into the data telegram Modbus TCP uses the Transmission Control Protocol TCP for the transmission of the Modbus user protocol in Ethernet TCP IP networks Module bus The module bus is the internal bus in a sta
131. al Hardware Fault 0 interface detects no local hardware 0 fault 1 a local hardware fault is detected Common Services Table 4 20 Service Code Class Instance Service name Common services 01 0x01 yes yes Get_Attribute_All 14 OxOE yes yes Get_Attribute_Single 76 0x4C no yes Enetlink Get and Clear D301173 0713 BL20 Ethernet multiprotocol gateway 4 15 Implementation of EtherNet IP 4 3 VSC Vendor Specific Classes In addition to supporting the above named CIP Standard Classes the BL20 stations support the vendor specific classes described in the following Description Gateway Class page 4 17 Contains data and settings concerning the fieldbus specific part of the BL20 stations Process Data Class page 4 20 Contains process data Table 4 21 Class Code Name E dee hex 100 64h 102 66h 126 1Ah Miscellaneous Parameters Class page 4 22 Describes the EtherNet IP Port properties 4 3 1 Class Instance of the VSCs Note The class instance attributes are the same for each Vendor Specific Class The class specific Object Instances and the corresponding attributes are explained in the paragraphs for the different VSC The general VSC class instance attributes are defined as follows Table 4 22 Attr No Attribute name Get Type Description Class instance dec Set hex 100 Class revision G UINT States the revision number of the class
132. allocation n automatic allocation the DHCP server assigns a permanent IP address to a client In dynamic allocation DHCP assigns an IP address to a client for a limited period of time After this time or until the client explicitly relinquishes the address the address can be re assigned n manual allocation a client s IP address is assigned by the network administrator and DHCP is used simply to convey the assigned address to the client PROFINET Please assure that in PROFINET applications the address assigned via a BootP server corresponds to the address which is assigned in the configuration tool D301173 0713 BL20 Ethernet multiprotocol gateway 3 19 Properties gateway and I O modules 3 5 6 Address setting via the mode BootP Address setting is carried out by a BootP server in the network after the start up of the gateway In order to activate the BootP mode the DIP switch MODE is set to ON the address switches 2 to 27 to address 2 see Table 3 7 Combinations of address switches Figure 3 9 Q1 BootP v Lig 20 o FE ul2 Q wA 22 W t EI 29 ia lt x p 28 a li MODE O CrGLEE off on Note The IP address as well as the default subnet mask assigned to the gateway by the BootP server are stored in the module s EEPROM If the gateway is subsequently switched to another address mode the settings IP address subnet mask etc
133. amp terminals is possible without any problems Figure 10 1 Example of a stationstructure with ECO gateway here for CANopen ECO and stan dard I O modules Note Next to the gateway only base modules with tension clamp terminals and ECO modules can be used Base modules with screw terminals can only be used if a power supply module BR or PF with screw terminals was set before 10 1 2 Complete planning The planning of a BL20 station should be thorough to avoid faults and increase operating reliability Attention Ifthere are more than two empty slots next to one another the communication is interrupted to all following BL20 modules The power to BL20 systems is supplied from a common external source This avoids the occurrence of potential compensating currents within the BL20 station 10 2 D301173 0713 BL20 Ethernet multiprotocol gateway Module arrangement Industri A 10 1 3 Maximum system extension The maximum number of modules connected to the gateway BL20 E GW EN depends on the following E The station extension may not exceed the maximum number of 32 modules E Die maximum number of 192 communications bytes which are transferred via the module bus from the gateway to the modules may not be exceeded see below Table 10 1 Communication bytes and nominal current consumption of the BL20 modules E If the maximum sum of the modules nominal current consumptions see below Table 10 1
134. and in small industrial areas residential business and trading In this case the operator can be required to take appropriate measures to suppress the disturbance at his own cost D301173 0713 BL20 Ethernet multiprotocol gateway 3 11 Properties gateway and I O modules 3 3 6 LED displays Every BL20 E GW EN displays the following statuses via LEDs E 2LEDsforthe module bus communication module bus LEDs GW and IOs lt VN 03 00 1 LEDs for the field bus communication MS VN 03 00 2 LEDs for the field bus communication ERR and BUS E 2LEDs for the status of the Ethernet connection at the Ethernet ports ETH1 ETH2 Table 3 5 LED Status Meaning Remedy LED displays GW OFF No power supply of the CPU Check the system power supply at the gateway green Firmware active gateway ready green Firmware not active If LED IOS red firmware download flashing necessary 1Hz green Firmware active gateway Replace the gateway flashing hardware error 4Hz red CPU not ready Vec too low Check the system power supply at the possible causes gateway and the cabling too many modules at the Unmount excessively mounted gateway modules short circuit in connected Replace the gateway if necessary module gateway hardware error red green WINK command active flashing 4 Hz lOs OFF No power supply of the CPU Check the system power supply at the gateway green The modules configured
135. at are network loci off a P Restore defaults m 7 Domain Advanced settings Networks at a workp Troubleshoot my network Windows Firewall std What are network locations Customize settings for each type of network You can modify the firewall settings for each type of network location that you use Domain network location settings 9 5 Turn on Windows Firewall i E Block all incoming connections including those in the list of allowed programs Active domain netwi V Notify me when Windows Firewall blocks a new program Incoming connectio Notification state o amp Turn off Windows Firewall not recommended Home or work private network location settings 7 Turn on Windows Firewall E Block all incoming connections including those in the list of allowed programs m 9 Home o m 9 Public n Networks in public pl V Notify me when Windows Firewall blocks a new program x Turn off Windows Firewall not recommended Public network location settings 9 Turn on Windows Firewall 7 Block all incoming connections including those in the list of allowed programs See also Windows Firewall st Action Center Incoming connectio Network and Sharing Center V Notify me when Windows Firewall blocks a new program o Turn off Windows Firewall not recommended D301173 0713 BL20 Ethernet multiprotocol gateway 13 19 Appendix Adapting the Windows firewall The firewall
136. ata 1 have to be set see above Figure 5 9 l O data mapping page 5 9 Figure 5 13 Setting outputs at BL20 2DO 24VDC 0 5A P J Scope fq BL_E_GW_EN_ v Show Show All _ Name amp Force Mask Style BL20 E Gw EN C gaan BL20_E_GW_EN I flood _ BL20_E_GW_EN 0 Forced BL20_E_GW_EN 0 Data e Decimal BL20 E Gw EN O Data 0 T Decimal mBL20 E Gw EN O Data 1 Data Type Description AB ETHERNET_ AB ETHERNET_ AB ETHERNET_ INT 2 INT Control Word INT Outputs slot 5 slot 6 ax Lae a gt V Monitor Tags Edit Tags D301173 0713 BL20 Ethernet multiprotocol gateway Application example BL20 E GW EN with EtherNet IP Allen Bradley 5 4 2 Example program Figure 5 14 Example program amp MainProgram MainRoutine Bax id Source A Counter 0 1 Source B Dest Counter Input 0 Slot 1 Outputs slot 5 xReset slot 6 BL20 E GW EN IData 1 0 MOY HE Move Source ountan Dest BL20_E_GW_EN O Data 1 0 Input 0 Slot 1 Outputs slot 5 xReset slot 6 lt BL20_E_GVV_EN Data 1 0 gt roy Move Source 0 Dest BL20_E_GVV_EN O Data 1 0 MainRoutine 1 The counter counts upwards 2 The counter value is mapped to the outputs of the two digital output modules in the station slot 5 and slot 6 5 12 D301173 0713
137. ault 27247 jec 6A6F 4 0x04 REVISION G STRUCT Revision of the item the Identity Object is OF representing Major Minor USINT 0x01 USINT 0x06 5 0x05 DEVICE STATUS G WORD seeTable 4 4 Device Status 6 0x06 SERIAL NUMBER G UDINT Contains the ident no of the product 3 last bytes of the MAC ID 7 0x07 PRODUCT NAME G STRUCT OF LENGTH NAME USINT STRING 13 4 4 D301173 0713 BL20 Ethernet multiprotocol gateway Classes and Instances of the EtherNet IP stations Device Status Industri A Table 4 4 Bit Name Definition Device Status Oto 1 reserved Default 0 2 Configured TRUE 1 The application of the device has been configured default settings 3 reserved Default 0 4to7 Extended Device 0011 no I O connection established Status 0110 At least one I O connection in run mode 0111 At least one I O connection established all in IDLE mode All other settings reserved 8to 15 reserved Default 0 Common Services Table 4 5 Service code Class Instance Service name Common ser 7 Vicus 01 0x01 yes yes Get Attribute All Returns a predefined list of the object s attributes 05 0x05 no yes Reset Starts the reset service for the device 14 OxOE yes yes Get Attribute Single Returns the contents of a specified attribute 16 0x10 no no Set Attribute Single Modifies a single attribute D301173 0713 BL20 Ethernet multiprotocol gateway 4 5 Imple
138. c Ethernet Module to configure the station Figure 5 2 a Select Module Type Add generic atalog Module Di Favorit Ethernet mod EPI ule Catalog Number Description Vendor Category E151 Flowserve 600Vac 81 OVde Reliance Electric DPI to EtherNet IP EtherNet IP SoftLogix5800 EtherNet IP Allen Bradley Communication ETHERNET BRIDGE Generic EtherNet IP CIP Bridge Allen Bradley Communication ETHERNET MODULE Generic Ethemet Module Allen Bradley Communication ETHERNET PANELVIEW EtherNet IP Panelview Allen Bradley HMI ILX34 4ENWG 1734 Wireless Ethernet Adapter Twisted Pair Media Prosoft Technol Communication IND560 Ethemet IP Scale Terminal Mettler Toledo Communication IND780 Ethemet IP Scale Terminal Mettler Toledo Communication In Sight 1700 Series Vision System Cognex Corporat Communication In Sight 3400 Series Vision System Cognex Corporat Communication In Sight 5000 Series Vision System Cognex Corporat Communication In Sight Micro Series Vision System Cognex Corporat Communication MDCOMM ENET MDCOMM ENET Reliance Electric MDI to EtherNet IP PowerFlex 4 Class Multi E Multi Drive via 22 COMM E Allen Bradley Drive PowerFlex 400 E AC Drive via 22 COMM E Allen Bradley Drive PowerFlex 400P E AC Drive via 22 COMM E Allen Bradley Drive PowerFlex 40 E AC Drive via 22 COMM E Allen Bradley Drive PowerFlex 40P E AC Drive via 22 COMM E Allen Bradley Drive PowerFlex 4 E AC Drive via 22 COMM E Allen Bradley
139. ccepted with the next telegram of process output data handshake for data transmission to the register A modification of the register contents by a process output was initiated which means REG WR 1 A write job would not be accepted with the next telegram of process output data SSI_STS3 These four bits transfer the status bits of the SSI encoder with the status messages of the SSI module With some SSI encoders the status bits are transferred together with the position value SSI_STS2 SSI STS1 SSI STSO STS UP LED UP The SSI encoder values are decremented or the values are constant The SSI encoder values are incremented STS DN LED DN The SSI encoder values are incremented or the values are constant The SSI encoder values are decremented REL CMP2 A comparison of the register contents has produced the following result REG SSI POS lt REG CMP2 A comparison of the register contents has produced the following result REG SSI POS gt REG CMP2 FLAG CMP2 Default status i e the register contents have not yet matched REG SSI POS REG CMP2 since the last reset The contents of the registers match REG SSI POS REG CMP2 This marker must be reset with CLR CMP1 1 in the process output data 13 8 D301173 0713 BL20 Ethernet multiprotocol gateway Data image of the technology modules Industri A Table 13 3 Designation Meaning
140. ces MEN StartPage iJ Device jj BL20 E GW EN s PLC PRG dj GVL jj Modbus TCP Master X S BL20 EMP sg Modbus Slave Channel Modbus Slave Init ModbusTCPSlave Configuration ModbusTCPSlave I O Mapping Etatus In gt A PLCLogic Channels Application Variable Mapping Channel Address Type Unit Description d cv b GJ Counter value 1 QWO WORD WRITE 1620800 i Library Manager amp PLC PRG PRG L B Task Configuration B 7l categories Items Variables a Name Type Origin 7 Q Application Application cv BAL a IoConfig Globals VAR GLOBA Insert with arguments Filter None Z 4 m EET fee Cox jJ em RE SE DS Show documentation Confirm with OK The counter value is now mirrored to QWO of the station and given out D301173 0713 BL20 Ethernet multiprotocol gateway 7 19 Application example BL20 E GW EN for Modbus TCP CoDeSys Win V3 2 Read Bit 0 in register 0x0003 has to be read out reset the counter with xReset 1 2 1 Read IWO Access Type Read Holding Registers function code 03 Read Register Offset 0x0003 see below Figure 7 20 Mapping of input data acc to Modbus report 7 20 2 Modbus report 2 1 Station description Station address 192 168 1 112 Adr Slot Name TAG Data Size In Data Size Out g BL20 E GW EN gt VN 03 00 192 168 1 112 BL
141. cess values is only shown in the process image if a program refers to them or if the function Always update variables in the MobusTCPSlave I O Mapping see Reading out the process data page 7 28 is enabled j Figure 7 12 BL20_E_MP project CoDeSys A Example pro File Edit View Project Build Online Debug Tools Window Help gram SrA LIC amp Bac X4 5517 7 fe P LE LE T 189 1 08 Devices ax B PLC_PRG X BL20 E MP 1 PROGRAM PLC PRG jg fj Device CoDeSys Control winv3 2 VAR E PLCLogic 3 3 amp 49 Application 4 counter INT 2 d ou 5 END VAR E ii Library Manager 1 amp E PLC PRG PRG ga amp Task Configuration amp MainTask i Ethernet Ethernet Modbus TCP Master Modbus TCP Mast BL20_E_GW_EN Modbus TCP Slave Y 4 m gt r 1 1 founter counter 1 2 IF xReset 1 THEN 3 counter 0 5 END IF a 4 m r Messages xI x P Pous S Devices Teco pie O OR Current user nobody INS Lni Coli Chi D301173 0713 BL20 Ethernet multiprotocol gateway 7 13 Application example BL20 E GW EN for Modbus TCP CoDeSys Win V3 7 3 8 CoDeSys Global variables Global variables are defined either in the Global Variable List see page 7 14 or directly in the I O Mappings of the single stations Figure 7 13 BL20 E MP project CoDeSys Foes Example for File Edit View Project Build Online Debug Tools Window Help the definition
142. ck com D301173 0713
143. ck diagram eese 3 7 parameters seeesssssssssseeeseeeeennene nnn n nnne nennt 8 10 gateway address assignment 3 15 8 2 jai 3 3 SLEDS p 3 12 PGMesmode i iiss BER AEs 3 21 service interface oo eeceecccssceeesseeeesseesseseessecseesseeseeees 3 14 techinical d t 5 eem eee ente 3 6 Gateway parameters sss 8 10 H handlitig reete n mme la s 2 2 Hardware 22455 necem aa eene ere aene pads 5 2 7 2 l inductive loads protective circuit 11 8 IP address PC emen 13 16 L lightning protection sssssseseenennenne 11 3 M maintenance sssssssssseseeeeeee enne enne 1 4 Modbus TCP mic E E E E E E 6 4 Module Application Instance sssssssss 8 15 module arrangement sse 10 2 module diagnostics channel specific 9 18 9 19 module order eseessssessseeeeee ener 10 2 mounting rail cocti peace 11 6 N Network configuration essen 5 1 o operation safe ikoride enaa 1 4 operation trouble free essen 1 4 outputs error behavior sese 6 23 P PE connection seessesssssseseeeeeeeenenen nenne 11 5 potential compensation sesssssssssseeees 11 8 potential compensation cable sssssse 11 8 potential groups sse 10 7 p
144. csnseecesssccsnseecssssscessseecsnssscensecsnseecenseeecsneescesneeesens 9 1 10 Online topology detection tete eennn tenente ttn ttti skeid tnos ttt tton ttt ttt notte nosti notionis 9 2 Diagnostics With Stepp 7 9 18 9 2 1 Diagnostic messages in the hardware configuration eerte nnt nnt tenni tienen tts nnntts 9 18 92 2 Diagnostic telegram with error code essent eee nnt nnn tte notte tonne ttts ntis nott nonet tts neto nonet 9 19 D301173 0713 BL20 Ethernet multiprotocol gateway 9 1 Application example BL20 E GW EN with PROFINET S7 9 1 Application example 9 1 1 General In order to configure the connection of a BL20 multi protocol gateway for PROFINET to a Siemens PLC S7 the software package SIMATIC Manager version 5 5 from Siemens is used 9 1 2 Example network Siemens PLC S7 CPU 315 2 PN DP 6ES7 315 2EH14 0ABO V3 2 device name pn io IP address 192 168 1 112 E FGEN IOM88 5001 device name turck fgen 107 IP address not assigned yet FGEN XSG16 5001 device name turck fgen 90 IP address not assigned yet BL20 E GW EN Gateway for connecting PROFINET to the BL20 example station see Table 9 1 Example station Device name not assigned yet IP address not assigned yet Table 9 1 Module Data width EAEE ARN Process input Process output GW BL20 E GW EN 1 BL20 2DI 24VDC P 2 Bit 2 B
145. csssecssccsscccsssccsssecssscessecessecsssccssccenscesuseesusecesceessccesneessnecessseesies Synchronization of the station configuration pl m aec Web server remote access configuration Version gt VN 03 00 cessere eere eere nere sete neenon snae 3 28 nrc H Access rights Login password Network Configuration Gateway Configuration Stati n DIA gmostlcs coot tee UR OP Ig a e teca dotis prctio doute biete Ethernet Statistics ra e tt SLAP RSEN e Roe eb Eee nete ea eed oe TERR eas Dec E TERR RRe eL EDI M Change Admin Password Status and Control Word of the BL20 stations 1 eee eese esset eere eee eene eene nes en esent en estne stesse ense ense teneo 3 32 StAtUs WOK secs 3 32 Control Wordissa M Easa teaa Tia aae tiig 3 32 Parameters of the I O modules c Lecce eese e eee eene eene senses ttn set ssos seseo osui soonest eevus ngeraos Sroa vesis esses 3 33 Digital input modules eR Een eR ERU e UR DAD RR ASA 3 33 Analog inp t modules eter ttt eet tiet t eere ede et e aeri etae otl eere age Le ce Reeve 3 33 Analog output modules scott etes n a AA E NAAR E te A AENEA tetendit 3 42 Technology Modules 3 47 Diagnostic messages of the modules
146. ctivate A060 10 1 4 BL20 2AI THERMO PI no PT1000 sensor cold j comp channel x 0 1 actvate A080 0 1 5 BL20 2DO 24VDC 0 5A P short circuit channel x D 1 actvate A080 1 1 5 BL20 2DO 24VDC 0 5A P short circuit channel x 0 1 activate Note Detailed information about the modbus registers of the BL20 stations can be found in the descriptions in chapter 6 3 D301173 0713 BL20 Ethernet multiprotocol gateway 7 17 Application example BL20 E GW EN for Modbus TCP CoDeSys Win V3 Setting the Modbus channels examples and data mapping 1 Writing of QWO and mapping of the counter value VAR Counter see PLC PRG page 7 13 to the output byte of the station QW0 1 1 Write 990WO Access Type Write Single Register function code 06 Write Register Offset 0x0800 see below The process output data of the station can be found in register 0x0800 Figure 7 17 Mapping of out put data acc to Modbus report 2 3 I O map for output data e 204 51 03 57 ee L E Ox0800 2048 06 07 0606 06 05 0604 06 03 0802 0601 0600 050 0500 Process output data 1 Word Figure 7 18 BL20 E MP project CoDeSys bobas Modbus chan Eile Edit View Project Build Online Debug Tools Window Help nel counter SS A EE d Cy gs OF value FC06 Devices vax StartPage j Device j BL20_E_GW_EN
147. ctrically operated devices Special EMC measures for special applications 11 3 2 Grounding of inactive metal components All inactive metal components for example switchgear cabinets switchgear cabinet doors supporting bars mounting plates tophat rails etc must be connected to one another over a large surface area and with a low impedance grounding This guarantees a standardized reference potential area for all control elements and reduces the influence of coupled disturbances E Inthe areas of screw connections the painted anodized or isolated metal components must be freed of the isolating layer Protect the points of contact against rust E Connect all free moving groundable components cabinet doors separate mounting plates etc by using short bonding straps to large surface areas E Avoid the use of aluminum components as its quick oxidizing properties make it unsuitable for grounding Warning The grounding must never including cases of error take on a dangerous touch potential For this reason always protect the ground potential with a protective cable 11 3 3 PEconnection A central connection must be established between ground and PE connection protective earth 11 3 4 Earth free operation Observe all relevant safety regulations when operating an earthfree system PE connection D301173 0713 BL20 Ethernet multiprotocol gateway 11 5 Guidelines for Electrical Installation 11 3 5 Mounting rails
148. d The configuration is currently deviating from the reference list of modules Process data can still be exchanged with the module bus stations which are at present connected to the module bus The constellation of the module bus station that is set in the configuration software of the corresponding controller serves as a reference Master configuration error Display Configuration error Parameterizing error at channel 1 The actual list of modules has been altered in such a manner that no process data can be exchanged with the module bus stations which are at present connected to the module bus Station configuration error Display Configuration error Parameterizing error at channel 0 The gateway could not prepare the station s configuration to be read out 22 behavior at communication loss Module bus error Communication with the module bus station on the module bus is not possible 8 4 D301173 0713 BL20 Ethernet multiprotocol gateway Diagnosis in PROFINET Industri A 8 4 2 Channel specific error codes of the I O modules The channel specific diagnostic messages of the I O modules using error codes are defined as follows Table 8 2 Value dec Diagnosis channel specific error codes Error codes 1 to 9 according to the standards 1 Short circuit 2 Under voltage 4 overload 5 over temperature 6 wire break 7 overshoot upper limit 8 unders
149. displays page 3 12 D301173 0713 BL20 Ethernet multiprotocol gateway 3 3 Properties gateway and I O modules 3 2 Supported l O modules Table 3 1 Module EtherNet IP Modbus TCP PROFINET Listofsupported modules Digital input modules BL20 2DI 24VDC P v v v BL20 2DI 24VDC N v v v BL20 2DI 120 230VAC v v Y BL20 4DI 24VDC P v v v BL20 4DI 24VDC N v v v BL20 4DI NAMUR v v v BL20 E 8DI 24VDC P v v v BL20 16DI 24VDC P v v v BL20 E 16DI 24VDC P v v v BL20 32DI 24VDC P v v v Analog input modules BL20 1AI I 0 4 20MA v v v BL20 2AI I 0 4 20MA v v v BL20 1AI U 10 0 10VDC v v Y BL20 2AI U 10 0 10VDC v v Y BL20 2AI PT NI 2 3 v v v BL20 2AI THERMO PI v v v BL20 2AI H Y BL20 4AI U I v v BL20 E 4AI TC Y BL20 E 8AI U I 4AI PT NI v Y Digital output modules BL20 2DO 24VDC 0 5A P Y v Y BL20 2DO 24VDC 0 5A N Y v 4 BL20 2DO 24VDC 2A P v v v BL20 2DO 120 230VAC 0 5A v Y Y BL20 4DO 24VDC 0 5A P Y v Y BL20 E 8DO 24VDC 0 5A P v v v BL20 16DO 24VDC 0 5A P Y v Y 3 4 D301173 0713 BL20 Ethernet multiprotocol gateway Supported I O modules Industri A Table 3 1 Module EtherNet IP Listofsupported modules Modbus TCP PROFINET BL20 E 16DO 24VDC 0 5A P BL20 32DO 24VDC 0 5A P Analog output modules BL20 1AO 1 0 4 20MA BL20 2A0 I 0 4 20MA BL20 2AO U 10 0 10VDC
150. ditar n G d topol ffli Detected topol nli Offline online Mad Siac comparison l Eiter Show all devices z 1 devices found m a Assign Apply Esport ptions D301173 0713 BL20 Ethernet multiprotocol gateway 9 17 Application example BL20 E GW EN with PROFINET S7 9 2 Diagnostics with Step 7 9 2 1 Diagnostic messages in the hardware configuration The BL20 gateways for PROFINET show gateway diagnostics and channel specific module diagnostics in the hardware configuration of the Step 7 software Furthermore a special help text which clearly specifies the error is given for each diagnostic message Figure 9 19 8 Module Information turck bI20 e sS m Ex Diagnostics Path BL20_E_GW_EN SIMATIC 300 1 CPU 315 Operating mode ofthe CPU lt gt RUN Status 8 Error A channel specifi a end p c Network Connection Statistics Identification module General 10 Device Diagnostics Communication Diagnostics Inteface diagnostics B fact 10 controller pnio manutacturer Manufacturers description Hans Turck GmbH amp Co KG Device ID 165 7001 specific help oe texts Standard diagnostics 3 E Diagnostic row High limit violated Cause Measured value exceeds measuring range limit value Remedy Tune module check sensor actuator 9 18 D301173 0713 BL20 Ethernet multiprotocol gateway Diagnostics with Step 7 9 2 2 Diagnostic teleg
151. dix 13 1 2 SSI module Process input data 13 6 The field input data is transferred from the connected field device to BL20 1SSI module The process input data is the data that is transferred by the BL20 1SSI module via a gateway to the PLC The transmission is realized in a 8 byte format which is structured as follows 4 bytes are used for representing the data that was read from the register with the address stated at REG RD ADR When necessary 1 byte represents the register address of the read data and an acknowledgement that the read operation was successful 1 byte can be used to transfer status messages of the SSI encoder This byte also contains an acknowledgement that the write operation to the register was successful and indication of an active write operation 1 byte contains the results of comparison operations with the SSI encoder value 1 byte contains messages concerning the communication status between the BL20 1SSI module and the SSI encoder as well as other results of comparison operations The following table describes the structure of the 8 x 8 bits of the process input data STS or ERR contains non retentive status information i e the bit concerned indicates the actual status FLAG describes a retentive flag that is set in the event of a particular event The bit concerned retains the value until it is reset D301173 0713 BL20 Ethernet multiprotocol gateway Data image of the technology modules
152. dministrator for the appropriate IP settings 7 Obtain an IP address automatically r Use the following IP address IP address 192 168 1 237 Subnet mask 2551 28 5 8255 0 Default gateway Obtain DNS server address automatically r Use the following DNS server addresses 34 Preferred DNS server s 2 Alternate DNS server D301173 0713 BL20 Ethernet multiprotocol gateway Changing the IP address of a PC network interface card Figure 13 6 Changing the IP gt Control Panel Network and Internet Network and Sharing Center z Search Control Panel 2 address in d Control Panel Home lag sx Windows 7 Change adapter settings gO li gt Control Panel Network and Internet Network Connections gt v 4 Search Network Connections p Change advanced sharing settings Organize v Disable this network device Diagnose this connection Rename this connection gt ol e IndustrialNet OfficeNet Unidentified network turck info AET Intel R PRO 1000 MT Network C Intel R PRO 1000 MT Network C IndustrialNet Status X oj baa IndustrialNet Properties Connection 9 General IPv4 Connectivi Connect using n You can get IP settings assigned automatically if your network supports IPv6 Connectivi AP Intel R PRO 100
153. ds In the PLC Configuration software the in and output size entries for the assembly instances may be depicted in words DATA INT or even in double words DATA DINT The l O ASSISTANT mapping results have thus to be converted into the respective data format PLC configuration Values for Assembly Instance 103 input data 5 Words Values for Assembly Instance 104 output data 2 Words Note If a module with a firmware 1 9 is used the variable Assembly Instances 103 and 104 are not supported In this case the Assembly Instances 101 and 102 have to be used The defined data width for each of these Instances is 128 words For detailed information about the status word please see online help The control word is mapped into the process data but has no function for the standard EtherNet IP gateways It can only be used in the EtherNet IP gateways with DeviceNet master see online help D301173 0713 BL20 Ethernet multiprotocol gateway 5 5 Application example BL20 E GW EN with EtherNet IP Allen Bradley 7 Inthe Connection tab set the Requested Packet Interval RPI to 10 ms which normally should be the default setting For BL20 the RPI should be set to 5 ms or higher Figure 5 5 Set connection options for the gateway I General Connection Module Info m Module Properties Report Local ETHERHET MODULE 1 1 C Inhibit Module Module Fault Status Offline Requested
154. e A060 8 1 4 BL20 2AI THERMO PI Measurement value range error channel x 0 1 activate A060 9 1 4 BL20 2AI THERMO PI Open circuit channel x 0 1 activate A060 10 1 4 BL20 2AI THERMO PI No PT1000 sens or cold j comp channel x 0 1 activate A080 0 1 5 BL20 2DO 24VDC 0 5A P Short circuit channel x 0 1 activate A080 1 1 5 BL20 2DO 24VDC 0 5A P Short circuit channel x 0 1 activate D301173 0713 BL20 Ethernet multiprotocol gateway 7 33 Application example BL20 E GW EN for Modbus TCP CoDeSys Win V3 7 34 D301173 0713 BL20 Ethernet multiprotocol gateway Industri A 8 Implementation of PROFINET 8 1 LP IEEREERTS DIMITTO 8 2 8 2 GSDMLL fFIle X 8 3 8 3 Default values qq 8 3 8 4 DIERDnPnn 8 4 8 4 1 ri cyAsiredso e 8 4 8 4 2 Channel specific error codes of the I O modules seessssscsssessssecssssccscccsscecsseccsuccesnecesseccssecesueesecesccesacecsueessneesseeesaseetse 8 5 Meaning of the error codes for the BL20 l O modules eese eterne nnne tette ntes no ittis nnnts 8 5 8 5 jn 8 5 1 Gateway PaVAMeters m Description of the gateway parameters 8 52 l O module parameters
155. e a safe and error free data transport Terminating resistance Resistor on both ends of a bus cable used to prevent interfering signal reflections and which provides bus cable matching Terminating resistors must always be the last component at the end of a bus segment To ground Connection of a conductive component with the grounding connection via a grounding installation Topology Geometrical structure of a network or the circuitry arrangement UDP Abbreviation for User Datagram Protocol UDP is an transport protocol for the connectionless data between Ethernet hosts Unidirectional Working in one direction D301173 0713 BL20 Ethernet multiprotocol gateway 15 Index A acyclic services sse 8 14 Address assignment sese 3 15 address assignment sse 8 2 auxiliary power supply eene 3 9 B Base modules sss 2 7 basic Concept sive iret HEURE EHE UE ORDRE 2 2 BL20 components seen 2 3 block diagram station sse 11 4 c Cable routing seen 11 2 cable shield eret tenere nes 11 7 classes Assembly Object sssssssseseeennns 4 6 Connection Manager Object ssssssess 4 9 Ethernet Link Object ennee 4 14 Ethernet IP standard sss 4 3 dentity Object sssssseeeeeneeennenns 4 4 process data oo ceeeceec
156. e get the Interface Configuration attribute first change the desired parameters then set the attribute The TCP IP Interface Object applies the new configuration upon completion of the Set service If the value of the Startup Configuration bits Configuration Control attribute is 0 the new configuration is stored in non volatile memory The device does not reply to the set service until the values are safely stored to non volatile memory An attempt to set any of the components of the Interface Configuration attribute to invalid values results in an error status code 0x09 returned from the Set service If initial configuration is obtained via BOOTP or DHCP the Interface Configuration attribute components are all 0 until the BOOTP or DHCP reply is received Upon receipt of the BOOTP or DHCP reply the Interface Configuration attribute shows the configuration obtained via BOOTP DHCP Host Name The Host Name attribute contains the device s host name The host name attribute is used when the device supports the DHCP DNS Update capability and has been configured to use DHCP upon start up The mechanism allows the DHCP client to transmit its host name to the DHCP server The DHCP server then updates the DNS records on behalf of the client D301173 0713 BL20 Ethernet multiprotocol gateway Classes and Instances of the EtherNet IP stations Figure 4 1 TCP IP object state diagram acc to CIP Status l Powerup Reset
157. e assembly size is pre calculated to support the stations I O configuration enabled diagnostics etc E input assembly instance 103 E output assembly instance 104 The effective size of the Assembly Instance can be determined using the Assembly Object instance 0x67 attribute 0x04 and can be from 2 to 496 bytes large D301173 0713 BL20 Ethernet multiprotocol gateway 4 7 Implementation of EtherNet IP Mapping of process data The process data image of the BL20 gateways is depicted in WORD format 16 bit The process data of successive modules of the same type with process data of less than 1 word are grouped together until 16 bits of process data is reached The process data is written in a new word when 16 bit input data is reached and further input modules follow 16 bit output data is reached and further output modules follow E An input module whose process data length cannot be completely incorporated in the preceding word follows on from another input module E An output module whose process data length cannot be completely incorporated in the precedingword follows on from another output module16 bit input data is reached and further input modules follow Table 4 9 Produced Data Input data Data mapping word no for BL20 E GW EN 0 Status Word of the gateway Mapping can be disabled using attr 138 in VSC100 object instance 2 page 4 17 1ton Input data of modules An example mapping can b
158. e auf Durchsuchen um nach einem nicht aufgelisteten Programm zu suchen um die Kommunikation mit dem Programm zuzulassen indem es zu der Ausnahmenliste hinzugef gt wird Programme Ql OfficeScan Client Ry OfficeScan Client deinstallieren OPC Configurator 1 00 f OPC Test Client QF OPC TestClient 1 61 e Outlook Express TERETWESGBS REED EPC wort 5 10 22 Q Pinball E Reset Activation 32 Bit 9 RoboHELP Classic Pfad C ProgrammeS PACT ware Consortium PACT lea ereich ander D301173 0713 BL20 Ethernet multiprotocol gateway Deactivating adapting the firewall in Windows Figure 13 11 Adapting the Firewall in Win dows 7 Control Panel Home Allow a program or feature through Windows Firewall 7 Restore defaults 7 Advanced settings Troubleshoot my network See also Action Center Network and Sharing Center Allow programs to communicat To add change or remove allowed progr What are the risks of allowing a program Allowed programs and features Name C HomeGroup LIiSCSI Service O Key Management Service C Media Center Extenders C Netlogon Service Network Discovery PACTware 4 1 O Performance Logs and Alerts Remote Assistance C Remote Desktop CO Remote Desktop RemoteFX O Remote Event Log Management _ Select the program you want to add or dick Browse to find one that is not listed and then dic
159. e found in chapter 5 I O data mapping page 5 9 n x Summarized diagnostic data page 4 2 of individual length 1 bit per module which sends diagnostics Can be enabled disabled using VSC102 Object instance 3 attr 104 page 4 20 ff x the no of following bytes depending on the no of slices within the station n y Scheduled diagnostic data page 4 2 Can be enabled disabled using VSC102 Object instance 3 attr 105 page 4 20 ff y data length for the scheduled diagnostics set according to the properties of the modules attached to the gateway Consumed Data Output data word no 0 Control word of the gateway The mapping can be disabled using attribute 139 GW CONTROL REGISTER in the Gateway Class VSC 100 object instance 2 see page 4 19 1 n Output data of modules An example mapping can be found in chapter 5 I O data mapping page 5 9 Note i The data mapping can be structured individually All parts except for the in and out put data of the station can be enabled disabled independently from each other 4 8 D301173 0713 BL20 Ethernet multiprotocol gateway Classes and Instances of the EtherNet IP stations Industri A 4 2 4 Connection Manager Object 0x06 This object is used for connection and connectionless communications including establishing connections across multiple subnets The following description of the Ethernet Link Object is taken from the CIP specificat
160. e module bus is supplied via the connections 11 and 21 on the base module If the power supply from the module bus is not guaranteed the software I O ASSISTANT 3 FDT DTM generates an error message if the user activates the DTM Additionalfunctions Verify station 10 6 D301173 0713 BL20 Ethernet multiprotocol gateway Power supply 10 2 3 Creating potential groups Power Feeding modules can be used to create potential groups The potential isolation of potential groups to the left of the respective power distribution modules is provided by the base modules Note FF The system can be supplied with power independent of the potential group formation When using a digital input module for 120 230 V AC it should be ensured that a potential group is created in conjunction with the Power Feeding module BL20 PF 120 230VAC D Attention It is not permitted to use modules with 24 V DC and 120 230 V AC field supply in a joint potential group 10 2 4 C rail cross connection The C rail runs through all base modules The C rail of the base modules for power distribution modules is mechanically separated thus potentially isolating the adjoining supply groups Access to the C rail is possible with the help of base modules with a C in their designation for example BL20 S4T SBCS The corresponding connection level is indicated on these modules by a thick black line The black line is continuous on all I O modules On powe
161. e read with the next response telegram E 4bytes are used for representing the data that is to be written to the register with the address specified at REG WR DATA Figure 13 4 Process output data of the SSI module REG WR ADR CLR CMP2 seme D301173 0713 BL20 Ethernet multiprotocol gateway 13 11 Appendix Meaning of the data bits process output Table 13 4 Designation Meaning of the data bits process output Value Description REG WR DATA 0 222 1 Value which has to be written to the register with the address REG WR ADR REG RD ADR Address ofthe register which has to be read If the reading was successful REG RD ABORT 0 the user data can be found in REG RD DATAin the status interface bytes 4 7 REG WR Default status i e there is no request to overwrite the content of the register with the address stated at REG WR ADR with REG WR DATA Bit REG WR AKN is reset 0 if necessary Request to overwrite the content of the register with address REG WR ADR with REG WR DATA REG WR ADR Address of the register which has to be written with REG WR DATA CLR CMP2 Default status i e no reset of FLAG CMP2 active Reset of FLAG CMP2 active EN CMP2 Default status i e the data bits REL CMP2 STS CMP2 and FLAG CMP2 always have the value 0 irrespective of the actual SSI encoder value Comparison active i e the data bits REL CMP2 ST
162. e the button to open the dialog box Input Assistant Select the variable to be mapped xReset can be found in the global variables as it has been defined there see CoDeSys Global variables D301173 0713 BL20 Ethernet multiprotocol gateway 7 21 Application example BL20 E GW EN for Modbus TCP CoDeSys Win V3 Confirm with OK A 1 at bit IX0 0 will now reset the counter to zero Figure 7 22 R Sse Mapping of Build Online Debug Tools Window Help xReset to bit SE A X IdA 55 1E I 3 18S 108 y alles gs 961X0 0 StartPage jj Device jj BL20 E GW EN E PLC PRG GV jj Modbus TCP Master x ModbusTCPSlave 1 O Mapping ine Channels Application Variable Mapping Channel Address Type Unit Desc d cv Application PLC PRG counter Counter value 1 Owe WORD WRITE i Library Manager 5 xReset Se TWO WORD READ PLC PRG PRG Task Configuration Biti X0 1 BOOL MainTask Bit2 amp DX0 2 BOOL J Ethernet Ethernet Bit3 X0 3 BOOL 1 Modbus TCP Master Bit4 1X0 4 BOOL F BL20_E_GW_EN Bit5 X0 5 BOOL Bit 6 IX0 6 BOOL Bit7 X0 7 BOOL Bit8 IX1 0 BOOL Bit9 IX1 1 BOOL Bit 10 IX1 2 BOOL pa Bit 11 X1 3 BOOL Bit 12 eDXi4 BOOL Bit 13 X1 5 BOOL m J Reset mapping Always update variables IEC Objects Variable Mapping Type BL20 E GW EN Insta ModbusTC
163. e to the fieldbus in to the module specific bits and bytes CPU Central Processing Unit Central unit for electronic data processing the processing core of the PC D DHCP Client Server protocol which reduces the effort of assigning IP addresses or other parameters Serves for dynamic and automatic configuration of devices Digital A value e g a voltage which can adopt only certain statuses within a finite set mostly defined as 0 and 1 DIN German acronym for German Industrial Standard E EIA Electronic Industries Association association of electrical companies in the United States Electrical components All objects that produce convert transmit distribute or utilize electrical power e g conductors cable machines control devices EMC Electromagnetic compatibility the ability of an electrical part to operate in a specific environment without fault and without exerting a negative influence on its environment 14 2 D301173 0713 BL20 Ethernet multiprotocol gateway Industri A EN German acronym for European Standard ESD Electrostatic Discharge Field power supply Voltage supply for devices in the field as well as the signal voltage Fieldbus Data network on sensor actuator level A fieldbus connects the equipment on the field level Characteristics of a fieldbus are a high transmission security and real time behavior Force Mode Software mode which enables the user to set his p
164. ececceceecceeceeeeecaeeeeeeteeeereeeeeetertaees 4 20 TCP IP Interface Object sse 4 10 VSC Vendor Specific Classes sessuss 4 16 CODES YS sisi n ain iar ects 7 2 communication path sss 7 8 communication settings esses 7 7 Ethernet master ccccececcescesceseeceeseeeeereereeeeeesereneaeeas 7 9 feature sets 7 4 Global variable list 7 14 Jocalhost drerit errore iret ene deor egh 7 7 Modbus TCP master 7 10 Net work configuration sseeee 7 3 i E R d a CE 7 13 C rail cross connection eene 10 7 D DHCP mode essere 13 22 DIAQMOSIS E 9 18 9 19 diagnosis esses enne 8 4 Diagnostic messages modules sss 3 56 DIVISION E 12 1 E earth free operation sss 11 5 electrical installation sss 11 2 electrostatic discharge sse 11 8 EM reote rains exe eet eR REDE TENA REESE EIE AE 11 5 End bracket 5 55 Regin iere Ene 2 8 End plate cccccccccecsscesccsecseessececssecseesseesesesessesseesesenees 2 8 CMON Ode MEE eieaa 9 19 error codes eru ry a 8 4 O modules sss 8 5 D301173 0713 BL20 Ethernet multiprotocol gateway Industri A F firmware download essent 10 11 iles 2 2 G Gateway blo
165. ecsnscessecesseecsseccsseccsscesseesueesneecsneeesees 18 7 3 10 Building login and StALE d 7 3 11 Reading out the process data testes nnt teens A 7 3 12 Diagnosis evaluat Oiicsssons ninnaa s dta EA M Mu NM uer dPIEE Evaluation of the Status word of the BL20 Station lW1 Evaluation of the group diagnosis Evaluation of the module diagnosis information eerte tenente tnnt tnenntteeennteen D301173 0713 BL20 Ethernet multiprotocol gateway 7 1 Application example BL20 E GW EN for Modbus TCP CoDeSys Win V3 7 1 Used hard software 7 1 1 Hardware BL20 E GW EN VN 03 00 IP address 192 168 1 16 BL20 2DI 24VDC P BL20 4DI 24VDC P BL20 1AI U 10 0 10VDC BL20 2AI THERMO PI BL20 2DO 24VDC 0 5A P BL20 E 8DO 24VDC 0 5A P 7 1 2 Software E CoDeSys 3 4 SP3 Patch 1 E PLC CoDeSys Control Win V3 3 4 3 10 7 2 D301173 0713 BL20 Ethernet multiprotocol gateway Network configuration Industri A 7 2 Network configuration BL20 stations are delivered in the address mode PGM DHCP and can be reached using IP address 192 168 1 254 Note Fr In order to build up the communication between the BL20 station and a PLC PC ora network interface card both devices have to be hosts in the same network To achieve this you have either E toadjustthe gateway s IP address via BootP DHCP etc for integrat
166. ee page 4 8 Bit 1 O Diag Warn 0 OK no diagnostics present at least one module sends diagnostics acc to VSC 100 Gateway Class Attr 116 page 4 17 Scheduled Diagnostics If scheduled diagnostics is activated Process Data Class VSC102 66h page 4 20 the manufacturer specific diagnostic bits are mapped into the station s process data page 4 2 ff The scheduled diagnostic data is placed at the end of the input data and after the summarized diagnostic data see page 4 8 The scheduled diagnostic data is a time sliced module related data block which holds diagnostic data of all modules with active diagnostics using a round robin mechanism This diagnostic window visualizes a specific module diagnostic data for approx 125 ms and changes over to the next active diagnostics afterwards This is done automatically by the gateway The data length for the scheduled diagnostics is set according to properties of the modules attached tothe gateway word Byte Data 0 0 slot no of the module which sends an emergency frame 1 Status process release bit 5 1 diagnostic active bit 6 1 wrong module bit 7 1 Module pulled acc to VSC 100 Gateway Class Attr 116 page 4 17 n Module diagnostics from the module actually referenced by the roundrobin mechanism D301173 0713 BL20 Ethernet multiprotocol gateway Classes and Instances of the EtherNet IP stations Industri A 4 2 Classes
167. eesssecssseesucessescsuscesseecsuscesascesseecsacecsnseesaseesnseesnses 6 13 Data width of the I O modules in the modbus register area eren tentent 6 14 6 3 2 Register Ox 100 Gateway StatUsss ccsscecievsrsccaneossstuocsesctsserssecsessssccnvedssusnvseintedsonsst secssestovedsuvecnss savesuistuctbosnoddeobsnnddesbsn aegeeste 6 16 6 3 3 Register 0x1130h Modbus Connection Mode cssccsessccsssseccssssccssseecsssseccsnseecssssscessseecsnsecessseecsnssesssecessseeesnseecsnanecesnesees 6 17 6 3 4 Register 0x1131 Modbus Connection TimeoOUt eese enne tenta tenente tetti ttenstttenoisetensitten 6 17 6 3 5 Register 0x113C and 0x113D Restore Modbus connection parameters eene nnn 6 17 6 3 6 Register Ox113E and 0x113F Save Modbus Connection Parameters ee esent teen tnnntnns 6 18 6 3 7 Register 0x1140 Disable protocol ssessccssssscssesscsssssccsssescssseecssssecesssecessssecssssscesssecesssecsnssecesuseeesnssecessnecesnsecsnsnecesseeeesnesees 6 3 8 Register 0x1141 Active protocol eee eee essen teret a ias 6 3 9 Register 0x2000 bis 0x207F The Service Object Indirect reading of registers Indirect writing of registers cessssssssscssssecsseecssscessecsssecssscesseesseecssscesscecsuecesuccesnecssseessscesssecsssessesecssseesaseesssceesneesseeeeseessssees 6 4 Bit areas mapping of input discrete and coil areas eee eee ee
168. en s teetottteno nitentes itttenn Register Ox1141 Active Protocol sesssssssscsssccsseccssccssnscessecessecessecssseccssccssseessscessscesssecssscessccnsccssscesssccsssecssseessseesssecssuceeseeceaeeesssees Register 0x2000 bis 0x207F The Service Object eee teeenn tenen tteennt tenete noinen ttes ttes ttenoisetenitttenn Bit areas mapping of input discrete and coil areas eee eere esee eerte eene eene seen estne etnaae 6 22 Error behavior of outputs watchdog cere eee Leere eene e eese eese restes tens tena snos etus tense ense esos tense anas 6 23 Application example BL20 E GW EN for Modbus TCP CoDeSys Win V3 Used hard sOftW l M IUES 7 2 FLATOW ANE c 7 2 Ken Li le e 7 2 Network Dir Tr eor M H 7 3 Programming uie m 7 4 Predefinedfeat re sets ase eei reda sen iiia ei tr peior Ri tuber TNI A ERE 7 4 Creating Ai MEW POISE case E 7 5 Defining the communication SETLINGS eeeccssesccssessceseesecsssceccssscecssseecesssccesnseecsnssscsssseecsnesccusecessescssnseecessesesunseecunseseesseescesseessuneds 7 7 Adding the Ethernet Adapter 000 ssssssssssssscssssscssssscesssscesussecssssscssssscessssessssseessssscesussesssssesesusscesssnscesuss
169. erated in switch position PGM or PGM DHCP mode Figure 3 16 Web server with Network Configuration 3 26 e 2 T http 1921681112 n JO BS X F Network Configuration th ke cE Datei Bearbeiten Ansicht Favoriten Extras BL20 E GW EN Embedded Website of BL20 Modular I O Module Network Configuration gt Home Network Configuration Network Settings Gateway Configuration Gateway Diagnostics IP Midreos 192 168 1 112 Ethernet Statistics Netmask Links 255 255 255 0 Change Admin Password Default Gateway 192 168 1 1 MAC Address 00 07 46 80 00 01 LLDP MAC Address 1 00 07 46 80 00 02 LLDP MAC Address 2 00 07 46 80 00 03 For comments or questions please email TURCK Support URL http www turck com Revision V1 0 0 0 D301173 0713 BL20 Ethernet multiprotocol gateway Address assignment 3 5 12 Addressing via IP Address Tool Use the TURCK IP Address Tool for simple and fast changes in the IP address of your device The software can be downloaded from www turck com in the Download area The IP Address Tool can be used to search devices change IP addresses E reset devices send WINK commands Figure 3 17 ee g 777 Turck IP Address Tool Vers 1 3 IP Address Tool m en Come Rea Ww m No Ethemet address IP address Netmask Gateway Mode Device Version 1 00 07 46 24 00 D3 192 168 1 15 255 255 255 0 192 168 1 15 VT250 57x L7 PNM 1 5 3 0 2 00 0
170. erates diagnostic information for the higher level master and the software tool I O ASSISTANT ECO gateways The BL20 ECO gateways enlarge the product portfolio of BL20 They offer an excellent cost performance ratio Further advantages of the gateways in the ECO housing E Atthe moment available for PROFIBUS DP DeviceNet CANopen Modbus TCP EtherNet IP EtherCAT and PROFINET Low required space width 34 mm 1 34 inch minimal space requirements E Can be combined with all existing standard modules with tension clamp connection technology and ECO modules Simple wiring with Push in tension clamp terminals via DeviceNet Open Style Connector or via Ethernet RJ45 connectors Automatic bit rate detection for PROFIBUS DP and DeviceNet Setting of fieldbus address and bus terminating resistor PROFIBUS DP DeviceNet CANopen via DIP switches E Service interface for commissioning with I O ASSISTANT 3 FDT DTM without PLC Figure 2 1 Gateway BL20 E GW EN D301173 0713 BL20 Ethernet multiprotocol gateway 2 3 BL20 philosophy Gateways with integrated power supply All standard gateways BL20 GWBR xxx as well as the BL20 gateways for DPV1 and Ethernet BL20 GW DPV1 BL20 GW EN BL20 GW EN IP BL20 GW EN PN BL20 PG EN and BL20 PG EN IP offer an integrated power supply unit for feeding the gateway and the connected I O modules It is not necessary to supply each individual module with a
171. ert PLC View Options Window Help x node Deit BS Rs ne HO Ww Bi x Suchen a a il Ethemet 1 PROFINET IO System 100 z Profle Standard PROFIBUS DP E PROFIBUS PA ES PROFINET I0 B Additional Field Devices E vo Egg TURCK 3 BL20 EC FGEN a FGEN IM16 4001 CPU 315 2 PN DP FGEN IM16 5001 g FGEN IOMB8 4001 FGEN 1OM88 5001 FGEN OM16 4001 FGEN OM16 5001 FGEN XSG16 4001 E G16 5001 E Gateway a HMI a va C Network Components Sensors C Switching devices I SIMATIC 300 a SIMATIC 400 SIMATIC PC Based Control 300 400 SIMATIC PC Station _laddress Qaddress Diagnostic address Comment Nol S jaw 3 5 z jean ee e 5825421 me TURCK E PROFINET IO Block module in IP67 24VDC 16ln and Outputs 24 8xM12 Press Fl to get Help 9 8 D301173 0713 BL20 Ethernet multiprotocol gateway Application example Adding a BL20 gateway and configuring the BL20 station Now the BL20 gateway is selected from the Hardware Catalog and added to the configuration E BL20 E GW EN Device name not assigned yet IP address not assigned yet 1 Select the gateway under PROFINET IO Additional Field Devices I O TURCK BL20 and add itto the Ethernet network Figure 9 10 Y X za Select BL20 l gateway
172. es are sequential 00 gt 01 gt 10 gt 11 gt 00 decimal 0 gt 1 gt 2 gt 3 gt 0 Errors in this sequence show the loss of data segments RX_BYTE_CNT 0 7 Number of the valid bytes in this data segment D301173 0713 BL20 Ethernet multiprotocol gateway 13 3 Appendix Process output data Process output data are data which are sent from the PLC via the gateway and the BLxx 1RSxxx module to a connected field device The data received from the PLC are loaded into the 64 bit transmit buffer in the BLxx 1RSxxx module The transmission is realized in a 8 byte format which is structured as follows 1control byte is required to ensure trouble free transmission of the data 1 byte contains signals to start the flushing of transmit and receive buffer E 6bytes are used to contain the user data Figure 13 2 Process output data of RSxxx modules err are ees era ere e ori 8 Controll byte caer Tn B emp Table 13 2 Designation Valu Description Meaning of the e data bits process output STATRES 0 1 This bit is set to reset the STAT bit in the process input data With the change from 1 to 0 the STAT bit is reset from 0 to 1 If this bit is 0 all changes in TX BYTE CNT TX CNT and RX CNT ACK are ignored The clearing of the receive and transmit buffer by RXBUF FLUSH TXBUF FLUSH is possible The value 1 or the transition from 0 to 1 disables the clearing of the receive and transmit
173. esssunecesansesessseeesunsessessesessneeeee 7 9 D301173 0713 BL20 Ethernet multiprotocol gateway iii 7 3 5 7 3 6 7 3 7 7 3 8 7 3 9 7 3 10 7 3 11 7 3 12 8 1 8 2 8 3 8 4 8 4 1 8 4 2 8 5 8 5 1 8 5 2 8 5 3 8 6 8 6 1 8 6 2 9 1 9 1 1 9 1 2 9 1 3 9 1 4 9 1 5 9 1 6 9 1 7 9 1 8 9 1 9 9 1 10 9 2 9 2 1 9 2 2 10 10 1 10 1 1 10 1 2 10 1 3 10 2 10 2 1 Adding the Modbus master teen Nikara tot toot notte iain Eaa iaiia Era 7 10 Addirig a Modbus TEF slave e t ctt tat epu ete euet tubus 7 11 Programming example program eere tenente tttsnnnte ennt notte tonta ttt tot tnos to ente not tonto tt not tnosoitttnns 7 13 CoDeSys Global variables Modbus channels Building login and start A Reading out the process data oe ssssssssssscssssscssssesssssssessssecssssecessssecssseeesusseessssessssssesssesssssessssnscesunsesssssesesunsesssssesesunseesneseeseneseees 7 28 Diagnosis evaluation i ettet quite ederet esti te steve tig ir TS HR edes stein 7 29 Implementation of PROFINET Address ASSIGNIMENE i205 cscsesceusicessesiscecdecteacessesasicad cR 8 2 GSDMIL e M M 8 3 Default values iiesict AA E EEA AEE A A 8 3 Diagnosis in PROFINET 8 4 Gateway Error codes acit e UR ARR ER de TEANA RE price tu AA AAE AAAA 8 4 Chan
174. eter 000100 voltage 10 10 VDC Extended Range ization of the second channel 000101 voltage 0 10 VDC Extended Range is ignored 000110 reserved 000111 reserved 001000 current 0 20 mA standard 001001 current 4 20 mA standard 001010 current 0 20 mA NE 43 001011 current 4 20 mA NE 43 001100 current 0 20 mA Extended Range 001101 current 4 20 mA Extended Range 001110 reserved 001111 reserved 010000 Pt 100 200 C 850 C 2 wire 010001 Pt 100 200 C 150 C 2 wire 010010 Pt 200 200 C 850 C 2 wire 010011 Pt 200 200 C 150 C 2 wire 010100 Pt 500 200 C 850 C 2 wire 010101 Pt 500 200 C 150 C 2 wire 010110 Pt 1000 200 C 850 C 2 wire 010111 Pt 1000 200 C 150 C 2 wire 011000 Pt 100 200 C 850 C 3 wire B 011001 Pt 100 200 C 150 C 3 wire B 011010 Pt 200 200 C 850 C 3 wire B 011011 Pt 200 200 C 150 C 3 wire B 011100 Pt 500 200 C 850 C 3 wire B 011101 Pt 500 200 C 150 C 3 wire B D301173 0713 BL20 Ethernet multiprotocol gateway 3 41 Properties gateway and I O modules Table 3 19 Byte Bit Parameter Value Meaning Module param name eters 0to7 0to5 Operation 011110 Pt 1000 200 C 850 C 3 wire B mode 011111 Pt 1000 200 C 150 C 3 wire B 100000 Ni 100 60 C 250
175. eters A default setting 1 0 1 value representation Kx 0 Integer 15 bit sign A channel 1 1 NE 43 2 Extended Range 6 7 Behavior on module bus error Ax 243 substitute value Ax channel 1 4to7 similar to byte 0 to 3 channel 2 8 HART Variable A Defines the channel of which the HART variable is read 0 channel mapping 0 channel 1 1 2 channel 2 647 variable mapping Defines which HART variable of the connected sensor is mapped into the module s process data 0 PV primary variable 1 SV 2nd variable 2 TV 3rd variable 3 QV 4th variable 9 HART Variable B Defines the channel of which the HART variable is read 0 channel mapping 0 channel 1 1 channel 2 647 variable mapping Defines which HART variable of the connected sensor is mapped into the module s process data 0 PV primary variable 1 SV 2nd variable 2 TV 3rd variable 3 QV 4th variable D301173 0713 BL20 Ethernet multiprotocol gateway 3 45 Properties gateway and I O modules Table 3 23 Byte Bit Parameter name Module param eters A default setting Value 10 HART variable C Defines the channel of which the HART variable is read 0 channel mapping 0 channel 1 1 2 channel 2 647 variable mapping Defines which HART variable of the connected sensor is mapped into the module s process data 0 PV primary variable 1 SV 2nd variable 2 TV 3rd var
176. g always starts with the mapping of the intelligent modules Each module occupies as many Modbus registers as necessary depending on it s data width At least one register is occupied A RS232 module for example occupies 4 consecutive registers 8 bytes in the input and in the output area The data byte arrangement is done according to the physical order in the station from the left to the right The data of the intelligent modules are followed by the data of the digital modules also structuredaccording to their physical appearance in the station The Modbus registers for the digital data are filled up to 16 bit This means on the one hand that one Modbus register can contain data of different digitalmodules and on the other hand that the data of one digital module can be distributed over multipleregisters Bit 0 of a digital module is thus not necessarily located on a word limit Note An example in chapter 7 page 7 16ff describes the data mapping Additionally the software I O ASSISTANT offers the possibility to create a mapping table for every station Packed input process data input register area 0x0000 to OxOTFF 0x0000 0x01FF intelligent modules digital status free input data Input modules diagnosis Note i Independent of the I O configuration an access to all 512 registers is always possible Registers that are not used send 0 D301173 0713 BL20 Ethernet multiprotocol gateway Modbus registers
177. ge An error is present GENERAL Error message The creation of a function block shows that systems function blocks for the general checking of a slave for any diagnostics messages present only check the first byte 0 none No diagnostics message present 1 present One several diagnostics messages present 3 66 D301173 0713 BL20 Ethernet multiprotocol gateway Diagnostic messages of the modules Industri A Table 3 54 Designation Valu Meaning Meaning of the e diagnostic bits Byte 2 SDepe Communication SWIRE slave If the parameter SD A is set for group diagnostics this bit indicates an error as soon as only one slave on the bus sets its SDepe 0 OK No error is present or diagnostics function has been deactivated via the parameter setting 1 faulty An error is present PKZ gn Overcurrent protective circuit breaker If the parameter PKZ p2A is set for group diagnostics this bit indicates an error as soon as only one PKZ of a slave has tripped 0 OK No PKZ error is present or diagnostics function has been deactivated via the parameter setting 1 Tripping At least one PKZ has tripped TYPege configuration If the TYP r parameter is set with group diagnostics in the parameter setting this bitindicates an error as soon as a PLC configuration check detects differing slave numbers types or position of an SWIRE slave 0 OK The PLC configuration check
178. he project tree opens the respective editors 3 Inthe Modbus TCP Slave tab set the nodes IP address in this example address 192 168 1 16 Figure 7 11 Setting the IP address at the slave All other settings can be kept yg Cpe mo Ss File Edit View Project Build Online Debug Tools Window Help ASR A EE AEZ gt 25 1E EAk Devices zax StartPage fj Device fj BL20_E_GW_EN X BL20 EMP fj Device CoDeSys Control Winv3 ModbusTCP Slave Modbus Slave Channel Modbus Slave Init ModbusTCPSlave Configuration ModbusTCPs 15 o tcp soph a MODBUS im Library Manager Slave IP Address 192 168 1 16 E PLc PR PRG Unit ID 1 247 Task Configuration i e MainTask Response Timeout ms 1000 Port 502 5 a Ethernet Ethernet fj Modbus TCP Master Modbus TCP Mi J BL20_E_GW_EN Modbus TCP sla m POUs Devices Current user nobody D301173 0713 BL20 Ethernet multiprotocol gateway Programming with CoDeSys 7 3 7 Programming example program The programming is done under PLC PRG in the project tree This example is programmed in Structured Text ST as defined under Creating a new project page 7 5 Small example program 1 Thecounter counts 2 Counter reset via setting the variable xReset BOOL to 1 xReset has been defined in the global variables see also page page 7 14 Note i The status of pro
179. he service object is used to execute one time or acyclic services It is an acknowledge service which may serve for example to parameterize an l O module 0x2000 0x2080 Ox20FF service request area service response area The service request area allows write access the service response area only read access service request area 0x2000 0x2001 0x2002 0x2003 0x2004 0x2005 0x207F Service reserved Service Index addr Data Reg optional data number Code Count 0 122 registers The register service no in the request area can contain a user defined value which is deleted after the execution of the service The register service code specifies which service is requested The register index addr is optional and the meaning depends on the particular service The register data reg count contains depending on the service the number 0 to 122 of the transferred or of the requested data registers Depending on the service the optional data area can contain additional parameters and or other data to be written Service response area 0x2080 0x2081 0x2082 0x2083 0x2084 0x2085 Ox20FF Service result Service Index Addr Data Reg optional data number Code Count 0 122 registers After the execution of a request the registers service no service code and index addr in the response area contain a copy of the values in the request area Note i The service no is thus used for a simple handshake on
180. hoot lower limit 9 error Error codes 16 to 28 manufacturer specific 16 Parametrization error configuration error After a validity check the parameter data are partially rejected by the module Check the context of parameters Check the context of parameters 21 hardware failure The module detected a hardware failure Exchange the module 22 behavior at communication loss The module detected a communication problem at its ports e g RS232 485 422 SSI or other interface Check the connection or the function of the attached devices 23 Direction error The direction is detected to be wrong Check the parameterization or the control interface versus use case 24 User software error The module detected an user application software error Cold junction compensa tion error Re initialize user the application software of the module 25 Cold junction compensation error The module detected a defect or missing cold junction compensation 26 Overload sensor supply The module detected a load dump at the sensor supply 28 Common error The module detected an error Refer to the I O module manuals for a more detailed description of possible errors Error types can depend on the operation mode and the parameterization Meaning of the error codes for the BL20 I O modules The gateway changes the diagnostic messages sent by the BL20 I O modules to PROFINET error codes D301173 0713 BL20 Ethernet multip
181. hould be kept as small as possible 11 5 1 Switching inductive loads In the case of inductive loads a protective circuit on the load is recommended 11 5 2 Protection against Electrostatic Discharge ESD Attention Electronic modules and base modules are at risk from electrostatic discharge when disassembled Avoid touching the bus connections with bare fingers as this can lead to ESD damage 11 8 D301173 0713 BL20 Ethernet multiprotocol gateway 12 BL20 Approvals for Zone 2 Division 2 Note i The Zone 2 approval certificates for BL20 can be found in a separate manual for approvals D301255 under www turck de D301173 0713 BL20 Ethernet multiprotocol gateway 12 1 BL20 Approvals for Zone 2 Division 2 12 2 D301173 0713 BL20 Ethernet multiprotocol gateway Industri A 13 Appendix 13 1 Data image of the technology modules ccccsscscccssscccsccsccescesccsesesccnccesessccsscsscesecssccnecsseseneeseeees 13 2 13 1 1 TRS232 Der eun 13 2 Process input datassa D Process output data 13 1 2 SSI module Process input data Process OUtpUtata cene nme mimi iere erreur mee ertt tee RON Herb NEQU Ue CENE cusses ERU EEr EaR RE 13 1 3 ibimus mee Ebishseirt Process IMPUt data E Process output data 13 1 4 Encoder PWM mod
182. iable 3 QV 4th variable 11 HART variable D Defines the channel of which the HART variable is read 0 channel mapping 0 channel 1 1 channel 2 647 variable mapping Defines which HART variable of the connected sensor is mapped into the module s process data 0 PV primary variable 1 SV 2nd variable 2 TV 3rd variable 3 QV 4th variable E BL20 E 4AO U l 3 byte parameters per channel Table 3 24 Byte Bit Parameter name Value Meaning Module param eters A default 0 3 6 9 Oto3 Operation mode 000000 voltage 10 10 V DC Standard A setting Kx 000001 voltage 10 VDC standard 000010 voltage 10 10 VDC NE 43 000011 voltage 0 10 VDC NE 43 000100 voltage 10 10 VDC Extended Range 000101 voltage 0 10 VDC Extended Range 000110 reserved 3 46 D301173 0713 BL20 Ethernet multiprotocol gateway Parameters of the I O modules Industri A Table 3 24 Byte Bit Parameter name Value Meaning Module param eters 000111 reserved 001000 current 0 20 mA standard 001001 current 4 20 mA standard 001010 current 0 20 mA NE 43 001011 current 4 20 mA NE 43 001100 current 0 20 mA Extended Range 001101 current 4 20 mA Extended Range 001110 reserved 001111 deactivated 4 value 0 Integer 15 bit sign A representation Kx NES 12 bit left j
183. ide of the position value supplied by the SSI encoder INVALID BITS MSB INVALID BITS LSB must always be less than SSI FRAME LEN Default 0 Ohex reserved A default 2 3to0 setting Data rate 0000 1000000 bps 0001 500000 bps A 0010 250000 bps 0011 125000 bps 0100 100000 bps 0101 83000 bps 0110 71000 bps 0111 62500 bps reserved 7to4 reserved 3 5to0 Number of data frame bits 00000 to 100000 Number of bits of the SSI data frame SSI FRAME LEN must always be greater than INVALID BITS Default 25 19hex reserved Data type binary coded A SSI encoder sends data in binary code GRAY coded SSI encoder sends data in GRAY code 3 52 D301173 0713 BL20 Ethernet multiprotocol gateway Parameters of the I O modules Industri A BL20 E 1SWIRE Bit 7 Bit6 Bit5 Bit 4 Bit 3 Bit 2 Bit 1 Bit 0 Byte 1 reserved free free MC MNA configura Disable Cfg free tion Byte 2 free Upuxerr TYPerr TYP Nro PKZerr PKZwro SDerr SDinro Byte 3 reserved Byte 4 reserved life guarding time until version VN 01 03 Byte 5 SCpagS8 SCpagS7 SCp4gS6 SCpagS5 SCpagS4 SCpagS3 SCp4gS2 SCpagS1 Byte 6 SCp4G916 SOp4c915 SCoagS14 SOp4c913 SCopgS12 SCpacS11 SOp4 S10 SCo4GS9 Byte 7 reserved Byte 8 reserved Byte 9 Type designation slave 1 16 24 The following table shows the
184. ing it into your own network for detailed information about the different possibilities for address setting please read chapter 3 5 Address assignment page 3 15 or E to change the IP address of the used PC or network interface card for detailed information please read the Changing the IP address of a PC network interface card page 13 16 D301173 0713 BL20 Ethernet multiprotocol gateway 7 3 Application example BL20 E GW EN for Modbus TCP CoDeSys Win V3 7 3 Programming with CoDeSys Open CoDeSys via Start gt All programs 3S CoDeSys CoDeSys CoDeSys V 3 4 7 3 1 Predefined feature sets In this example CoDeSys is run with the Professional feature set not with the Standard feature set This setting has influence on different CoDeSys functions and can be changed via Tools Options in the Features under Predefined feature sets For further information concerning this topic please read the CoDeSys online help Figure 7 1 voce 1 0 1 1 1 1 1 il Predefined fea CoDesy ture sets File Edit View Project Build Online Debug Tools Window Help ima EIE lo c X BAX IM PIERII TIBI C wiles ts eS 8 CFC Editor CoDesys 2 3 converter Declaration editor Device editor Please select a feature set that best fits your needs Standard Description Recommended for the majority of users Some rarely used features are switched off and the user interface is ada
185. ion Vol 2 Rev 2 1 by ODVA amp ControlNet International Ltd and adapted to BL20 Common Services Table 4 10 Service code Class Instance Service name Common ser vices 84 0x54 no yes FWD OPEN CMD Opens a connection 78 Ox4E no yes FWD CLOSE CMD Closes a connection 82 0x52 no yes UNCONNECTED SEND CMD D301173 0713 BL20 Ethernet multiprotocol gateway 4 9 Implementation of EtherNet IP 4 2 5 TCP IP Interface Object OxF5 The following description of the Ethernet Link Object is taken from the CIP specification Vol 2 Rev 1 1 by ODVA amp ControlNet International Ltd and adapted to BL20 Class Attributes Table 4 11 Attr No Attribute name Get Type Value Class Attributes Set 1 0x01 REVISION G UINT 1 2 0x02 MAX OBJECT INSTANCE G UINT 1 3 0x03 NUMBER OF INSTANCES G UINT 1 6 0x06 MAX CLASS IDENTIFIER G UINT 7 7 0x07 MAX INSTANCE ATTRIBUTE G UINT 6 Object instance 1 instance attribute Table 4 12 Attr No Attribute name Get Type Description Instance attri Set butes object instance 1 1 0x01 STATUS G DWORD Interface status see page 4 11 Table 4 14 Interface Status 2 0x02 CONFIGURATION G DWORD Interface Capability Flag see page 4 11 Table CAPABILITY 4 15 Configuration Capability 3 0x03 CONFIGURATION G S DWORD Interface Control Flag see page 4 12 Table 4 CONTROL 16 Configuration Control
186. k OK Programs b Create a System Repair Disc e Internet Explorer internet Explorer 64 bit Microsoft Security Essentials w Microsoft ight windows DVD Maker Windows Fax and Scan windows Live Mail Windows Live Mesh 4 Windows Live Messenger X Path C Program Files x86 PACTware Consortium What are the risks of unblocking a program You can choose which network location types to add this program to D301173 0713 BL20 Ethernet multiprotocol gateway 13 21 Appendix 13 4 Addressing via DHCP In this application example the IP address is set via DHCP using the software tool BootP DHCP Server version 2 3 2 0 from Rockwell Automation Figure 13 12 Ea BOOTP DHCP Server 23 BootP Server File Tools Help r Request History Agi x from Rockwell Automation Add to Relation List Ethernet Address MAC BOOTP DHCP Server Version 2 3 2 0 p Relation List m New Delete En About BOOTP DHCP Server E Copyright 2003 Rockwell Automation Inc EthemetAddress MAC T Type PAddess Hosmame Descnpton ix mem Entries D of 256 Addresses in the range from 1 to 254 can be allocated The addresses 0 and 255 are reserved for broadcast messages in the subnet Hinweis The rotary coding switches on the gateway must be set to 300 BootP 400 DHCP or 600 PG
187. lant to a required state by forcing certain variables on the input and output modules GND Abbreviation of ground potential 0 Ground Expression used in electrical engineering to describe an area whose electrical potential is equal to zero at any given point In neutral grounding devices the potential is not necessarily zero and one speaks of the ground reference Ground connection One or more components that have a good and direct contact to earth Ground reference Potential of ground in a neutral grounding device Unlike earth whose potential is always zero it may have a potential other than zero Hexadecimal System of representing numbers in base 16 with the digits 0 9 and further with the letters A B C D E and F Hysteresis A sensor can get caught up at a certain point and then waver at this position This condition results in the counter content fluctuating around a given value Should a reference value be within this fluctuating range then the relevant output would be turned on and off in rhythm with the fluctuating signal 1 0 Input output Impedance Total effective resistance that a component or circuit has for an alternating current at a specific frequency D301173 0713 BL20 Ethernet multiprotocol gateway 14 3 Glossary 14 4 Inactive metal components Conductive components that cannot be touched and are electrically isolated from active metal components by insulation but can adopt volt
188. lel routed cables Cable routing inside and outside of cabinets To ensure EMC compatible cable routing the cables should be grouped as follows Various types of cables within the groups can be routed together in bundles or in cable ducts Group 1 shielded bus and data cables shielded analog cables unshielded cables for DC voltage x 60 V unshielded cables for AC voltage lt 25 V Group 2 unshielded cables for DC voltage gt 60 V and lt 400V unshielded cables for AC voltage 25 V and lt 400 V Group 3 unshielded cables for DC and AC voltages 400 V The following group combination can be routed only in separate bundles or separate cable ducts no minimum distance apart Group 1 Group 2 The group combinations Group 1 Group 3 and Group 2 Group 3 must be routed in separate cable ducts with a minimum distance of 10 cm apart This is equally valid for inside buildings as well as for inside and outside of switchgear cabinets D301173 0713 BL20 Ethernet multiprotocol gateway General notes Industri A Cable routing outside buildings Outside of buildings cables should be routed in closed where possible cage type cable ducts made of metal The cable duct joints must be electrically connected and the cable ducts must be earthed Danger A Observe all valid guidelines concerning internal and external lightning protection and grounding specifications when routing cables outside of buildings
189. les can be wired directly In this case base modules without C rail connections should be chosen to guarantee the potential isolation to the adjoining modules D301173 0713 BL20 Ethernet multiprotocol gateway 10 9 Guidelines for station planning 10 3 Protecting the service interface on the gateway During operation the label protecting the service interface and the DIP switches must remain in place due to EMC and ESD requirements 10 4 Plugging and pulling electronics modules BL20 enables the pulling and plugging of electronics modules without having to disconnect the field wiring The BL20 station remains in operation if an electronics module is pulled The voltage and current supplies as well as the protective earth connections are not interrupted Attention If the field and system supplies remain connected when electronics modules are plugged or pulled short interruptions to the module bus communications can occur in the BL20 station This can lead to undefined statuses of individual inputs and outputs of different modules 10 5 Extending an existing station Attention Please note that extensions to the station mounting further modules should be carried out only when the station is in a voltage free state 10 10 D301173 0713 BL20 Ethernet multiprotocol gateway Firmware download Industri A 10 6 Firmware download The firmware download to BL20 E GW EN VN 03 00 using the software I O ASSISTANT 3 FDT
190. ll terminate this process D301173 0713 BL20 Ethernet multiprotocol gateway Web server remote access configuration Version gt VN 03 00 3 7 Webserver remote access configuration Version gt VN 03 00 3 7 1 IPaddress Open the web server by entering the device s IP address in your web browser IF no IP address is assigned to the device DHCP BootP server etc then the web server can be opened using the default IP address 192 168 1 254 3 7 2 Access rights Without administrator rights data as general product data and diagnosis data are read only In order to achieve administrator rights please log on to the web server see Login password page 3 29 Figure 3 19 Web server of the BL20 station hc OJT ntp 1921681312 O 8 c X F Home Datei Bearbeiten Ansicht Favoriten Extras BL20 E GW EN Home gt Home Embedded Website of BL20 Modular I O Module LLDP MAC Address 1 LLDP MAC Address 2 00 07 46 80 00 01 00 07 46 80 00 02 00 07 46 80 00 03 EtherNet IP Status Network topology Linear DLR State Normal QuickConnect Disabled D301173 0713 BL20 Ethernet multiprotocol gateway Gateway Diagnostics Gateway Information Ethernet Statistics Type ns BL20 E GW EN Identificaton Number 6827329 Firmware Revision V2 12 11 5 Bootloader Revision V7 1 0 0 EtherNet IP Revision V2 4 0 0 PROFINET Revision V1 1 0 0 Modbus TCP Revision V1 2 0
191. ller Set active path x Applications Files Log PLC settings PLC shell Users and Groups Access Ric Select the network path to the controller Gateway 1 0000 0703 Debug Tools Window Help ie SB Device Select the network path to the controller Gateway 1 0000 0703 gp Gateway SCHEUERNBW 7 0000 0703 active D301173 0713 BL20 Ethernet multiprotocol gateway Programming with CoDeSys 7 3 4 Adding the Ethernet Adapter Open again the context menu by right clicking the Device entry In the dialog Add Device select the 3S Ethernet Adapter under fieldbusses Ethernet Adapter and add it to the project tree Figure 7 8 Adding the Ethernet Adapter as device S49 BL20 EMP fj Device CoDeSys Control win S PLCLogic Application i Library Manager 8 PLc PRc PRG LI Task Configuration MainTask Awe EI amp o EH Xd Be StartPag File Edit View Project Build Online Debug Tools Window Help Name Ethernet Action Copy Appenddevice Insert device Plug device Update device Device Vendor lt All vendors Name Vendor can CANbus ga EtherCAT S Ethernet Adapter H Ethernet 35 Smart Software Solutions GmbH EthernetIP Information J Wame
192. m name eters Byte 1 MNA Configuration check active Bus or slave oriented configuration check without function if MC 1 assive P O Busbased Ifthe PLC configuration check is activated data exchange is only A started if the configuration stored in the BL20 E 1SWIRE fully matches the SET configuration stored in the PLC Modifying the bus during operation causes the system to be aborted 1 Slave If the PLC configuration check is activated data exchange is started based with all SWIRE slaves that match the SET configuration stored in the PLC The SWIRE slaves that do not match the SET configuration stored in the PLC do not perform any data exchange MC Moeller conformance from version VN 01 04 Behavior of the BL20 E 1SWIRE in accordance with SWIRE Conformance criteria inactive A Default behavior active The BL20 E 1SWIRE master responds according to the Moeller SWIRE Conformance criteria see manual for the IO modules D300717 SDinco Slave error field Activate slave diagnostics info field SD p25x As soon as a slave on the bus clears its PKZ bit this is indicated as an individual error depending on the parameter setting active Single diagnostics is activated inactive Single diagnostics is not activated Byte 2 SDerr Group error slave error Activate slave diagnostics SD 5x Activate slave diagnostics SDERRSx As soon as only one slave on the bus sets its error bit this is indicated as a group
193. mAA 124 20mA A default 1 value representation 0 Integer 15 bit sign A setting 1 12bit left justified 2 reserved 3 Channel 0 activate A 1 deactivate 4 reserved to7 1 4 Substitute value low byte 2 5 Substitute value high byte D301173 0713 BL20 Ethernet multiprotocol gateway 3 43 Properties gateway and I O modules BL20 2AO U 10 0 10VDC 3 byte per channel Table 3 22 Byte Bit Parameter name Value Module param eters 0 3 0 voltage mode 0 0 10VA 1 10 410V A default 1 value representation 0 Integer 15 bit sign A setting 1 12 bit left justified 2 reserved 3 Channel 0 activate A 1 deactivate 4 reserved to7 1 4 Substitute value low byte 2 5 Substitute value high byte E BL20 2AOHH Table 3 23 Byte Bit Parameter name Value Module param eters A default setting 0 0 Channel 0 activate A channel 1 1 deactivate 1 Diagnosis 0 block A 1 release 3 4 Operation mode Kx 0 0 20 mA polling of HART status not possible 124 20mA polling of HART status not possible 224 20 mA HART active A cyclic polling of HART status activate 7 HART diagnostics Kx 0 release A 1 block 3 44 D301173 0713 BL20 Ethernet multiprotocol gateway Parameters of the I O modules Industri A Table 3 23 Byte Bit Parameter name Value Module param
194. man D3007 16 English D300717 The bus independent I O modules of the BL20 system as well as all bus independent information as mounting labeling etc are described in a separate manual In addition to that the manual contains a short description of the I O ASSISTANT the project planning and configuration software tool for TURCK I O systems E BL20 E 2CNT 2PWM TURCK documentation no German D301223 English D301224 D301173 0713 BL20 Ethernet multiprotocol gateway Description of symbols used Industri A 1 2 Description of symbols used A Warning This sign can be found next to all notes that indicate a source of hazards This can refer to danger to personnel or damage to the system hardware and software and to the facility This sign means for the operator work with extreme caution A Attention This sign can be found next to all notes that indicate a potential hazard This can refer to possible danger to personnel and damages to the system hardware and software and to the facility Note This sign can be found next to all general notes that supply important information about one or more operating steps These specific notes are intended to make operation easier and avoid unnecessary work due to incorrect operation D301173 0713 BL20 Ethernet multiprotocol gateway 1 3 About this manual 1 3 General Attention Please read this section carefully Safety aspects cannot be left to cha
195. meaning of the parameter bits Table 3 28 Module param eters A default setting Parameter Value name Byte 1 DisableCfg Ifthe physical structure of the SWIRE bus does not match the configuration stored in the BL20 E 1SWIRE on power up SW LED flashing the physical structure of the SWIRE bus must be stored in the BL20 E 1SWIRE O inactiveA Manual SWIRE configuration To store the physical structure of the SWIRE bus in the BL20 E 1SWIRE the CFG button of the BL20 E 1SWIRE must be pressed manually only functions if the SW LED is flashing active Automatic SWIRE configuration If the physical structure of the SWIRE bus does not match the configuration stored in the BL20 E 1SWIRE on power up the physical structure is stored automatically in the BL20 E 1SWIRE configurati PLC configuration check on If the PLC configuration check is activated the configuration stored in the BL20 E 1SWIRE is compared with the SET configuration stored in the PLC 0 active A The configuration stored in BL20 E 1SWIRE is compared with the SET configuration stored in the PLC Only SWIRE slaves in the SWIRE bus are accepted that have a device ID completely matching the SET configuration 1 inactive All slaves are mapped in 4Bit INPUT 4Bit OUTPUT without checking the device ID D301173 0713 BL20 Ethernet multiprotocol gateway 3 53 Properties gateway and I O modules Table 3 28 Parameter Value Module para
196. mentation of EtherNet IP 4 2 3 Assembly Object 0x04 Assembly Objects bind attributes of multiple objects to allow data to or from each object to be sent or received over a single connection The following description of the Ethernet Link Object is taken from the CIP specification Vol 2 Rev 2 1 by ODVA amp ControlNet International Ltd and adapted to BL20 Class Attributes Table 4 6 Attr No Attribute name Get Type Value Class Attributes Set 1 0x01 REVISION G UINT 2 2 0x02 MAX OBJECT INSTANCE G UINT 104 Instance Attributes Table 4 7 Attr No Attribute name Get Type Description Instance Set attribute 3 0x03 DATA S ARRAY OF BYTE 4 0x04 SIZE G UINT UINT Number of bytes in attr 3 256 or variable Common Services Table 4 8 Service code Class Instance Service name Common ser 3 Wices 01 0x01 yes yes Get_Attribute_All 14 OxOE no yes Get_Attribute_Single 4 6 D301173 0713 BL20 Ethernet multiprotocol gateway Classes and Instances of the EtherNet IP stations Industri A Process data instances Instance 101 Contains the station s input data static length 256 bytes 2 Bytes status information see page 3 28 process data Instance 102 Contains the station s output data static length 256 bytes 2 Bytes Control data mapped but not defined process data Instance 103 und Instance 104 In and output assembly instances with variable assembly sizes Th
197. messages 35 Module parameter list Array of r List of all module parameters 0x23 BYTE 36 reserved 0x24 to 45039 OxAFEF 45040 I amp MO functions r Identification amp Maintenance OxAFFO 45041 I amp M1 functions STRING 54 r w not supported OxAFF1 45042 I amp M2 functions STRING 16 r w OxAFF2 45043 I amp M3 functions STRING 54 r w OxAFF3 45044 I amp MA functions STRING b4 r w OxAFF4 45045 I amp M5 functions OxAFF5 28672 Gateway parameters WORD r W activating deactivating the 0x7000 Ethernet protocols see also Gateway parameters page 8 10 8 6 2 Description of the acyclic module user data Table 8 6 Index Name Datatype r w Comment Module user data 1 Module parameter specific r w Parameter of the module 0x01 p Module type ENUM r Module type 0x02 UINT8 3 Module version UINT8 r Firmware revision of the module 0x03 4 Module ID DWORD r Ident number of the module 0x04 5 reserved 0x05 to 18 0x12 D301173 0713 BL20 Ethernet multiprotocol gateway 8 15 Implementation of PROFINET 19 Input data specific r Input data ofthe respective module 0x13 20 reserved 0x14 to 22 0x16 23 Output data specific r w Output data of the respective 0x17 module 24 0x18 to reserved 31 Ox1F 32 0x20 to Profile specific These indices are reserved for the data of several module 255 OxFF profiles e g RFID The definitions of the profile indices ca
198. mode BootP 4 OFF ON PGM gateway Address setting via the mode PGM 8 OFF ON PGM DHCP gateway Address setting via the mode PGM DHCP universal mode 16 OFF reserved 32 OFF ON F_Reset reserved 3 5 3 Resetting the IP address switch position RESTORE With this setting the DIP switches to 0 followed by a voltage reset the module is set to the address 192 168 1 254 for IP based services seeDefault setting of the gateway page 3 15 This setting allows for example the I O ASSISTANT 3 FDT DTM to communicate with the station the device s WEB server can be accessed using the IP address 192 168 1 254 Note i This setting is no operation mode Please set the device to another mode after having reset the IP address to the default values D301173 0713 BL20 Ethernet multiprotocol gateway 3 17 Properties gateway and I O modules 3 5 4 Address setting via DIP switches 2 to 27 Switch MODE has to be set to OFF Addresses from 1 to 254 can be set The addresses 0 and 255 are used for Broadcast messages in the subnet Note i All other network settings are stored in the module s non volatile EEPROM and can not be changed The gateway s field bus address results from the addition of the valences 2 to 27 of the active DIP switches position 1 Note i Pull the label upwards out of the housing in order to reach the DIP switches Example Bus address 50 0x32 00110010 Figure 3 7
199. n 4 SWIRE Slave 10 SWIRE Slave 9 SD10 PKZ SI0 SD9 PKZ ST9 SI9 ST10 n 5 SWIRE Slave 12 SWIRE Slave 11 SD12 PKZ SH2 SD11 PKZ SH 1 ST12 ST11 n 6 SWIRE Slave 14 SWIRE Slave 13 SD14 PKZ S4 SD13 PKZ S3 ST14 ST13 n4 SWIRE Slave 16 SWIRE Slave 15 SD16 PKZ SI16 SD15 PKZ SI15 ST16 ST15 n 8 ff Data from modules to the right Table 13 5 Design Status Comment Data bits SIx Switch status relay x SIx supplies the switch status of the contactor coil of the SWIRE bus slave as a feedback signal SIx makes it possible to check whether the set switch status was executed by a mechanical connection This must take into account the time delay between the setting of an output a mechanical execution and the subsequent feedback signal 0 off Off Contactor coil is switched off 1 on On Contactor coil is switched on D301173 0713 BL20 Ethernet multiprotocol gateway 13 13 Appendix Table 13 5 Design Status Data bits Comment PKZSTx Switch status PKZ x off Off The motor protective circuit breaker is off or has tripped on On The motor protective circuit breaker is switched on SCx Communication error slave x Setting the parameter SCy cSx sets the SCx bit in the process input data The information is provided as status information in the PLC for the user ON ONLINE Status of slave x LINE OFF OFFLINE Status of slave x diagnostics available LINE Process output data
200. n 0 Integer 15 bit sign A setting 1 12 bit left justified 2 Diagnosis 0 release A 1 block 3 Channel 0 activate A 1 deactivate 7 element 0000 Pt100 200 850 CA to 4 0001 Pt100 200 150 C 0010 Ni100 60 250 C 0011 Ni100 60 150 C 0100 Pt200 200 850 C 0101 Pt200 200 150 C 0110 Pt500 200 850 C 0111 Pt500 200 150 C 1000 Pt1000 200 850 C 1001 Pt1000 200 150 C 1010 Ni1000 60 250 C 1011 Ni1000 60 150 C 1100 resistance 0 100 Q 1101 resistance 0 200 Q 1110 resistance 0 400 Q 1111 resistance 0 1000 Q 1 3 0 Measurement mode 0 22wire A 123 wire 3 36 D301173 0713 BL20 Ethernet multiprotocol gateway Parameters of the I O modules Industri A E BL20 2AI THERMO PI 2 byte parameters per channel Table 3 15 Byte Bit Parameter name Value Module param dor 0 1 0 Mains suppression 0 50 HZ A 0 60 Hz A default 1 value representation 0 Integer 15 bit sign A setting 1 12 bit left justified 2 Diagnosis 0 release A 1 block 3 Channel 0 activate A 1 deactivate 7 element 0000 Type K 270 1370 CA to 4 0001 Type B 100 1820 C 0010 Type E 270 1000 C 0011 Type J 210 1200 C 0100 Type N 270 1300 C 0101 Type R 50 1760 C 0110 Type S 50 1540 C 0111 Type T 270 400 C 1000 50 mV 1001 100 mV 1010 500 mV
201. n be found in the respective module descriptions D301173 0713 BL20 Ethernet multiprotocol gateway Industri A 9 Application example BL20 E GW EN with PROFINET S7 9 1 Application exam ple sisscccccsccsscssscessecaccesssssssicscsecssesssacssiossssncsieassceccossseocsigesacessesssencsioossusistesssssssaneseoisconsssacs 9 2 9 1 1 cl 9 1 2 Example tiet WOFC ance heiter tese eet Nn Edere OROR QUE ue ed a hence vend 9 1 3 New project in the Simatic Manager 9 1 4 Setting the PG PC interface 9 1 5 Installation of the GSDML files 9 1 6 Adding PROFINET network NOdes ssessssssssccssssecsssssccssesecsssesccssssecsssescessesccsnssecsnsescessesessnseessnsccsnsessessescessesceaneeesunecescuneessuseess Adding a BL20 gateway and configuring the BL20 station eee teen eterne ttt tits nonts 9 9 9 1 7 Configuring the BL20 station leeren nnt nentes nto ttt notte nott tonto ttt notte ttt notti nott notti notis notis nones 9 1 8 Scanning the network for PROFINET nodes ssssssssescesssecssssscessscecsnseccessscecsnseccessscessuseecssssecssnscesnseessnseessnsseeessseessnsseeess Device name assignment BL20 gateway 9 1 9 PROFINET neighborhood detection via LLDP Necessary setting of the PROFINET controller Configuring the neighborhood detection eesccsssssccssecssssscessesccssesc
202. nce when dealing with electrical equipment This manual includes all information necessary for the prescribed use of the BL20 E GW EN It has been specially conceived for personnel with the necessary qualifications 1 3 1 Prescribed use Appropriate transport storage deployment and mounting as well as careful operating and thorough maintenance guarantee the trouble free and safe operation of these devices Warning The devices described in this manual must be used only in applications prescribed in this manual or in the respective technical descriptions and only with certified components and devices from third party manufacturers 1 3 2 Notes concerning planning installation of this product Warning All respective safety measures and accident protection guidelines must be considered carefully and without exception 1 4 D301173 0713 BL20 Ethernet multiprotocol gateway List of revisions Industri A 1 4 List of revisions In comparison to the previous manual edition the following changes revisions have been made Tabelle 1 1 Chapter Topic new changed eel Chap 3 Version overview page 3 3 X Top view BL20 E GW EN VN 03 00 page 3 6 X Top view BL20 E GW EN 2 VN 03 00 page 3 7 X LED displays page 3 12 X Function of DIP switches page 3 16 X Addressing via IP Address Tool page 3 27 X Chap 7 Diagnosis evaluation page 7 29 X Note The publication of this manual renders
203. nel specific error codes of the I O modules eesssssscssecssessssescsscccssccessecesnecessecessecssseecsscessccsssccessccesseesssecsnseesnscesnscessees 8 5 Parameterization Gateway parameters l O module parameters ls Parameter module parameterization cecsssecsssscssecessecesssccssccssscessseesssccsssecsnsecssscesnscessscesseccesccesseessuecssseecsuccesuecessecesseesnaeessees 8 13 Description of user data for acyclic services 1 eee eee Lect eerte e eene eene seen eene etas etas en sets eese snaeno 8 14 Description of the acyclic gateway user data Description of the acyclic module user data Application example BL20 E GW EN with PROFINET S7 Application exam ple e R 9 2 General oe P Example network sss New project in the Simatic Manager Setting the PG PC Interface vas ccarscissnsscssssscssssvecsnnvevsssssssesusessonbeconsvevsesbeussnsvecsuaestesosseehiocedetusecsesocecsussedeetioesenssceverbvcesssvedseneceseuvecseevede Installation Of the GSDML files cente eR Ree e tee eese ee eR nale Adding PROFINET network nodes eee eene teen tete tento ttts ntes nettes nine ttt nois tts rotten tts ttt notti nett nonet Configuring the BL20 statiori ise etes aaraa aieea aaa iaiaaeaia enaid eget gebe ec ede Ebina eeir dtd Scanning the network for PROFINET nodes PROFINET
204. nitored at the power feeding modules 1 active An possible over or undervoltage for V is not monitored Bit 3 reserved Bit 4 O ASSISTANT Force Mode disable 0 inactive A 1 active The I O ASSISTANT is not able to access the gateway via Force Mode Bit 5 reserved Bit 6 Startup also if configuration does not match 0 inactive A Changes in the station configuration are stored in the gateway following a power on reset 1 active If the static configuration is deactivated a dynamic configuration take over is realized directly following station configuration changes important for acyclic parameterization Bit 7 reserved Bit 0 EtherNet IP deactivated 0 inactive A Explicit deactivating of the other Ethernet E protocols as well as of the web server 1 active Bit 1 Modbus TCP deactivated 0 inactive A 1 active Bit 2 to Bit 7 reserved Bit 0 to Bit 6 reserved Bit 7 Web server deactivated 0 inactive A Explicit deactivating of the web server 1 active D301173 0713 BL20 Ethernet multiprotocol gateway Parameterization Industri A 8 5 2 1 O module parameters The decription of the signle O module parameters is protocol independent and can thus be found in chapter 3 9 Parameters of the I O modules page 3 33 8 5 3 Parameter module parameterization Each parameterizable module gets the additional parameter module
205. ns please email TURCK Support URL http vww turck com Revision V1 0 0 0 3 32 D301173 0713 BL20 Ethernet multiprotocol gateway Status and Control Word of the BL20 stations 3 8 Status and Control Word of the BL20 stations The Status as well as the Control Word are mapped into the station s process data E EtherNet IP Industri A In EtherNet IP the mapping can be disabled see Gateway Class VSC 100 64h and GW Status Register page 4 18 E Modbus TCP see Register 0x100C Gateway status page 6 16 E PROFINET see Diagnosis in PROFINET page 8 4 3 8 1 Status Word Byte Bit7 Bit 6 Bit 5 Bit 4 Bit 3 Bit 2 Bit 1 Bit 0 Status 0 UL l O Cfg Diag low Warn Warn 1 FCE MB 1 0 1 0 Uis Uys Wdg CFG COM low high Meaning of the status bits Table 3 8 Name Meaning Meaning of the status bits Diag Summarized diagnosis of the device At least one l O module sends active diagnosis Warn 1 0 Cfg The station configuration has changed Warn U Load voltage too low 18 V DC low Uys System supply voltage too high gt 30 V DC high Um System supply voltage too low 18 V DC low 1 0 1 0 Communication Lost Error COM No Communication on the module bus 1 0 1 0 CfgModified Error CFG The l O configuration has be changed and is no longer compatible MB Modbus Watchdogs Error Wdg A timeout occurred in the modb
206. nt Modbus addressing methods Table 6 4 Description Hex Decimal 5 digit Modicon Mapping of BL20 E GW EN Modbus regis ters holding registers packed input data 0x0000 0 40001 400001 to to to to 0x01FF 511 40512 400512 packed output data 0x0800 2048 42049 402049 to to to to OxO9FF 2549 42560 402560 gateway identifier 0x1000 4096 44097 404097 to to to to 0x1006 4102 44103 404103 Gateway status 0x100C 4108 44109 404109 process image length in bit for the 0x1010 4112 44113 404113 intelligent output modules process image length in bit for the 0x1011 4113 44114 404114 intelligent input modules process image length in bit for the digital 0x1012 4114 44115 404115 output modules process image length in bit for the digital 0x1013 4115 44116 404116 input modules Register mapping revision 0x1017 4119 44120 404120 group diagnostics of I O modules 1 to 32 0x1018 to 4120 to 44121 to 404121 to 1 bit per I O module 0x1019 4121 44122 404122 watchdog actual time 0x1020 4128 44129 404129 watchdog predefined time 0x1120 4384 44385 404385 Watchdog reset register 0x1121 4385 44386 404386 Modbus connection mode register 0x1130 4400 44401 404401 Modbus connection timeout in sec 0x1131 4401 44402 404402 Modbus parameter restore 0x113C to 4412 to 44413 to 404413 to 0x113D 4413 44414 404414 Modbus parameter save Ox113E 4414 44415 to 404415 to to to 44416 404416 Ox113F 4415 service object request are
207. occur Some devices maintain independent configuration settings that are not loaded to the device during the download of the controller Verify these devices drives network devices 3rd party products have been properly loaded before placing the controller into run mode Failure to load proper configuration could result in misaligned data and unexpected equipment operation L Cancel Help 3 If an error message is generated warning that the communication path can not be found please open the Path menu see Figure 5 8 select your controller and press Set Project Path see Figure 5 9 Fi igure 5 8 E RSLoeix 5000 BL2_E_GW_EN_MP 1769 L30ER 20 12 Controller Tags BL2 E GW EN MP controller Com mun ica A File Edit View Search Logic Communications Tools Window Help tion path as amp BR om o x 33 FE Ve am Rem Run DB E Run Mode Path E Hmm p M Controller OK q 7 Battery OK No Edits a B UD OK gt EET E i GIFS ES analar RI F Cu EN MD 7 Q Lr Figure 5 9 Select Recent Communications Path Communica Eras tion path PLC PLC Upload Download Close Help Path in Project lt none gt 4 Ifthe correct communication path is set it is possible to download the configuration D301173 0713 BL20 Ethernet multiprotocol gateway 5 7 Application example BL20 E GW EN with EtherNet IP Allen Bradley 5 Oncethel O configuration is downloaded and the controller is in Run or Remo
208. odbus registers are read starting with address x Addr service request 0x2000 0x2001 0x2002 0x2003 0x2004 0x2005 0x207F Service 0x0000 0x0003 Addr Count no meaning number service response 0x2080 0x2081 0x2082 0x2083 0x2084 0x2085 Ox20FF Service result 0x0003 Addr Count register contents number 6 20 D301173 0713 BL20 Ethernet multiprotocol gateway Modbus registers Industri A Indirect writing of registers 1 to 122 Count Modbus registers are read starting with address Addr service request 0x2000 0x2001 0x2002 0x2003 0x2004 0x2005 0x207F Service 0x0000 0x0010 Addr Count register contents number service response 0x2080 0x2081 0x2082 0x2083 0x2084 0x2085 Ox20FF Service result 0x0010 Addr Count no meaning number D301173 0713 BL20 Ethernet multiprotocol gateway 6 21 Implementation of Modbus TCP 6 4 Bit areas mapping of input discrete and coil areas The digital in and outputs can be read and written for outputs as registers in the data area of the packed in and output process data Note i In the packed process data the digital I O data are stored following the variable in and output data area of the intelligent modules which means they are stored with a variable offset depending on the station s I O configuration In order to set for example a single output single coil the following functions are available for reading and writing single bits E FC1 Read
209. ode 0 is not valid Sub function codes are added to some function codes to define multiple actions The data field of messages sent from a client to server devices contains additional information that the server uses to take the action defined by the function code This can include items like discrete and register addresses the quantity of items to be handled and the count of actual data bytes in the data field The data field may be non existent 0 in certain kinds of requests in this case the server does not require any additional information The function code alone specifies the action If no error occurs related to the Modbus function requested in a properly received Modbus ADU the data field of a response from a server to a client contains the data requested Figure 6 3 Modbus data transmission acc to Modbus IDA Client Server Initiate request Perform the action Initiate the response Receive the response Eumetioneode Data response D301173 0713 BL20 Ethernet multiprotocol gateway 6 3 Implementation of Modbus TCP If an error related to the Modbus function requested occurs the field contains an exception code that the server application can use to determine the next action to be taken Figure 6 4 Modbus data transmission acc to Modbus IDA Client Server Initiate request error detected in action Initiate error Exception function code Exception code Receive
210. of an error is 0 E BL20 E 4A0 U I Table 3 49 Diagnostic byte Bit Diagnosis BL20 E 4AO U I A thresholds n 0 Measurement value range error OoR A value represen channel 0 tation of the tod 43 1 reserved module in man channel 3 ual D300716 2 reserved 3 Overflow underflow OUFL A 4to6 reserved 7 Hardware error D301173 0713 BL20 Ethernet multiprotocol gateway 3 63 Properties gateway and I O modules 3 10 6 Technology modules BL20 1CNT 24VDC Table 3 50 Diagnosticbyte Bit Diagnosis BL20 1CNT 24VDC n 0 Short circuit open circuit DO ERR DO if bit 7 0 counter 1 Short circuit in sensor power supply 24 V DC ERR 24VDC mode 2 End of counter range wrong 3 Start of counter range wrong 4 Invert Dl latch retr not perm Itis not permitted to invert the level ofthe digital input when using the latch retrigger function 5 Main count direction wrong 6 Operating mode wrong 7 Measurement mode Bit 0 Counter mode active n 0 Short circuit open circuit DO ERR DO if 1 Short circuit in sensor power supply 24 V DC ERR 24VDC bit7 0 2 Sensor pulse wrong measurement mode 3 Integration time wrong 4 Upper limit wrong 5 Lower limit wrong 6 Operating mode wrong 7 Measurement mode Bit 1 measurement operation is active BL20 1RS232 Table 3 51 Diagnosticbyte Bit Diagnosis BL20 1RS232 n 0 parameterization error 1 Hardware failure 2 Data
211. ofthe data bits process input Value Description STS CMP2 0 A comparison of the register contents has produced the following result REG SSI POS REG CMP1 1 A comparison of the register contents has produced the following result REG SSI POS REG CMP2 REL CMP1 0 A comparison of the register contents has produced the following result REG SSI POS lt REG CMP1 1 A comparison of the register contents has produced the following result REG_ SSI POS 2 REG CMP1 FLAG CMP1 0 Default status i e the register contents have not yet matched REG SSI POS REG CMP 1 since the last reset 1 The contents of the registers match REG SSI POS REG CMP1 This marker must be reset with CLR CMP1 1 in the process output data STS CMP1 0 A comparison of the register contents has produced the following result REG SSI POS REG CMP1 1 A comparison of the register contents has produced the following result REG SSI POS REG CMP1 STS STOP 0 The SSI encoder is read cyclically 1 Communication with the SSI encoder is stopped as STOP 1 process output or ERR PARA 1 ERR PARA 0 The parameter set of the module has been accepted 1 Operation of the module is not possible with the present parameter set STS UFLW 0 A comparison of the register contents has produced the following result REG SSI POS gt REG LOWER LIMIT
212. on can contain modules in any combination which means itis possible to adapt the system to practically all applications in automated industry Compactness The slim design of the BL20 modules standard gateway 50 4 mm 1 98 inch ECO gateway 34 mm 1 34 inch standard slice 12 6 mm 0 49 inch ECO slice 13 mm 0 51 inch and block 100 8 mm 3 97 inch and their low overall height favor the installation of this system in confined spaces Easy to handle All BL20 modules of the standard line with the exception of the gateway consist of a base module and an electronics module The gateway and the base modules are snapped onto a mounting rail The electronics modules are plugged onto the appropriate base modules The base modules ofthe standard line are designed as terminal blocks The wiring is secured by tension clamp or screw connection The electronics modules can be plugged or pulled when the station is being commissioned or for maintenance purposes without having to disconnect the field wiring from the base modules The ECO electronics modules combine base module and electronics module in one housing All BL20 ECO modules can be used with the standard products with tension clamp connection technology D301173 0713 BL20 Ethernet multiprotocol gateway BL20 components 2 2 BL20 components 2 2 1 Gateways The gateway connects the fieldbus to the I O modules It is responsible for handling the entire process data and gen
213. on of the Modbus Communication Stack according to Modbus Application Protocol Specification V1 1 of Modbus IDA Figure 6 1 Schematic representation ofthe Modbus Communica tion Stack 6 2 Modbus Application Layer Modbus TCP TCP IP andere Modbus plus Master Slave Client Server Ethernet Physical layer Rsxxx Physical layer Physicallayer Physical layer D301173 0713 BL20 Ethernet multiprotocol gateway Common Modbus description Industri A 6 1 1 Protocol description The Modbus protocol defines a simple protocol data unit PDU independent of the underlying communication layers The mapping of Modbus protocol on specific buses or network can introduce some additional fields on the application data unit ADU Figure 6 2 Modbus tele MODBUS TCP IP ADU Modbus IDA _ ee PDU The Modbus application data unit is built by the client that initiates a Modbus transaction The function code indicates to the server what kind of action to perform The Modbus application protocol establishes the format of a request initiated by a client The field function code of a Modbus data unit is coded in one byte Valid codes are in the range of 1 255 decimal 128 255 reserved for exception responses When a message is sent from a Client to a Server device the function code field tells the server what kind of action to perform Function c
214. onnected on only 13 mm This high connection density considerably reduces the mounting width required for typical applications All advantages at a glance E Space saving thanks to 16 channels on 13 mm 0 51 inch width E Cost saving thanks to electronics with integrated connection level High signal density Tool less connection via push in spring type terminal technology for simple and fast mounting Flexibility in combining them with standard I O modules in tension clamp technology the standard and the ECO gateways E Simple assembly reduces error sources Figure 2 4 ECO l O module i i i u Y Ir 4 E n t H 7 E Ro g 5 RBI HB C g o x E Rg i 2 6 D301173 0713 BL20 Ethernet multiprotocol gateway BL20 components 2 2 5 Base modules Thefield wiring is connected to the base modules These are constructed as terminals in block and slice designs and are available in the following variations with either tension clamp or screw connections 2 3 wire 2 channel 4 wire 2 channel and 4 x 2 3 wire 4 channel Figure 2 5 Base module with tension clamp connec tion Figure 2 6 Base module with screw connection Figure 2 7 Base module in block design D301173 0713 BL20 Ethernet multiprotocol gateway 2 7 BL20 philosophy 2 2 6 End plate An end plate on the right hand side physically completes the BL20 station An end bracket mounted into the end pla
215. ontrol WinV3 Communication Settings Applications Files Log PLC settings PLC shell Users and Groups Access Ric gt PLCLogic Application i Library Manager 8 PLc PRG PRG Select the network path to the controller Gateway 1 Set active path BM Task Configuration e MainTask Scan network Filter Target ID bA Sorting order localhost 1217 m iin POUs S Devices Current user nobody D301173 0713 BL20 Ethernet multiprotocol gateway 7 7 Application example BL20 E GW EN for Modbus TCP CoDeSys Win V3 Setting the communication path 1 Markthe gateway and scan the network via the respective button 2 The network card of your PC will be found and set as active path Figure 7 7 Setting the com munication path 7 8 S Device CoDeSys Control WinV3 PLCLogic Application ii Library Manager 8 PLc PRc PRG S Task Configuration MainTask Device CoDeSys Control WinV3 ill PLCLooic Application fi Library Manager 8 Pc PRc PRG Task Configuration MainTask Project Build Online amp f xIs siEIt3 li i Library Manager PLC PRG PRG amp Task Configuration MainTask Communication Settings Applications Files Log PLC settings PLC shell Users and Groups Access Ric Select the network path to the contro
216. operties turck bI20 e General identification Short description turck bl20 e Modular Fieldbus IO System in IP20 Order No firmware 6827329 SW V 1 1 Family TURCK Device name urck bl20 e 1 GSD file GSDML V2 25 TURCK BL20 E GW EN 20121220 010100 xmi Node in PROFINET IO System Device number NES IPROFINET IO System 100 IP address 192 168 1 1 Ethemet Iv Assign IP address via IO controller Comment Note In PROFINET the connected device is not identified by it s IP address but recognized and addressed by it s device name The selection of a device name for a special IO device can thus be compared to the setting of Note When storing the device name or the IP address or when resetting the gateway to the default values the GW LED switches to orange During this time the gateway s voltage supply must not be interrupted In case of a power failure faulty data will be stored in the gateway the PROFIBUS address for a DP slave D301173 0713 BL20 Ethernet multiprotocol gateway Application example 9 1 7 Configuring the BL20 station After the assignment of the device name the I O modules which are connected to the BL20 gateway are added to the station They have to be selected from the Hardware Catalog in the same order as they appear physically in the station Figure 9 12 a fh HW Config SI
217. ord D301173 0713 BL20 Ethernet multiprotocol gateway Programming with CoDeSys Figure 7 21 BL20 E MP project CoDeSys e Jum Jes Modbus chan Ele Edt View Project Buld Onine Debug Tools Window Heb nel read xRe ox ght G IgG set FC03 2X tl StartPage Device j BL20 E GW EN 5 PLC PRG p GV fj Modbus TCP Master x Device CoDeSys Control winy Modbus Slave Channel Modbus Slave Init ModbusrcPsiave Configuration ModbusTCPSlave 1 0 Mapping Status In Bl PLCLogic Name Access Type Trigger REA Length WRITE Offset 2 o E Counter value 1 Write Single Register Function Code 06 CYCLIC 1640800 GVL it Library Manager E rc Pnc P RIBUDUSC R Task Config MainTas J Ethernet Ethernet Name xReset HJ Modbus TCP M access Type Read Holding Registers Function Code 03 js c Trigger CydeTime ms 100 Comment READ Register Length 1 Error Handling Keep last Value M WRITE Register Offset 0x0000 Length 1 Add Channel Delete Edit D POUs S Devices J Current user nobody 2 2 Mapping xReset global variable to 961X0 0 in 96IWO xReset is mapped to the first bit in IW0 of BL20 2DI 24VDC P This is done in the ModbusTCPSlave I O Mapping Double click the field variable in the respective line Us
218. otential relationships sssssssseee 11 4 prescribed USE 3 5 icit E esee ER OREOEA 1 4 process data sssssssssessseseeee eee ns 4 8 Process input x5 os JM 13 2 15 1 Index zihiz Eat 13 13 process input SSI tiec eine a d ede aede e ade 13 6 Process out SSWIRE 2 n e E Re FE reo RM act eels 13 14 Process output RSXXX iu aei aed ade deci dede 13 4 process output EM avis eee iain 13 11 product overview 2 1 S shield cuum 11 7 SOftWAre 5 etie tet d e date V dc ue 5 2 7 2 ere T 1 4 supply voltage sse 3 9 3 14 Syr bols inet den i sedeat 1 3 symbols tete e es 1 3 T Terminal Slot Class cccccssccssssssesecseessesseessecseeseeeseenes 4 18 transmission media ccscesceseesscesseseeesseseecseseeeseenees 11 3 transport 12 2 nte ee Edere aie hae 1 4 transport appropriate ssssseeenen 1 4 U use pre s ribed eren ein 1 4 user dat e medals 8 14 Ww WIN 2000 1 5 erotic ene edo nari eine 13 16 WINNT ods iacit ecrit oe ntis 13 16 WINXP 12er rete refe ecc edes 13 16 Z Vy ae aaa aaa a aeaa ade Rea adaa 12 1 15 2 D301173 0713 BL20 Ethernet multiprotocol gateway Industrial Automation www turck com Hans Turck GmbH amp Co KG 45472 M lheim an der Ruhr Germany WitzlebenstraBe 7 Tel 49 0 208 4952 0 Fax 49 0 208 4952 264 E Mail more turck com Internet www tur
219. otocol gateway Technical data 3 3 2 Top view BL20 E GW EN gt VN 03 00 Figure 3 2 Topview BL20 E GW EN BL20 E GW EN 2 VN 03 00 A LEDs for BL20 module bus B service interface no function C DIP switch for the fieldbus address D DIP switch for the operation mode E DIP switch for the configura tion acceptance F LEDs for the Ethernet com munication G EtherNet switch with EtherNet LEDs H terminals for field supply terminals for system supply DEBE IU mo Unlock end bracket before dismounting Slide top cover for configuration and service AN D301173 0713 BL20 Ethernet multiprotocol gateway 3 7 Properties gateway and I O modules 3 3 3 Block diagram Figure 3 3 Block diagram BL20 E GW EN 3 8 Service USB C3 tt Module bus CPU Switch a m sy a Tr Tr U dd TIU f O O 2 Eti Eth2 Uss U Gateway D301173 0713 BL20 Ethernet multiprotocol gateway Technical data 3 3 4 General technical data of a station Industri A Attention The auxiliary power supply must comply with the stipulations of SELV Safety Extra Low Voltage according to IEC 364 4 41 Table 3 2 Supply voltage auxiliary voltage General tech
220. plish this the load voltage is connected to a Power Feeding module with the BL20 P4x SBBC base module All the following relay modules are then supplied with power via the C rail Attention When relay modules are planned and the C rail is used for a common voltage supply a further power distribution module must be used for the potential isolation to the following modules The C rail can only again be used as a PE following potential isolation 10 8 D301173 0713 BL20 Ethernet multiprotocol gateway Power supply Figure 10 5 8 DI Using the C rail PF 2DOgco 2DO2DI PF NO NC NO NC as protective earth and for gew the power supply with relay modules i i PE B r F TS LIERR geus 10 2 EH 1 2 1 aM Lr 11 21 11 1m 11 21 11 21 11 21 11 21 i 41 Hees 5 9 Hs 12 22 12 T LE 212 22 12 2912 2212 2212 22 ii 1 i ez EIC DONS Hi os 2 Em Ra 5 5 13 23 3 1 1 1 U 406 v Dg C rail PE C rail 24 V DC A 2 ludis 14 2414 2414 2414 24 Be JO BC SBC ug SBC SBB SBBC SBCS SBCS SBCS SBCS h eo Qe Cross connecting relay module roots is achieved by the use of jumpers The corresponding wiring diagram including the jumpers can be found the manuals for BL20 I O modules German D300716 English D300717 10 2 5 Direct wiring of relay modules As well asthe options mentioned above relay modu
221. possibility to browse the whole Ethernet network for connected nodes and to change their IP address as well as the subnet mask according to the application see also Further information about this issue can be found under Adressierung ber I O ASSISTANT 3 FDT DTM page 4 12 Figure 13 7 TERT E Busaddr ess File Edit View Project Device Extras Window Help Management Dg a m 990 Blo 9 Bas Device tag Ad HOST PC boje3e exiaq d Parameter Measured value simulation Diagnostics Display channels Channels gt Up Download Manager Print Additional Functions 3C Add device E Delete device i Properties lt TCP IP gt BL Service Ethernet E Identification Tw About a e Busaddress HIMA Export Accessory Preset DTM TAG address tag lt im gt DTM maintenance 35 xoc PWS Administrat Write device data to file 13 18 D301173 0713 BL20 Ethernet multiprotocol gateway Deactivating adapting the firewall in Windows 13 3 Deactivating adapting the firewall in Windows When using the Windows Firewall problems may occur while changing IP addresses via the I O ASSISTANT In this case you can deactivate the system integrated Windows firewall com pletely or adapt it to your application Deactivating the Windows firewall Open the Windows Firewall dialog in the control panel of your PC and deactivate it as follows Figure 13 8
222. pted for most effective usability B Syntax Highlighting E Tex editor Visualization f Pous Current user nobody 7 4 D301173 0713 BL20 Ethernet multiprotocol gateway Programming with CoDeSys 7 3 2 Creating a new project 1 Create a new CoDeSys project using the File New project command Figure 7 2 New project Save Project Ctri s Save Project As Project Archive Source upload Source download Print Page Setup 2 Select Standard project and define a project name Figure 7 3 Standard proj ect 4 A project containing one device one application and an empty implementation for PLC PRG Name BL20 E MP Location C Users scheuech Documents D301173 0713 BL20 Ethernet multiprotocol gateway 7 5 Application example BL20 E GW EN for Modbus TCP CoDeSys Win V3 3 Select the PLC used in the project In this example the CoDeSys Control Win V3 is used 4 Please define also your preferred programming language In this example Structured Text is used Figure 7 4 Selection of ial You are about to create a new standard project This wizard will create the following CoDeSys pP Control Win V3 reins rici mindset baler Acyclic task which calls PLC PRG every 20 milliseconds A reference to the newest version of the Standard library currently installed Device CoDeSys Control Win V
223. r directly in the Windows Control Panel for your PG PC Figure 9 2 pasphashp m V SIMATIC Manager BL20 E GW EN C Program Files x86 Siemens Step7As G Command Set Bp File Edit Inset PLC View Window Help PG PC Inter Du S e X Gag wd Customize Ctri Alt E 1 Ra aam n face E BL20 E Gw EN Access Protection Change Log Text Libraries p Language for Display Devices Manage Multilingual Texts Rewire Run Time Properties Compare Blocks Reference Data Define Global Data Configure Network Simulate Modules Configure Process Diagnostics CAx Data Set PG PC Interface D301173 0713 BL20 Ethernet multiprotocol gateway 9 3 Application example BL20 E GW EN with PROFINET S7 9 1 5 Installation of the GSDML files 1 Inthe hardware configuration HW config open the Options Install GSD file command in order to install new GSD files Figure 9 3 GSD files In ea e DA HW Config SIMATIC 300 1 Configuration BL20 E GW EN fil Station Edit Insert PLC View Options Window Help matal Dhu Re stome Specify Module Configure Network Symbol Table Report System Error Edit Catalog Profile Update Catalog Install HW Updates Install GSD File Find in Service amp Support Create GSD file for I Device Ctri Alt E Ctrl Alt T 2 Define the directo
224. r distribution modules the black line is only above the connection 24 This makes clear that the C rail is separated from the adjoining potential group to its left Figure 10 2 C rail front view Figure 10 3 C rail side view D301173 0713 BL20 Ethernet multiprotocol gateway 10 7 Guidelines for station planning Warning A It is permitted to load the C rail with a maximum of 24 V Not 230 V The C rail can be used as required by the application for example as a protective earth PE In this case the PE connection of each power distribution module must be connected to the mounting rail via an additional PE terminal which is available as an accessory The C rail is not interrupted by the modules of the BL20 ECO products It is connected through the modules connection level But an access to the C rail is not possible Note i For information about introducing a BL20 station into a ground reference system please read chapter 10 Figure 10 4 8 DI Using the C rail PF 2DOEgco2DO2DI PF 2DO 2DI 2DO 2DI asa protective mi E bs E3 earth Bs los ux I ape in P de TS ETH2 Unlock end bracket below demounting Side top cover for configuration and service ETH1 A C rail PE A t4 24 C rails can be used for a common voltage supply 24 V DC when relay modules are planned To accom
225. ram with error code Figure 9 20 Diagnostic message 10 device vendor and channel specific diagnostics hexadecimal g 0000 001000 1C 0101 00 00 00 00 DO dga O1 80 00 0010 08 00 80 02 80 00 08 0O BO 01 8000 OHO 00 DO A slot no 0020 0010001601 01 00 00 ogma 0d 03 QU 01 80 DO 0030 08 00 80 00 00 00 28 05 O0 07 00 10 00 1C 01 01 B subslot no 0040 0000 00 00 00 04 DO 01 80 00 08 00 80 00 00 00 error code 0050 28 06 00 06 00 01 28 06 00 06 D plaint text diag nostic message Structured Display Diagnostics lt 1 gt Diagnostics 2 Diagnostics 3 Header H Address Diagnostic type Channel diagnostics USI 8000 7 Channel diagnostics lt 1 gt ChannelNumber 0000 ChannelProperties 2806 D301173 0713 BL20 Ethernet multiprotocol gateway 9 19 Application example BL20 E GW EN with PROFINET S7 9 20 D301173 0713 BL20 Ethernet multiprotocol gateway Industri A 10 Guidelines for station planning 10 1 10 1 1 10 1 2 10 1 3 10 2 10 2 1 10 2 2 10 2 3 10 2 4 10 2 5 10 3 10 4 10 5 10 6 Mod le arrangement P 10 2 Random module arrangement e nE 10 2 Complete plannilg s seno inert tette ite ret D udi ar edat edis a Pech eve e v ene Eres Ra 10 2 MAXIMUNVSYSTEM EXECNSION em 10 3 iude
226. range end in temperature measurement ranges only value 2to7 reserved D301173 0713 BL20 Ethernet multiprotocol gateway 3 59 Properties gateway and I O modules BL20 2AIH I Table 3 39 Diagnosticbyte Bit Diagnosis BL20 2AIH I n 0 overflow The measurement value exceeds the value ranges and the device is not able to capture these values 1 Open circuit Displays an open circuit in the signal line 2 Short circuit Displays a short circuit in the signal line 3 undervoltage The measurement value is below the value ranges and the device is not able to capture these values 4 HART status error The connected HART device set a bit in the HART status information status polling 5 HART communication error The channel does not allow communication with the HART device 6 Invalid parameter 7 Hardware error Shows common errors of the module hardware The return analog value in case of an error is O E BL20 4AI U I Table 3 40 Diagnosticbyte Bit Diagnosis BL20 4Al U A threshold n 0 measurement value range error A 1 of the posi channel 0 tive measure ton 3 open circuit B ment range end channel 3 2to7 reserved value under flow diagnostics only in value range 4 20mA B threshold 3 mA only in value range 4 20 mA 3 60 D301173 0713 BL20 Ethernet multiprotocol gateway Diagnostic messages of the modules Industri A BL20 E 8AI U
227. ration attribute Status 0 The Interface Configuration attribute has not been configured 1 The Interface Configuration attribute contains valid configuration 2 to 15 reserved 4to31 reserved E Configuration Capability The Configuration Capability indicates the device s support for optional network configuration capability Table 4 15 Bit s Name Definition Value Configuration BRP SUE Capability BOOTP Client The device is capable of obtaining its 1 network configuration via BOOTP 1 DNS Client The device is capable of resolving host 0 names by querying a DNS server 2 DHCP Client The device is capable of obtaining its 1 network configuration via DHCP D301173 0713 BL20 Ethernet multiprotocol gateway 4 11 Implementation of EtherNet IP Configuration Control The Configuration Control attribute is used to control network configuration options Table 4 16 Configuration Control Bit s Name Definition 0 3 Startup Determines how the device shall obtain its initial configuration Configuration at 0 The device shall use the interface configuration values previously stored for example in non volatile memory or via hardware switches etc 1 to 3 reserved 4 DNS Enable Always 0 5 31 reserved Set to 0 Interface Configuration This attribute contains the configuration parameters required to operate as a TCP IP node To modify the Interface Configuration attribut
228. re eee eene eere eene e setenta enun 6 22 6 5 Error behavior of outputs watchdog eere ee eee eee etes eere eene seen eene tn se ens tena tenes ense eese enesensee 6 23 D301173 0713 BL20 Ethernet multiprotocol gateway 6 1 Implementation of Modbus TCP 6 1 Common Modbus description Note The following description of the Modbus protocol is taken from the Modbus Application Protocol Specification V1 1 of Modbus IDA Modbusis an application layer messaging protocol positioned at level 7 ofthe OSI model that provides client server communication between devices connected on different types of buses or networks The industry s serial de facto standard since 1979 Modbus continues to enable millions of automation devices to communicate Today support for the simple and elegant structure of Modbus continues to grow The Internet community can access Modbus at a reserved system port 502 on the TCP IP stack Modbus is a request reply protocol and offers services specified by function codes Modbus function codes are elements of Modbus request reply PDUs Protocol Data Unit It is currently implemented using TCP IP over Ethernet that is used for the BLxx gateways for Modbus TCP and described in the following Asynchronous serial transmission over a variety of media wire RS232 RS422 RS485 optical fiber radio etc Modbus PLUS a high speed token passing network Schematic representati
229. ready has an IP address see Address assignment page 3 15 and if it is operated in switch position PGM or PGM DHCP mode Note When using Windows XP as operating system difficulties may occur with system integrated firewall It may inhibit the access of PACTware I O ASSISTANT V3 to the Ethernet network In this case please adapt your firewall respectively or deactivate it D301173 0713 BL20 Ethernet multiprotocol gateway Address assignment Figure 3 15 IP address change File Edit View Project Device Extras Window Help D Sa S a Bie m 9909 9 Sas ED B mo SO sx lil it 20 A ss Busaddress management ices Add devices manualy b Ethemetaddress M 00 07 46 80 00 01 PL Device type Online ID Busaddress Designation Tag Device short name Bojeye aovag di D301173 0713 BL20 Ethernet multiprotocol gateway 3 25 Properties gateway and l O modules 3 5 11 Addressing via Web server Version gt VN 03 00 The device s network settings can be changed under Network Configuration only by users having administrator rights Further information concerning the web server of the FGEN devices and it s use can be found under Web server remote access configuration Version 2 VN 03 00 page 3 29 Note The access of the IO ASSISTANT to the station is only possible if the station already has an IP address Address assignment page 3 15 and if it is op
230. rement value range error A surement range 4to 20mA 1 Open circuit BL20 2AH 0 4 20MA Table 3 34 Diagnosticbyte Bit Diagnosis BL20 2AI I 0 4 20MA A Only in the mea n 0 measurement value range error A surementrange channel 1 4 to 20 mA 1 Open circuit n 1 0 measurement value range error A channel 2 Open circuit 3 58 D301173 0713 BL20 Ethernet multiprotocol gateway Diagnostic messages of the modules Industri A BL20 1AI U 10 0 10VDC Table 3 35 BL20 1AI U 10 0 10VDC Diagnostic byte Bit Diagnosis n channel 1 0 Measurement value range error BL20 2AI U 10 0 10VDC Table 3 36 BL20 2AI U 10 0 10VDC Diagnostic byte Bit Diagnosis n channel 1 0 Measurement value range error n channel 2 0 Measurement value range error BL20 2AI PT NI 2 3 Table 3 37 Diagnostic byte Bit Diagnosis BL20 2AI PT NI 2 3 A threshold 1960f n channel 1 0 measurement value range error A the positive Underflow diagnostics in temperature measurement ranges only measurement range end value 1 Open circuit B threshold 5Q loop resis 2 Short circuit B tance in temperature measurement ranges only 3to7 E BL20 2Al THERMO PI Table 3 38 Diagnostic byte Bit Diagnosis BL20 2AI THERMO PI A threshold n 0 measurement value range error A 1 96 of the posi n tive measure 1 Open circuit ment
231. rnet 3 14 D301173 0713 BL20 Ethernet multiprotocol gateway Address assignment Industri A 3 5 Address assignment LED behavior During the start up the flashing LED BUS red green displays that the station is waiting for address assignment per DHCP BOOTP autonegotiation As soon as the address assignment is done the LED flashes green and the station is ready for communicating in the network 3 5 1 Default setting of the gateway The object provides the following control functions IP address 192 168 1 254 Subnet mask 255 255 255 0 Default gateway Note i The stations can be reset by the user to these default settings at any time To reset the module set the three DIP switches 2 to 2 on the gateway to 0 followed by apower on reset Note i After every change of the address mode a voltage reset must be carried done D301173 0713 BL20 Ethernet multiprotocol gateway 3 15 Properties gateway and I O modules 3 5 2 Function of DIP switches The DIP switches for address setting operation mode setting and for the storage of the stationconfiguration are located under the gateway s upper label To set the DIP switches please pull the label from the gateway Note i Please observe that the numbering of the DIP switches under the label does not correspond to the switches designation on the label Figure 3 6 Top view with label DIP switches at the gateway
232. rotocol gateway 8 5 Implementation of PROFINET The following table shows which module message will be changed to which error code Table 8 3 Error codes module diag nostics 8 6 PROFINET Error code possible module diagnostics No Text I O module diagnostic message of the module dec 1 Short circuit BL20 2AIH I Short circuit BL20 4DI NAMUR overcurrent 2 Under voltage BL20 BR 24VDC channel 0 Undervoltage at U y channel 1 Undervoltage at U BL20 PF 24VDC channel 1 Undervoltage at U BL20 E 1SWIRE voltage Usw Uswerr BL20 2RFID x transceiver voltage supply error 3 overvoltage not sent 4 overload BL20 BR 24VDC D overcurrent BL20 PF 120 230VAC D BL20 xDO 24VDC 0 5A x BL20 E 1SWIRE Overcurrent protective circuit breaker PKZEpe BL20 2RFID x Ident overcurrent supply of transceiver is switched off BL20 4AI U I short circuit SC BL20 E 8AI U I 4AI PT NI BL20 2AI PT NI 2 3 BL20 E 2CNT 2PWM short circuit at channel CH2 P1 DIAG CH4 P2 DIAG CH3 D1 DIAG CH5 D2 DIAG 5 over temperature not sent D301173 0713 BL20 Ethernet multiprotocol gateway Diagnosis in PROFINET Industri A Table 8 3 PROFINET Error code possible module diagnostics Error codes I module diag No Text 1 0 module diagnostic message of the module nostics ec 6 open circuit BL20 xAI 1 0 4 20MA open circuit BL20 2AI PT NI 2 3 BL20 2AI THERMO PI
233. ry for the TURCK GSDML files by browsing the directories and add the BL20 PROFINET gateway to the hardware catalog Figure 9 4 Install GSD files Install GSD Files from the directory C Users scheuech Desktop PROFINET Browse Release GSDML V2 25 TURCK BL20 E Gw EN 20121220 010100 xml v GSDML V2 2 TURCK BL20 E Gw PN 20121220 010000 ml 12 20 2012 01 00 00 AM V2 2 English Ge GSDML V2 2 TURCK FGEN 20120907 010000 xml 03 07 2012 01 00 00 4M V2 2 English Ge 12 20 2012 01 01 004M V2 25 English Ge luages zj m Install Show Log Select All Deselect All Close Help D301173 0713 BL20 Ethernet multiprotocol gateway Application example The new gateway can now be found under PROFINET IO Additional Field Devices I O TURCK Figure 9 5 BL20 gateway in the hardware catalog Suchen nt ail Profile Standard z HE PROFIBUS DP E PROFIBUS PA S82 PROFINET IO H Additional Field Devices vo TURCK BL20 E analog input zy analog output digital input digital output E empty slot E power technology xgg BL20 E Gw PN FGEN E Gateway E HMI 1 0 E Network Components E Sensors Switching devices SIMATIC 300 SIMATIC 400 SIMATIC PC Based Control 300 400 8 SIM
234. s FCs PROFINET IO Controller supports RT IRT Chg 7 Press F1 to get Help 5 Inthe dialog Properties Ethernet Interface define the IP address and the subnet mask for the S7 CPU and add the subnet using the New button Figure 9 7 Properties Ethernet inter face 9 6 If a subnet is selected the next available addresses are suggested IP address 192 168 1 3 ES Do not use router Subnet mask 255 255 255 0 C Use router Use different method to obtain IP address Subnet not networked D301173 0713 BL20 Ethernet multiprotocol gateway Application example Figure 9 8 s EZ Add new Ethernet subnet Name D301173 0713 BL20 Ethernet multiprotocol gateway S7 subnet ID fooe1 Jooor Project path Storage location of the project C Program Files lt 86 Siemens Step7 s 7proj BL20_E_G Author Date created 02 12 2013 11 43 43 AM Last modified 02 12 2013 11 43 43 AM Comment 9 7 Application example BL20 E GW EN with PROFINET S7 9 1 6 Adding PROFINET network nodes The nodes of the example network see page 9 2 are added to the PROFINET as follows FGEN FGEN IOM88 5001 device name turck fgen 107 FGEN XSG16 5001 device name turck fgen 90 Figure 9 9 Ih HW Config SIMATIC 300 1 Configuration BL20_E_GW_EN Sao Add network Qj Station Edit Ins
235. s to value 0 with the exception of analog output modules Error information is transmitted to the analog output modules Depending on their configuration these modules set their outputs either to 0 orto a default value or to maintain the original values The non configured analog output modules set their outputs to 0 11 hold current value The gateway maintains the actual output settings of all modules with the exception of analog output modules Error information is transmitted to the analog output modules Depending on their configuration these modules set their outputs either to 0 or to a default value or to maintain the original values The non configured analog output modules set their outputs to 0 1 Bit 0 reserved Bit 1 Disable all diagnosis 0 inactive A Diagnostic messages and alarms are generated 1 active Diagnostic messages and alarms are not generated D301173 0713 BL20 Ethernet multiprotocol gateway 8 11 Implementation of PROFINET Table 8 4 gateway parameters A default setting Byte Bitparameters Value Meaning 1 Bit 2 Disable output power diagnosis 0 inactive A A monitoring of the field supply V from the gateway and the Power Feeding modules is activated If this parameter is set but the parameter Diagnostics from modules see bit 1 deactivated then only the voltage supply at the gateway is monitored The voltage supply with V at is not mo
236. sccseccsccnccesccnecsscssccsscsscsscssccssessccsecssess 4 2 4 1 1 Summarized Diagnostiese 4 2 4 1 2 Schieduled Diagrostics noie tentent ritate isses dts td a eT RS 4 2 4 2 Classes and Instances of the EtherNet IP stations 4 2 1 EtherNet IP Standard Classes 4 2 2 Identity Object 0x01 4 2 3 Assembly Object in Process Catia IRE e cR Tu Mapping of process data ciet ette tere Hee peser eee cede ue dassissshtbanchsatelasigbegaalodsquapctdzsbeteensic 4 2 4 Connection Manager Object 0x06 sscssecsssecsssscsseccsssecsssccsscccssccessccessccsssecsssecsuseesscessescssscessecessccesseessusecsucessuceessecesseeesnseesee 4 2 5 TCP IP Interface Object OxF5 4 2 6 Ethernet Link Object OxF6 4 3 VSC Vendor Specific Classes sccssscccessccsccsscnssnssassseasssecusesesassccescodessesasatesschsosesstanasedessassessesdessosscosesestseessios 4 3 1 Class Instance of the VSCS cscsssssssessssssessessscssessessssssssssssesssssssssessscsucssessssensessescsassancesssaucsasssessscsseesesssesseessssneeseeseeasesacsaesseenees 4 3 2 Gateway Class VSC 100 64h 7 SX TASS tanc ze TERT Object Instance e EXels auta hnnan E RR 4 3 3 Process Data Class VSC102 66h erit tte tie eter aa E NAN ENa s Glass installe iura cimiterio oe iR cw iri concetti oed rur DEREN Object instance 1
237. sensessesccassancessssucsucsasesucsasssscssessessscesssssesseaneeseeseesaceaseasees Changing the IP address of a PC network interface Card scccccscsssecccscsscsescescsescsncsessescsencescssesenes 13 16 Changing the IP address in Windows ssssssssscsssescessesecssseecessseecsnseecesssscesnscessnssscessssecsnssscesss snsseecsnssecesnseesesssecesnseseensseeeunseeees 13 16 Changing the IP address via I O ASSISTANT V3 ssssssccssssccssssecssssecessssccsnscersnssseessscecsnsecsnssscessseesseecsnssscessseecunseecesssseesnseesease 13 18 Deactivating adapting the firewall in Windows eere esee ener eene nennen enses etna ts sas en ano 13 19 AGAressing via DHCP Dese M MP 13 22 Ident codes the BL20 modules reete eere eee eene ee eene tn senta asta snae en etas tn senses sensns eene en sensns eoano 13 24 Glossary 15 vi Index D301173 0713 BL20 Ethernet multiprotocol gateway Industri A 1 About this manual 1 1 DOCUMENTATION CONCEPE mec 1 2 1 1 1 Additional oTa Vot a1 Clo a ARX 1 2 1 2 Description of symbols used e 1 3 1 3 GENEL Als E A A E 1 4 1 3 1 Prescribed Uc 1 3 2 Notes concerning planning installation of this product 1 4 E Ao RAA 1 AA EE TEE 1 5 D301173 0713
238. separate voltage Gateways without integrated power supply Note i The gateways without integrated power supply unit need an additional power supply module bus refreshing module which feeds the gateway an the connected I O modules 2 2 2 Power distribution modules The power supply for gateways and I O modules is fed to the power distribution modules therefore it is not necessary to supply each individual module with a separate voltage Figure 2 2 Power distribu tion module 2 4 D301173 0713 BL20 Ethernet multiprotocol gateway BL20 components Industri A 2 2 3 Electronics modules standard product line The standard electronics modules contain the I O functions of the BL20 modules power distribution modules digital and analog input output modules and technology modules They are plugged onto the base modules and are not directly connected to the wiring and can be plugged or pulled when the station is being commissioned or for maintenance purposes without having to disconnect the field wiring from the base modules Figure 2 3 Electronics module in slice design left and in Block design right D301173 0713 BL20 Ethernet multiprotocol gateway 2 5 BL20 philosophy 2 2 4 ECOelectronics modules New ECONOMY modules with a high signal density and exceptionally low channel price expand the BL20 I O bus terminal system Depending on type up to 16 digital inputs and outputs can be c
239. sessscsscssscsecssscsscssscsssssccsscssccssesssssseseess 11 5 Ensuring electromagnetic compatibility 0 sssessscssssccssssecssssscssssccessseeessssecssssecessseeessneesssseseessesecesseceesnsessssnecesseeessnseseesneeees 11 5 Grounding of inactive metal components eese teen ttes nnn tts nnns notti no ttti ttts notione ttt nont tts notio nonni 11 5 PE connection esi recitare gren ieb egi Earth free operation as Mounting fails anaa aiiin iiiaae Eis eas aaea aE aS AESA EGEV ENESA EO NEN EETA KASA Aaa ar Ra SSi CADIDPIPREOQECIU DIE 11 7 Potential compensation Switching inductive loads 11 8 Protection against Electrostatic Discharge ESD ssssssssssssssssscssecssscecsssecsusccsnecssnscessecessecsssesensecesseeseseesaneesaneessueeeseecsaeesasees 11 8 BL20 Approvals for Zone 2 Division 2 Appendix Data image of the technology modules sccccccsssssscccscccsscsssccsescsssssseccsssccssessescsssscsscsseccssecesessssccsecees 1RS232 1RS485 modUule cccssesssessessesssssssssessesssessessessucsassssssuesseesssnsessesccassancessesucsucsssssssssessscssessessnssnssssasessseeseesucsaseaseasesseenseaseesess SS SULT CULL Stet AA AERE AEAT EE te E Ncc in Tetas Ete ADEM EA S WIRE S11 OCG E RETE n Encoder PWM moduleBL20 E 2CNT 2PWM s RFID moule BL20 2RFID S A c ssessessssssessessscsscssessssssssseesesssssscsusssucsucssesss
240. sign 1 12Bit le amp justfied 0 B040 3 1 3 BL20 1AHU 10 0 10VDC channel 0 activate 1 deactivate B060 0 1 4 BL20 2AI THERMO PI mains suppression 0 50Hz 1 60Hz B060 1 1 4 BL20 2AI THERMO PI value representation D Integer 15Bit sign 1 12Bit left justified B060 2 1 4 BL20 2AI THERMO PI diagnostic D release 1 block B060 3 1 4 BL20 2AI THERMO PI channel 0 activate 1 deactivate A 2 4 will be written to register 0xB040 which results from the station s the parameter byte assignment Figure 7 27 File Edit View Project Build Online Debug Tools Window Help Setting the ini Us G S B xA are tialization chan Devices ax Start Page J Device fj BL20 E GW EN B PLC PRG GVL f Modbus TCP Master X BL20 EMP E s iis i nel for the f Device CoDeSys Control Win Modbus Slave Channel Modbus Slave rnit odbusTCPSlave Configuration ModbusTCPSlave I O Mapping status 1 j parameter iza E PLCLogic Line Access Type WRITE Offset Default Value Length Comment tion Application 1 WriteMultiple 16 B040 45 4 1 parameters ov i Library Manager E PLc PRG PRG Task Configuration Access Type Write Multiple Registers Function Code 16 MainTask Register Offset TEES Ethernet Ethernet Modbus TCP Master Length fj BL20 E Gw EN N Initialization Value Comment Tia aM n t Move up l Move down new Delete l Edit D Pous 8 Devices L D301173 0713 BL
241. sssucsoesssacs 5 9 5 4 POCESS ata neue IMP 5 11 5 4 1 Setting OUTPUTS cc 5 4 2 Example program D301173 0713 BL20 Ethernet multiprotocol gateway 5 1 Application example BL20 E GW EN with EtherNet IP Allen Bradley 5 1 General The following example shows detailed information about the connection of a BL20 station for EtherNet IP to an Allen Bradley PLC 5 1 1 Used hard software Hardware Hardware used in this example Allen Bradley PLC 1769 L30 ER A Compact Logix5330ER Controller BL20 E GW EN gt VN 03 00 IP 192 168 1 16 Slot 1 BL20 2DI 24VDC P Slot 2 BL20 4DI 24VDC P Slot 3 BL20 1AI U 10 0 10VDC Slot 4 BL20 2AI THERMO PI Slot 5 BL20 2DO 24VDC 0 5A P Slot 6 BL20 E 8DO 24VDC 0 5A P Software Software used in this example E RS Logix 5000 used to configure the controller and the other network hosts 5 2 D301173 0713 BL20 Ethernet multiprotocol gateway Network configuration Industri A 5 2 Network configuration BL20 stations are delivered in the address mode PGM DHCP and can be reached using IP address 192 168 1 254 Note Fr In order to build up the communication between the BL20 station and a PLC PC ora network interface card both devices have to be hosts in the same network To achieve this you have either E toadjustthe gateway s IP address via BootP DHCP etc for integrating it in
242. standard input process data compressed Object Instance 3 diagnostic instance sse E Object Instance 4 COS CYCLIC instance ssescsescsssecssescsssccssesssssecsscscsssecsscecssccesseecsneessuccesneesssseseesaseessseccaneeeseeceseeesasees 4 3 4 Miscellaneous Parameters Class VSC 126 vscecsssssssesssssssssscsscsscsesssssssscssssssssessssessssessessssessessssssssssessssessessessessssesssssssesseses Instance 1 port 1 Instance 2 port 2 wc sessessscsessecsessecssessesssssssssssscesssssescenscssssscsssesssssesessssssscsssssessueeseeseesssenceasesseenses D301173 0713 BL20 Ethernet multiprotocol gateway 4 1 Implementation of EtherNet IP 4 1 4 1 1 4 1 2 4 2 Diagnostic messages via the process data Besides the evaluation of diagnostic data via Explicit Messages BL20 with EtherNet IP offers the possibility of mapping diagnostic data into the process data see also the stations process data mappings page 4 8 ff 2 different forms of diagnostic data handling are provided E summarized diagnostics E Scheduled Diagnostics Summarized Diagnostics The summarized diagnostic data mode will send back 1 bit for each slice within the station This bit will be 0 if there are no diagnostic flags set on the slice If there are any diagnostic events on the device the bit will be set to 1 The diagnostic bits are placed at the end ofthe input data The diagnostic data start WORD aligned s
243. susessceessceesneessuceesneessnseess 10 6 Creating potential Groups eism ient rem ier estive i E rediit seriei etu dd ive ta Sent Mere e Pede uendere eere 10 7 C rall cross connection x et tremite tete tese eer esac esac im Were irte title eve e tee 10 7 Direct wiring of relay modules ssssssssccssssecsssescessscecssssccssseecessecccsnseecssseecsnssscessseecssseecsnssessnseecesssseesnseecenseseesnseecsnsescensessanseeeet 10 9 Protecting the service interface on the gateway esee serene eee eene enne en seen e annees seen s tense ttes een stnu 10 10 Plugging and pulling electronics modules 4 eese eese entente eene ente ntes tastes tassa tss tn sess tns eossouao 10 10 Extending an existing station ceee crecen eee eerte e eene en esee n sso thee e tenes assess stesse sese ep e senes eee seen s tene sna 10 10 Firmware download 10 11 Guidelines for Electrical Installation General notes IC ANS E E Cable rout sosed E I E T Lightning protection M 11 3 Transmission TOC abscesses catsesccasiccesssanssssvaceesscctscenciansscissansdsusensbgiagienbseganyanshusbonsat seccodecasseosdansuss shabsiastsncbsndonsedbnsqeapssansaendzabovaceadecc ens 11 3 irn ia LT ELT Per C H 11 4 GS Sal sas T 11 4 Electromagnetic compatibility EMC cccsscsssssssecssssscsssscsses
244. t Mc n don b UD e teu 43 3 9 4 Technology modules 48 3 10 Diagnostic messages of the moduleS e ssseesoesesoesocoesoesesoesosoesoesesoesoesesoesesocsoeeesoesesossoseesoreesoesosossorossoroseoe 57 3 10 1 Power distribution modules ee A tonos tnos RE nott notti ttti notti nones 57 3 10 2 Digital input modules retener ceres e Ue IE EU PORE SE AE SHE ee ETE SAC rn OTHER Eae EEEE 3 103 Analogi npu t modu les etie ette cinere teet erae eec deed diee petet doter dee ecep eee 3 10 4 Digital output modules 3 10 5 A Analog output modules 3 10 6 Technology modules sss 3 2 D301173 0713 BL20 Ethernet multiprotocol gateway Function of the gateway Industri A 3 1 Function of the gateway The BL20 E GW EN gt VN 03 00 is used as multiprotocol interface between the BL20 system and the Ethernet protocols Modbus TCP EtherNet IP and PROFINET 3 1 1 Version overview Please observe that the previous version of the gaetway did only support the Modbus TCP protocol Version lt VN 03 00 BL20 gateway supports only the Ethernet protocol Modbus TCP Version gt VN 03 00 BL20 gateway supports the Ethernet protocols Modbus TCP EtherNet IP PROFINET Note i The multiprotocol gateway replaces the Modbus TCP version and is fully compatible Only the LED designation has changed Please find detailed information under LED
245. t channel 13 16 BL20 32DO 24VDC 0 5A P Table 3 47 Diagnosticbyte Bit Diagnosis BL20 32DO 24VDC 0 5A P n 0 Overcurrent short circuit channel 1 4 1 Overcurrent short circuit channel 5 8 2 Overcurrent short circuit channel 9 12 3 Overcurrent short circuit channel 13 16 4 Overcurrent short circuit channel 17 20 5 Overcurrent short circuit channel 21 24 6 Overcurrent short circuit channel 25 28 7 Overcurrent short circuit channel 29 32 3 62 D301173 0713 BL20 Ethernet multiprotocol gateway Diagnostic messages of the modules 3 10 5 Analog output modules Industri A E BL20 2AOH Table 3 48 Diagnostic byte Bit Diagnosis BL20 2AOH I n 0 Value above upper limit Display of a measurement range exceeding limit values according to parameterization 1 Open circuit Displays an open circuit in the signal line 2 invalid value The output value exceeds the values which the module is able to interpret 3 value below lower limit Display of a measurement range underflow limit values according to parameterization 4 HART status error The connected HART device set a bit in the HART status information status polling 5 HART communication error The channel does not allow communication with the HART device 6 Invalid parameter 7 Hardware error Shows common errors of the module hardware The return analog value in case
246. t e 5 0c3 0c2 0c 1 oco 08 1 08 0 Word2 00 15 0D 14 00 13 0D 12 00 11 0D 10 00 9 00 8 00 7 0D 6 00 5 0D4 0D 3 0D2 00 1 0D 0 Word3 0E 15 0E 14 0E 13 0E 12 0E 11 0E 10 0E 9 0E 8 0E 7 0E 6 0E5 0E 4 0E3 0E2 0E 1 0E 0 Word4 0E 31 0E 30 0E29 0E28 0E27 0E26 0E25 0E24 0E23 0E22 0E 21 0E 20 0E 19 0E 18 0E 17 0E 16 For detailed information about the status word please see online help The control word is mapped into the process data but has no function for the standard EtherNet IP gateways It can only be used in the EtherNet IP gateways with DeviceNet master see online help Process input data 5 Words 1 3 I O map for output data Ss ene i res e e np e ngo ee eg eges e gn ee ipa eiit eges ie e en quan icu en Word0 0A 15 04 14 DA 13 0A 12 0A 11 OA 10 0A9 0A8 OAT 0A 6 0A5 0A 4 0A3 0A2 0A 1 0A 0 Wordi 0G7 06 6 065 0G4 063 0G 2 0G 1 0G 0 F 1 OF 0 For detailed information about the status word please see online help The control word is mapped into the process data but has no function for the standard EtherNet IP gateways It can only be used in the EtherNet IP gateways with DeviceNet master see online help Process output data 2 Words D301173 0713 BL20 Ethernet multiprotocol gateway 5 9 Application example BL20 E GW EN with EtherNet IP Allen Bradley For the example station the mapping in RS Logix looks as follows Fig ure 5 12 RSLogix 5000 BL E GW EN MP 1769 L35E Controller
247. ta memory of data memory the BL20 modules Modbus Function request Code ees ReadRedister outpu data Write Register Control Status ReadRedister Diagn jo Write Register Read Bits Coils Write Bits Coils D301173 0713 BL20 Ethernet multiprotocol gateway 6 5 Implementation of Modbus TCP 6 2 Implemented Modbus functions The BL20 gateways for Modbus TCP support the following functions for accessing process data parameters diagnostics and other services Table 6 2 Function codes Implemented functions No Function Description 1 Read Coils Serves for reading multiple output bits 2 Read Discrete Inputs Serves for reading multiple input bits 3 Read Holding Registers Serves for reading multiple output registers 4 Read Input Registers Serves for reading multiple input registers 5 Write Single Coil Serves for writing a single output bit 6 Write Single Register Serves for writing a single output register 15 Write Multiple Coils Serves for writing multiple output bits 16 Write Multiple Registers Serves for writing multiple output registers 23 Read Write Multiple Registers Reading and writing of multiple registers 6 6 D301173 0713 BL20 Ethernet multiprotocol gateway Modbus registers 6 3 Modbus registers Industri A Note IH The Table 6 5 page 6 14 shows the register mapping for the different Modbus addressing methods
248. te Run mode the l O data mapping of the FGEN stations is shown in the Controller Tags Figure 5 10 Controller Tags BS RSLogix 5000 BL2 E GW EM MP 1769 L30ER 20 12 Controller Tags BL2 E GW EN MP controller File Edit View Search Logic Communications Tools Window Help Wak 5 8 Oe amp t e ow v amp amp m e v i 9 Rem Run DB B Run Mode RH Path AB_ETH 1 192 168 1 58 CompactBus 0 fl HRR F M Controler Ok EE No Edits a eed N Aan A ey A Meme KD Ase E Scope f BL2 E GW EN v Show All Tags v Z amp 3 Controller BLz E GW EN MP Controler Tags Name zal Value ForceMask Style Data Type Description Constant _ C3 Controller Fault Handler BL20 E Gw EN MP C cd m AB ETHERNET Power Up Handler F BL20 E Gw EN MP CDala ER taa Hes SINTI400 3 Tasks BL20 E Gw EN MP1 FER fiona AB ETHERNET o 3 g MainTask BL20 E Gw EN MP I Data PE e Decimal INTIS amp MainProgram Unschedkded Pros BL20 E GW EN MP LData 0 1 Decimal INT 5 Motion Groups BL20 E GW EN MP 1Dala 1 32761 Decimal INT E Ungrouped Axes BL20_E_GW_EN_MP I Data 2 2700 Decimal INT E Add On Instructions BL20 E Gw EN MPLData 3 2700 Decimal INT amp Data Types BL20_E_GW_EN_MP l Data 4 1 Decimal INT L a ae m BL20_E_GW_EN_MP O Um m AB ETHERNET o Cj Add On Defined BL20
249. te ensures that the BL20 station remains secure on the mounting rail even when subjected to vibration Figure 2 8 End plate 2 2 7 End bracket A second end bracket to the left of the gateway is necessary as well as the one mounted into the end plate to secure the station Figure 2 9 End bracket Note The end plate and two end brackets are delivered with the gateway 2 8 D301173 0713 BL20 Ethernet multiprotocol gateway BL20 components 2 2 8 Jumpers Jumpers QVRs are used to bridge a connection level of a 4 wire base module They can be used to connect potentials in relay modules bridging the relay roots thus considerably reducing the amount of wiring Figure 2 10 z Jumpers S 2 2 9 Marking material Labels for labeling BL20 electronics modules Markers for colored identification of connection levels of BL20 base modules E Dekafix connector markers for numbering the mounting slots on BL20 base modules Figure 2 11 Xx D301173 0713 BL20 Ethernet multiprotocol gateway 2 9 BL20 philosophy 2 2 10 Shield connection gateway If the gateway is wired directly to the fieldbus it is possible to shield the connection using a special gateway shielding connection attachment BS3511 KLBUEA 3 1 5 Figure 2 12 Shield connec tion gateway 2 10 D301173 0713 BL20 Ethernet multiprotocol gateway Industri A 3 Properties gateway and I O modules
250. te manual for the module D301224 BL20 l O MODULES BL20 E 2CNT 2PWM chapter 2 E BL20 2RFID S see RFID documentation www turck de 3 56 D301173 0713 BL20 Ethernet multiprotocol gateway Diagnostic messages of the modules Industri A 3 10 Diagnostic messages of the modules 3 10 1 Power distribution modules BL20 BR 24VDC D Table 3 29 Diagnostic byte Bit Diagnosis BL20 BR 24VDC D n 0 Module bus voltage warning 1 reserved 2 Undervoltage field supply 3 reserved BL20 PF 24VDC Table 3 30 Diagnostic byte Bit Diagnosis BL20 PF 24VDC n 0 reserved 1 reserved 2 Undervoltage field supply reserved BL20 PF 120 230VAC D Table 3 31 Diagnostic byte Bit Diagnosis BL20 PF 120 230VAC D n 0 reserved 1 reserved 2 Undervoltage field supply reserved D301173 0713 BL20 Ethernet multiprotocol gateway 3 57 Properties gateway and I O modules 3 10 2 Digital input modules BL20 4DI NAMUR Table 3 32 Diagnosticbyte Bit Diagnosis BL20 4DI NAMUR n 0 short circuit sensor 1 1 open circuit sensor 1 2 short circuit sensor 2 3 open circuit sensor 2 4 short circuit sensor 3 5 open circuit sensor 3 6 short circuit sensor 4 7 open circuit sensor 4 3 10 3 Analog input modules BL20 1AI I 0 4 20MA Table 3 33 Diagnosticbyte Bit Diagnosis BL20 1AI I 0 4 20MA A Only in the mea n channel 1 0 measu
251. ter name Value A default 1 0 setting Stop bits 0 1 bitA 1 2 bit 2 1 Parity 00 none 01 odd A The parity bitis set so that the total number of bits data bits plus parity bit set to 1 is odd 10 even The parity bit is set so that the total number of bits data bits plus parity bit set to 1 is odd Data bits 0 7A The number of data bits is 7 128 The number of data bits is 8 to 5 Flow control 00 none A Data flow control is switched off 01 XON XOFF Software handshake XON XOFF is switched on 10 RTS CTS Hardware handshake RTS CTS is switched on 7 6 reserved XON character 0 255 17 A XON character This character is used to start the transmission of data from the data terminal device if the software handshake is active XOFF character 0 255 19 A XOFF character This character is used to start the transmission of data from the data terminal device if the software handshake is active D301173 0713 BL20 Ethernet multiprotocol gateway 3 49 Properties gateway and I O modules BL20 1RS485 422 Table 3 26 Byte Bit Parameter name Module param eters Value A default 0 3to0 setting Data rate 0000 300 bps 0001 600 bps 0010 1200 bps 0100 2400 bps 0101 4800 bps 0110 9600 bps A 0111 14400 bps 1000 19200 bps 1001 28800 bps 1010 38400 bps 1011 2 57600 bps 11002
252. th E PLC PRG PRG Md S Task Configuration endor sAMuendonus fteway _ mainTask Name Ethernet Ethernet Fieldbusses levice Modbus_TCP_Master Mo Ww Modbus i 5 Modbus TCP Slave 35 Smart Software Solutions GmbH ud ix ce C ES Ele Edit View Project Build Online Debug Tools Window Help Ea EE oc 83 X IdAtSIERSI T18S810 y n UB StartPage ff Device XS 3 BL20EMP 3 S fj Device CoDesys Control winv3 Communication Settings Applications Files Log _ PLC settings PLC shell Users and Groups Access Rights Status Information pie dian Select the network path to the controller o fig Library Manager mali setactvepath 8 PLc PRG PRG glye Gateway 1 S Task Configuration fj scHEUERNBW7 0000 0703 active maintask L Ethernet Ethernet Add device 3 Modbus TCP Master Modbus TCP Mi Scan network Filter Target ID ro Common Access control Build Sorting order Add Object Name M Add Device E G BL20 E GW EN 1 Scan For Devices Fullname Modbus TCP Slave Device Ethernet Modbus TCP Master pour Object type Device L Update Device Open with Device Editor T Edit Object Edit Object With Device Configuration gt LJ wv IF Dont save network path in proiect D301173 0713 BL20 Ethernet multiprotocol gateway 7 11 Application example BL20 E GW EN for Modbus TCP CoDeSys Win V3 2 Again a double click onto the slave in t
253. the BL20 modules 10 4 Module Communication bytes Nominal current on the module bus consumption at the module bus BL20 32DI 24VDC P 4 30mA BL20 1AI I 0 4 20MA 3 41 mA BL20 2AI I 0 4 20MA 5 35mA BL20 1AI U 10 0 10VDC 3 41 mA BL20 2AI U 10 0 10VDC 5 35 mA BL20 2AI PT NI 2 3 5 45 mA BL20 2AI THERMO PI 5 45 mA BL20 4AI U I 9 30mA BL20 E 8AI U I AAI PT NI 9 50 mA BL20 2DO 24VDC 0 5A P 2 32mA BL20 2DO 24VDC 0 5A N 2 32mA BL20 2DO 24VDC 2A P 2 33mA BL20 2DO 120 230VAC 0 5A 2 35mA BL20 A4DO 24VDC 0 5A P 2 30mA BL20 E 8DO 24VDC 0 5 A P 2 15 mA BL20 E 16DO 24VDC 0 5A P 2 25mA BL20 16DO 24VDC 0 5A P 3 120 mA BL20 32DO 24VDC 0 5A P 5 30mA BL20 1AO I 0 4 20MA 4 39 mA BL20 2AO I 0 4 20MA 7 40 mA BL20 2AO U 10 0 10VDC 7 43 mA BL20 E 4AO U I 9 50 mA BL20 2DO R NC 1 28mA BL20 2DO R NO 1 28mA BL20 2DO R CO 1 28 mA BL20 E 2CNT 2PWM 9 30mA BL20 1RS232 9 140 mA BL20 1RS485 422 9 60 mA D301173 0713 BL20 Ethernet multiprotocol gateway Module arrangement Industri A Table 10 1 Module Communication bytes Nominal current Communica on the module bus consumption at the tion bytes and module bus nominal current consumption of the BL20 modules BL20 1SSI 9 50 mA BL20 2RFID x 9 30 mA BL20 E 1SWIRE 9 60 mA D301173 0713 BL20 Ethernet multiprotocol gateway 10 5 Guidelines for station planning
254. the device sends no further DHCP requests PROFINET This mode assures a PROFINET compliant operation of the modules Note If a DHCP server is used within the network problems may occur during IP assignment In this case both the DHCP server as well as the PROFINET controller via DCP try an IP address assignment 3 5 9 F Reset Reset to factory setting Figure 3 12 F Reset 1 OREO RAG EE MODE vr UuSEPCZE ADDRESS off gt on This mode sets all device settings back to the default values and deletes all data in the device s internal flash Note i This setting is no operation mode Please set the device to another mode after having reset the IP address to the default values 3 22 D301173 0713 BL20 Ethernet multiprotocol gateway Address assignment 3 5 10 Addressing via I O ASSISTANT 3 FDT DTM The software tool I O ASSISTANT 3 FDT DTM enables direct access to the Ethernet network via the Ethernet cable The IP address as well as the subnet mask of the TURCK Ethernet stations can be changed accordingto the application by using the Busaddress Management function of the BL Service Ethernet interface TCP IP in the software I O ASSISTANT 3 FDT DTM Figure 3 13 Busaddress management File Edit View Project Device Extras Window Help D Suse Bie O29 0 9 Bas Device tag SB HOST PC TCP IP Connect
255. the group diagnosis In order to identify the modules which send diagnostic information the group diagnosis register is read out The group diagnosis register always follows the Status word of the gateway in the register mapping Its position thus depends on the station configuration In this example the group diagnosis register is register 0x0005 It contains on bit per module in the BL20 station which displays whether the module sends diagnostic information or not The order of the bits in the registers corresponds to the order of the I O modules within the BL20 station Figure 7 34 Group diagnosis register 7 30 2 Modbus report 2 1 Station description Station address 192 168 1 112 Adr Slot Name TAG Data Size In Data Size Out x BL20 E GW EN gt VN 03 00 192 168 1 112 BL20 16 bit 0 bit E GW EN gt VN 03 00 1 BL20 2DI 24VDC P 01 BL20 2DI 2 bit 0 bit 24VDC P 2 BL20 4DI 24VDC P 02 BL20 4DI 4 bit 0 bit 24VDC P 3 BL20 1Al U 10 0 10VDC 03 BL20 1AI U 16 bit 0 bit 10 0 10VDC 4 BL20 2AI THERMO PI 04 BL20 2AI 32 bit 0 bit THERMO PI 5 BL20 2DO 24VDC 0 5A P 05 BL20 2DO 0 bit 2 bit 24VDC 0 5A P 6 BL20 E 8DO 24VDC 0 5A P 06 BL20 E 8DO Obit 8 bit 24VDC 0 5A P Local I O data incl status control 4 Words 1 Word Summarized diagnostics 1 Word 0 Words Total size for in out data rounded on full words 6 Words 1 Word For detailed information about status control word see online help 2 2
256. the slave is NOT in data exchange mode Byte 5 6 SD Sx Communication slave x Info field for the individual indication of the release of the slave diagnostics as error message If the SDinFoA is set for single diagnostics this bit field indicates the error as soon as the slave diagnostic message of the slave Sx is triggered 0 OK No error is present or diagnostics function has been deactivated via the parameter setting 1 Offline A diagnostics message is present Byte 7 8 PKZeppSX Overcurrent protective circuit breaker slave x Info field for the individual indication of the tripping a motor protective circuit breaker PKZ as error message If the PKZ inroA is set for single diagnostics this bit field indicates the error as soon as the PKZ of the slave Sx has tripped 0 OK The PKZ of the slave has not tripped or diagnostics function has been deactivated via the parameter setting 1 tripped The PKZ of the slave has tripped Note The error messages Unuyernr TY Pepe TYPerSX PKZerr PKZerSX SDerr and SDergSX can be deactivated by a respective parameterization E BL20 E 2CNT 2PWM see separate manual for this module D301224 E BL20 2RFID S see RFID documentation www turck de 3 68 D301173 0713 BL20 Ethernet multiprotocol gateway Industri A 4 Implementation of EtherNet IP 4 1 Diagnostic messages via the process data ccccscccsccscccsccscccecc
257. tings atewa onfiguratio Gateway Diagnostics eo 192 168 1 112 Ethernet Statistics Netmask m 255 255 255 0 Change Admin Password Default Gateway 192 168 1 1 MAC Address 00 07 46 80 00 01 LLDP MAC Address 1 00 07 46 80 00 02 LLDP MAC Address 2 00 07 46 80 00 03 For comments or questions please email TURCK Support URL http www turck com Revision V1 0 0 0 D301173 0713 BL20 Ethernet multiprotocol gateway Web server remote access configuration Version gt VN 03 00 3 7 5 Gateway Configuration The Gateway Configuration page serves for parameterizing the device s fieldbus interface Figure 3 22 Web server e P http 1921681112 d D B X F Gateway Configuration Gateway Datei Bearbeiten Ansicht Favoriten Extras 2 Configuration BL20 E GW EN Embedded Website of BL20 Modular I O Module Gateway Configuration gt Home Network Configuration Protocols NOTE A check mark next to a protocol means it is disabled TGateway Diagnostics Ethernet Statistics Links EtherNet IP h Admin P d Change Admin Passwort Modbus TCP PROFINET Web Server EtherNet IP Configuration GW Control Word Enabled v GW Status Word Enabled Scheduled Diagnostics Disabled v Summarized Diagnostics Disabled Submit Reset Reboot Reset to Factory Defaults For comments or questions please email TURCK Support URL http wvw turck com Revision V1 0 0 0
258. tion Parameters have to be set according to the actual station configuration That means The in and output sizes have to match the sizes definitely required by the station This required in and output size can be determined as follows Create a station report for the station using the TURCK DTMs for BLxx see also Figure 5 4 EtherNet IP report PLC configuration page 5 5 OR Read outthe correct size of in and output data via Assembly Class 0x04 Instance 0x67 Attr 0x04 and Assembly Class 0x04 Instance 0x68 Attr 0x04 Figure 5 4 EtherNet IP 1 EtherNet IP report report PLC T configuration 1 1 Station description A Datatoenteinto g Station address 192 168 1 112 assembly instances in RS Adr Slot Name TAG Descr Data Size In Data Size Out Lodi Slot 0 BL20 E GW EN gt VN 03 00 192 168 1 112 BL20 Term0A 16 bit 16 bit ogIx E GW EN gt VN 03 00 Slot 1 BL20 2DI 24VDC P 01 BL20 2DI Term0B 2 bit 0 bit 24VDC P Slot 2 BL20 4DI 24VDC P 02 BL20 4DI Term0C 4 bit 0 bit 24VDC P Slot 3 BL20 1AI U 10 0 10VDC 03 BL20 1AI U Term0D 16 bit 0 bit 10 0 10VDC Slot 4 BL20 2AI THERMO PI 04 BL20 2AI Term0E 32 bit 0 bit THERMO PI Slot 5 BL20 2DO 24VDC 0 5A P 05 BL20 2DO TermOF 0 bit 2 bit 24VDC 0 5A P Slot 6 BL20 E 8DO 24VDC 0 5A P 06 BL20 E 8DO Term0G 0 bit 8 bit 24VDC 0 5A P Local I O data incl status control 5 Words 2 Words Total size for in out data rounded on full words 5 Words 2 Wor
259. tion The modules communicate with the gateway via the module bus which is independent of the fieldbus MSB Most Significant bit Ping Implementation of an echo protocol used for testing whether a particular host is operating properly and is reachable on the network from the testing host D301173 0713 BL20 Ethernet multiprotocol gateway Industri A PLC Programmable Logic Controller Potential compensation The alignment of electrical levels of electrical components and external conductive components by means of an electrical connection Potential free Galvanic isolation of the reference potentials in I O modules of the control and load circuits Potential linked Electrical connection of the reference potentials in I O modules of the control and load circuits Protective earth Electrical conductor for protection against dangerous shock currents Generally represented by PE protective earth R Radiation coupling A radiation coupling appears when an electromagnetic wave hits a conductive structure Voltages and currents are induced by the collision Typical sources of interference are for example sparking gaps spark plugs commutators from electric motors and transmitters e g radio that are operated near to conducting structures Reaction time The time required in a bus system between a reading operation being sent and the receipt of an answer It is the time required by an input module to change a signal at
260. tion PLC_PRG Counter value 1 RD i Library Manager xReset AIWO wi E PLC_PRG PRG 5 9 Status IW1 WORD Task Configuration Bit 0 D2 0 BOOL MainTask Bit1 X2 1 BOOL fj Ethernet Ethernet Bit2 amp DQ 2 BOOL fJ Modbus_TCP_Master Modbus TRH 7 Bit3 amp D2 3 BOOL J BL20 E Gw EN Modbus CP S Bit4 D2 4 BOOL Bit5 e DO 5 BOOL Bit 6 1X2 6 BOOL Bit7 1X2 7 BOOL Bit 8 D3 0 BOOL Bit 9 e DG 1 BOOL Bit 10 IX3 2 BOOL Bit 11 D3 3 BOOL 9 Bit 12 D3 4 BOOL Bit 13 D3 5 BOOL Bit 14 D3 6 BOOL Bit 15 6DG 7 BOOL al m J IEC Objects Variable Mapping Type BL20 E GW EN Insta ModbusTCPSlave Create new variable Mapto existing variable 4 w Messages S Ot IT S P Pous s Devices E E QT eT T Program loaded Program unchanged Current user nobody D301173 0713 BL20 Ethernet multiprotocol gateway 7 29 Application example BL20 E GW EN for Modbus TCP CoDeSys Win V3 The message has to be interpreted as follows Status register 96lW 1 bit0 2 1 status message DiagWarn active diagnosis at least one module at the gateway sends a diagnostic message see also Register 0x100C Gateway status page 6 16 Register Byte Bit7 Bit 6 Bit 5 Bit4 Bit 3 Bit 2 Bit 1 Bit 0 0x0004 0 U I O Cfg Diag low Warn Warn 1 FCE MB 1 0 1 0 Uys Uys Wdg CFG COM low high Evaluation of
261. tion status Table 6 6 Bit Name Description Register 100Ch Gateway status Gateway 15 reserved 14 Force Mode Active Error The Force Mode is activated which means the actual output values may no match the ones defined and sent by the field bus 13 reserved 12 Modbus Wdog Error A timeout occurred in the modbus communication Module bus 11 I O Cfg Modified Error The l O configuration has be changed and is no longer compatible 10 1 0 Communication Lost No Communication on the module bus Error Voltage errors 9 Uy too low System supply voltage too low lt 18 V DC 8 Uy too high System supply voltage too high gt 30 V DC 7 U too low Load voltage too low 18 V DC 6 reserved 5 reserved 4 reserved Warnings 3 I O Cfg Modified Warning The station configuration has changed 0 I O Diags Active Warning At least one l O module sends active diagnosis 6 16 D301173 0713 BL20 Ethernet multiprotocol gateway Modbus registers Industri A 6 3 3 Register 0x1130h Modbus Connection Mode This register defines the behavior of the Modbus connections Table 6 7 Bit Name Register Description 0x1130h Modbus 15to2 reserved Connection Mode 1 MB ImmediateWritePermission A default 0 With the first write access a write authorization for the respective Modbus connection setting is requested If this request fails an exception response with exception code Oth is generated If the request is accepted
262. to your own network for detailed information about the different possibilities for address setting please read chapter 3 5 Address assignment page 3 15 or E tochange the IP address of the used PC or network interface card for detailed information please read the Changing the IP address of a PC network interface card page 13 16 5 2 1 Configuration of the network in RS Logix 5000 The EtherNet IP hosts PLC EtherNet IP interface I O stations have to be configured using the software RSLogix 5000 in this example version 15 from Rockwell Automation Start RS Logix and open a new project using the File menu Configuration of the controller 1 Enterthe information related to the controller depending on your configuration as well as a name for the project Figure 5 1 iNew Controller E Configuration of the con troller Vendor Allen Bradley Type 1769 L30ER CompactLogix5330ER Controller v Revision 20 v Name BL20 E GW EN MP Description Create In C RSLogix 5000 Projects Security Authority No Protection Y 2 Your project will be opened offline D301173 0713 BL20 Ethernet multiprotocol gateway 5 3 Application example BL20 E GW EN with EtherNet IP Allen Bradley Configuring the BL20 station 3 Openthe context menu by right clicking Ethernet and select New Module in order to add the BL20 station to the network 4 Open Communications and select the entry Generi
263. uleBL20 E 2CNT 2PWM 13 1 5 RFID moule BL20 2RFID S A eren nnne nnne nnne nennt nnns notti notti AAEE EENE ESAE ESNE nonet notis nonni 13 2 Changing the IP address of a PC network interface card eere eee eee reete neret nannte 13 16 13 2 1 Changing the IP address in Windows eerte tentent tenentis tte nnno tto nono tts ttis tts ttts tto nonus 13 16 13 2 2 Changing the IP address via l O ASSISTANT V3 teen tte nette nettes ntn tto no tttts ntis notte noit tts notte notis nones 13 18 13 3 Deactivating adapting the firewall in WindOwWs ceres eese reete eee en nere snas nena ta sas en aso a etae 13 19 13 4 ACOressing ViaiIDHCP dineros csonsescsesdsecsseaees 13 22 13 5 Ident codes the BL20 MOduIes ccsccccssssessescsecsccssecsscsscssecssccsesssccsesssccsecsescsecssessecsesssccsesssessesseees 13 24 D301173 0713 BL20 Ethernet multiprotocol gateway 13 1 Appendix 13 1 Data image of the technology modules 13 1 1 1RS232 1RS485 module Process input data Process input data is data from the connected field device that is transmitted via the BLxx 1RS xxx module to the PLC The BLxx 1RSxxx module sends the data received by the device into a 128 byte receive buffer The module then transmits the data segmented via the module bus and the gateway to the PLC The transmission is realized in a 8 byte format which is structured as follows 1 status b
264. uration The TURCK software I O ASSISTANT FDT DTM offer the possibility to create a Modbus report for each Modbus station which shows the in and output data mapping as well as the parameter and diagnostic data mappings for the respective station Modbus mapping I O ASSISTANT Figure 7 15 Modbus report Mapping of in and output data 2 Modbus report 2 1 Station description Station address 192 168 1 112 Adr Slot Name TAG Data Size In Data Size Out 0 BL20 E GW EN gt VN 03 00 192 168 1 112 BL20 16 bit 0 bit E GW EN gt VN 3 00 1 BL20 2DI 24VDC P 01 BL20 2DI 2 bit 0 bit 24VDC P 2 BL20 4DI 24VDC P 02 BL20 4DI 4 bit 0 bit 24VDC P 3 BL20 1AI U 10 0 10VDC 03 BL20 1AI U 16 bit 0 bit 10 0 10VDC 4 BL20 2AI THERMO PI 04 BL20 2AI 32 bit 0 bit THERMO PI 5 BL20 2DO 24VDC 0 5A P 05 BL20 2DO 0 bit 2 bit 24VDC 0 5A P 6 BL20 E 8DO 24VDC 0 5A P 06 BL20 E 8DO 0 bit 8 bit 24VDC 0 5A P Local I O data incl status control 4 Words 1 Word Summarized diagnostics 1 Word 0 Words Total size for in out data rounded on full words 6 Words 1 Word For detailed information about status control word see online help 2 2 I O map for input data 0x0000 0000 03 15 03 14 03 13 03 12 03 11 03 10 03 08 03 08 03 07 03 06 03 05 03 04 03 03 03 02 03 01 03 00 0x0001 0001 04 15 04 14 04 13 04 12 04 11 04 10 04 08 04 08 04 07 04 06 04 05 04 04 04 03 04 02 0401 04 00 0x0002 0002 04 31 04 30 04 29 04 28 04 27 0426 042
265. us communication only for Modbus TCP FCE Force Mode Active Error The Force Mode is activated which means the actual output values may no match the ones defined and sent by the field bus 3 8 2 Control Word The Control Word has no function at the moment it is reserves for further use D301173 0713 BL20 Ethernet multiprotocol gateway 3 33 Properties gateway and I O modules 3 9 Parameters of the I O modules 3 9 1 Digital input modules BL20 4DI NAMUR Table 3 9 Byte Bit Parameter name Value Module param Meaning eters A default 0to3 0 input filter x 0 deactivate setting input filter 0 25 ms A 1 activate input filter 2 5 ms 1 digital input x 0 normalA 1 inverted 2 Short circuit monitoring x 0 deactivate A 1 activate 3 Short circuit diagnosis x 0 deactivate A 1 activate 4 Open circuit monitoring x 0 deactivate A 1 activate 5 Open circuit diagnosis x 0 deactivate A 1 activate 6 Input on diagnostic x 0 output substitute value A 1 keep last value 7 Substitute value on diag x O off A 1 on 3 9 2 Analog input modules BL20 1AI I 0 4 20MA Table 3 10 Byte Bit Parameter name Value Module param d 7 etes 0 current mode 0 0 20 mA A A default 1 4 20 mA setting 7 1 value representation 0 Integer 15 bit sign A 1 12 bit left justified 2 Diagnosis 0 activate A 1 deactivate 3 34 D301173 0713 BL20 Ethernet
266. ustified 5 diagnostics Kx 0 release A 1 block 647 substitute value 00 output substitute value options 01 hold current value 10 output min value 11 output max value 1 4 7 substitute value 10 Ax low byte 2 5 8 substitute value 11 Ax high byte D301173 0713 BL20 Ethernet multiprotocol gateway 3 47 Properties gateway and I O modules 3 9 4 Technology modules BL20 1RS232 Table 3 25 Byte Bit Parameter name Module param eters Value A default 0 3 Data rate setting toO 0000 300 bps 0001 600 bps 0010 1200 bps 0100 2400 bps 0101 4800 bps 0110 9600 bps A 0111 14400 bps 1000 19200 bps 1001 28800 bps 1010 38400 bps 1011 57600 bps 1100 115200 bps reserved 5 4 reserved 6 DisableReducedCtrl Constant setting The diagnostic messages are shown in Byte 6 of the process input data independently from Diagnosis Byte 6 of the process output data contains 2 bits with which the receive or transmit buffer can be cleared Byte 7 contains the status or control byte User data are represented in Bytes 0 5 0 7 Diagnosis O releaseA Diagnostic activated This affects the separate fieldbus specific diagnostic message not the diagnosis embedded in the process input data 1 block 3 48 D301173 0713 BL20 Ethernet multiprotocol gateway Parameters of the I O modules Industri A Table 3 25 Byte Bit Module param eters Parame
267. utput substitute The gateway switches the outputs of all modules to value 0 with the exception of analog output modules Error information is transmitted to the analog output modules Depending on their configuration these modules set their outputs either to 0 or to a default value or to maintain the original values The non configured analog output modules set their outputs to 0 8 10 D301173 0713 BL20 Ethernet multiprotocol gateway Parameterization Industri A Table 8 4 Byte Bitparameters Value Meaning gateway parameters O bit 2 bit 3 Output behavior if one module is wrong A default 10 hold current value The gateway maintains the actual output settings of setting all modules with the exception of analog output modules Error information is transmitted to the analog output modules Depending on their configuration these modules set their outputs either to 0 or to a default value or to maintain the original values The non configured analog output modules set their outputs to 0 11 exchange process The gateway carries on exchanging process data data with the other module bus stations No error information is transmitted bit 4 bit 5 Output behavior at communication loss 00 output 0 A The gateway switches the outputs of modules to 0 No error information is transmitted No error information is transmitted 01 output substitute The gateway switches the outputs of all module
268. w Options Window Help Jelx 7 Das 9 Copy Ctrl C Topology Editor Paste Ctrl V n olx Insert Redundant Suchen at aay A Example copper Paste Shared E mc fie Standard j port Delete Del a a pm EC Additional Field Devices B fiber optic port Select All Ctr A bgo C Example cop 5 8a Murs o E C3 BL20 per Symboke Em BL2OE GW EN connection Master System 3 go pese PROFINET IO PROFINET IO System gt B digital input 7 EC digital output FEELS EST Domain Management fj BL201600 24VDC 0 54 P Object Properties AlteRetum Topology BL20 2D0 120 230vAC 0 5A F Open Object With Ctr Altzo BL20 2D0 24VDC 0 54 N Isochronous Mode BL20 2D0 24VDC 0 54 P Chenge Access BL20 2D0 24VDC 2A P Selection range Filter Show all ports Filter Show all ports Miniature View Iturck fgen 107 Move picture mode deactivated Update Object Properties Options Pin Cancel Help L 9 16 D301173 0713 BL20 Ethernet multiprotocol gateway Application example 9 1 10 Online topology detection The Step 7 software allows an offline online comparison of the configured and the actually present topology 1 Start the Offline online comparison in the Topology Editor using the Start button in the respective tab Figure 9 18 Sica Tale view Graphic view Olineonine conpaison Topology E
269. was positive the configuration stored in the BL20 E 1SWIRE matches the SET configuration stored in the PLC or the diagnostics function is deactivated via the parameter setting 1 faulty A mismatch was determined in the PLC configuration check U AUXERR Voltage Unuy If the UnuyerrA parameter is activated yyege will generate an error message as soon as the power supply goes below the level at which the function of the relays is not guaranteed 0 OK Contactor supply voltage is o k gt 20 VDC or diagnostics function has been deactivated via this parameter 1 under voltage Contactor supply voltage is not o k 18 VDC D301173 0713 BL20 Ethernet multiprotocol gateway 3 67 Properties gateway and I O modules Table 3 54 Designation Valu Meaning Meaning of the e diagnostic bits Byte 3 4 TYP eppOX Device configuration slave x Info field for the individual indication of a configuration error as error message Info field for the individual indication of a configuration error as error message If theTYP co parameter is set with individual diagnostics the error is indicated in this bit fieldas soon as a PLC configuration check detects differing slave numbers types or positionof an SWIRE slave 0 OK No configuration error is present and the slave is in data exchange mode or diagnostics function has been deactivated via the parameter setting 1 incorrect Configuration error present and
270. will be read from the module s EEPROM PROFINET Please assure that in PROFINET applications the address assigned via a BootP server corresponds to the address which is assigned in the configuration tool 3 20 D301173 0713 BL20 Ethernet multiprotocol gateway Address assignment Industri A 3 5 7 Address setting via the mode PGM The PGM mode enables access of the software I O ASSISTANT FDT DTM to the module s network settings see also Addressing via I O ASSISTANT 3 FDT DTM In order to activate the PGM mode the DIP switch MODE is set to ON the address switches 2 to 27 to address 4 see Table 3 7 Combinations of address switches Figure 3 10 PGM Note Fr In the PGM mode all network settings IP address subnet mask etc are read from the module s internal EEPROM Attention After every change of the address mode a voltage reset must be carried done D301173 0713 BL20 Ethernet multiprotocol gateway 3 21 Properties gateway and I O modules 3 5 8 Address setting via the mode PGM DHCP universal mode Figure 3 11 PGM DHCP 1 MODE vr T UJSETCZE ADDRESS ifii off gt on The device sends DHCP requests until a IP address is assigned DHCP server PROFINET controller The assigned IP address is stored to the device and the DCHP client is stopped Even after a restart of the device
271. ype Trigger Cydic Cycle Time ms 100 Comment READ Register Offset 0x0004 Length i Error Handling Keep last Value Y WRITE Register Offset 0x0000 Length 1 D niea nte ti Current user nobody A Pous 3e Devices D301173 0713 BL20 Ethernet multiprotocol gateway 7 23 Application example BL20 E GW EN for Modbus TCP CoDeSys Win V3 Figure 7 25 Status Word in Project Build Online Debug Tools Window Hel the process i Ba x dA ERIS OS gt wll image i i aha StartPage fj Device gt fj BL20 E GW EN 2 PLC PRG GVL f Modbus TCP Master x Modbus Slave Channel Modbus Slave Init ModbusTCPSlave Configuration ModbusTCPSlave I O Mapping status In gt Channels Application Variable Mapping Channel Address Type Unit Description d cv Application PLC PRGc Counter value 1 GWS WORD WRITE 16 08 fif Library Manager xReset WORD READ 165000 E PLc PRG PRG e li Status wi woR READ 165000 a Task Configuration Bit 0 BOOL MainTask Bit1 BOOL ff Ethernet Ethernet Bit 2 BOOL Bcc Bit3 BOOL BL20 E GW EN Bit4 BOOL Bits BOOL Bit 6 6 BOOL Bit7 BOOL Bit 8 BOOL Bit 9 BOOL Bit 10 BOOL Bit 11 BOOL Bit 12 BOOL 4 m READ 16 0004 00004 i T Always update variables IEC Objects Variable Mapping Type BL20 E GW EN Insta ModbusT
272. yte is required to ensure trouble free transmission of the data E 1byte contains the diagnostics data E 6bytesare used to contain the user data Figure 13 1 Process input data of RSxxx modules 13 2 D301173 0713 BL20 Ethernet multiprotocol gateway Data image of the technology modules Industri A Table 13 1 Designation Valu Description Meaning of the e data bits process input BufOvfl 0 Diagnostic information correspond to the diagnostic information in the FrameErr 255 diagnosis telegram HndShErr These diagnostics are always displayed and independent to the setting of the HwFailure parameter Diagnostics PrmErr STAT 0 1 1 The communication with the data terminal equipment DTE is not disturbed 0 The communication with the data terminal equipment DTE is disturbed A diagnosis message is generated if the parameter Diagnostics is set to 0 release The diagnostic data show the cause of the communication disturbance The user has to set back this bit in the process output data by using STATRES TX CNT ACK 0 3 The value TX CNT ACKis a copy of the value TX CNT The value TX CNT was transferred together with the last data segment of the process output data The value TX CNT ACK is a confirmation of successful acceptance of the data segment using TX CNT RX CNT 0 3 This value is transferred together with every data segment The RX_CNT values are sequential The RX_CNT valu

BL20 – User manual Multiprotocol-gateway for ETHERNET

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents

BL20 &ndash; User manual Multiprotocol-gateway for ETHERNET

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents

BL20 – User manual Multiprotocol-gateway for ETHERNET